JP2021016687A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine which can carry out appropriate processing in accordance with a situation.SOLUTION: A game machine includes power supply means, first control means which receives power from the power supply means and carries out control, a second control means which receives power from the power supply means and carries out control on the basis of indication information from the first control means, and monitoring means which monitors the power supplied to the second control means and issues a notification to the second control means. The second control means carries out activation processing which is changed in accordance with the notification from the monitoring means.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 8-18

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a slot machine capable of playing a game.

As a game machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when the game ball wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something that can be done. Further, a variable display device capable of variable display (also referred to as “variation”) of the identification information is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result in the variable display device, the gaming state (game). The state of the machine. Therefore, specifically, the state in which the game machine is controlled) is changed to give a predetermined game value to the player (so-called pachinko machine).

Further, after setting a predetermined number of bets for one game on a predetermined game medium, the player operates the start lever to start variable display of the identification information by the variable display device, and the player changes each. By operating the stop button provided corresponding to the display device, the variable display of the identification information is stopped within the range of the maximum delay time predetermined from the operation timing, and the variable display of all the variable display devices is displayed. When a prize is generated according to the display result derived when the game is stopped, a predetermined game medium determined in advance is paid out according to the prize, and a specific prize is generated, the player sets the game state to the predetermined game value. There is something that is configured to give to (so-called slot machine).

The game value means that the state of the variable winning ball device provided in the game area of the game machine becomes an advantageous state for the player who is likely to win a winning ball, or a state advantageous for the player. It is to generate rights and to be in a state where the conditions for paying out prize balls are easily satisfied.

In the pachinko gaming machine, as a display result of the variable display of the special symbol (identification information) started in the variable display device based on the winning of the game ball in the starting winning opening, a predetermined specific display mode is derived and displayed. If it is done, a "big hit" will occur. The derived display is to finally stop and display the symbol (final stop symbol). When a big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening opens a predetermined number of times to shift to a big hit game state in which a hit ball is easy to win. Then, in each opening period, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) is won in the large winning opening, the large winning opening is closed. The number of times the large winning opening is opened is fixed to a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the large winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each large winning opening may be referred to as a round. In addition, a game in a round may be called a round game.

Further, in the variable display device, symbols other than the symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol among the left, middle, and right symbols) are stopped and shaken in a state of being consistent with a specific display result for a predetermined time. A big hit can occur before the final result is displayed due to movement, enlargement / reduction or deformation, multiple symbols fluctuating synchronously with the same symbol, or the positions of the displayed symbols being swapped. The effect performed in the state where the sex is continued (hereinafter, these states are referred to as the reach state) is referred to as the reach effect. In addition, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Further, the variable display including the reach effect is called the reach variable display. Then, when the display result of the symbol that is variablely displayed on the variable display device is not a specific display result, it becomes "off" and the variable display state ends. The player plays the game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

In such a game machine, for example, Patent Document 1 describes that a sub-control unit stores error history data and displays it on a liquid crystal display unit. It is also stated that the types of errors that are stored include power off.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-153681

However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, since the power is stored as off without distinguishing between when the entire gaming machine is restarted and when only the sub-control unit is restarted, the power is turned on. The situation cannot be determined appropriately, and there is a possibility that the processing is not optimally executed, such as unnecessary processing being executed.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of executing optimum processing according to a situation.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like). ), A power supply means (for example, a power supply board), a first control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11) that receives power supply from the power supply means and controls the power supply. A second control means (for example, a second effect control CPU012IW120b mounted on the second effect control board 012IW12b) and a second control unit that receive power from the means and perform control based on instruction information from the first control means. The monitoring means (for example, the power supply supplied to the second effect control board 012IW12b is monitored and the power supply voltage is less than a predetermined value (for example, + 8V)) that monitors the power supply supplied to the means and notifies the second control means. Occasionally, a power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127 (power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127) that outputs a power supply cutoff signal to the second effect control CPU 012IW120b and a storage means (for example, a backup memory board) that can retain the stored contents even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. The backup data memory of 099IW14 (099IW210A to 210D) is provided, and the second control means executes different start-up processing in response to a notification from the monitoring means at the start of control (for example, from the power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127 at the start of control). When the power cutoff signal is input, the start of control is waited until the input of the power cutoff signal is stopped. The portion where the second effect control CPU012IW120b executes the processing of steps 099IWS001 and 099IWS002. On the other hand, the control When the power supply cutoff signal is not input from the power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127 at the start, the log information including the acquired date and time information as the system reset date and time of the second effect control board 012IW12b is included in the log area without waiting for the start of control. The monitoring means notifies that the power supply voltage of the supplied power supply has changed from less than a predetermined value to more than or equal to the predetermined value in the part where the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes the processing of steps 099IWS001 and 099IWS003). When (for example, when the power supply cutoff signal is input from the power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127 at the start of control and then the input of the power supply cutoff signal is stopped), a predetermined start-up is performed based on the instruction information from the first control means. Information (for example, power-on date and time, setting change start date and time, setting confirmation open The start date and time, the RAM clear date and time, etc.) are stored in the storage means (for example, the portion where the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes processing such as step 099IWS205, step 012IWS802, step 012IWS805, and step 012IWS809), and further, the player (For example, stick controller 31A, controller sensor unit 35A, etc.) and specific display means (for example, active display area 87AKA1, first hold display area 87AKB1,) capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to variable display. A second hold display area 87AKB2, etc.), a promotion effect execution means capable of executing a promotion effect that promotes the movement of the player (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes step 87AKS051 of the effect processing during variable display), and a detection means. An operation effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes step 87AKS053 of the effect processing during variable display) that can execute the operation effect based on the detection result of the above, and a predetermined effect that can execute the predetermined effect during the execution of the variable display. The specific display means includes a plurality of display means (for example, a CPU 120 for effect control that executes step 87AKS049 of the effect process during variable display), and the specific display means includes a specific mode (for example, a red display using the display image 87AKC4). The specific display can be displayed by any one of the modes (for example, the display color corresponding to the display images 87AKC1 to 87AKC4), and the promotion effect executing means is a special mode (for example, a large V-con display using the display image 87AKF3). The promotion effect can be executed by any one of a plurality of effect modes (for example, the size of the V-con display according to the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3) including the predetermined effect execution means, and the predetermined effect execution means is the predetermined mode (for example, the display image 87AKE3). I used "super heat! !! The predetermined effect can be executed by any one of a plurality of effect modes (for example, a message corresponding to the display images 87AKE1 to 87AKE3) including the message of the specific display, and the predetermined effect is determined at different ratios according to the display mode of the specific display. A predetermined effect is executed depending on the mode (see, for example, 87AK41, a determination example of the cut-in effect in FIG. 10-12), and a promotion effect is executed at a different ratio according to the effect mode of the predetermined effect (for example, FIG. 10-). (Refer to 87AK51, a determination example of the promotion effect according to the cut-in effect in 13), the promotion is controlled in an advantageous state at different ratios according to the effect mode of the promotion effect (for example, promotion according to the variable display result in FIG. 10-13). (Refer to 87AK51, which is a determination example of the production).
According to such a configuration, the optimum processing can be executed depending on the situation. In addition, it is possible to appropriately raise the expectation of the player by directing and improve the interest of the game.

(2) In the game machine of (1) above, the second control means is until the monitoring means notifies that the power supply voltage of the supplied power supply is equal to or higher than a predetermined value (for example, + 8V) (for example, power supply monitoring). The control may not be started (for example, the portion where the second effect control CPU012IW120b executes the processing of steps 099IWS001 and 099IWS002) until the input of the power supply cutoff signal is stopped from the circuit 099IW127.
According to such a configuration, the optimum processing can be executed depending on the situation.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above, when the monitoring means notifies the second control means that the power supply voltage of the power supply supplied is equal to or higher than a predetermined value at the start of control, A predetermined image is displayed on the display means, and the predetermined information is not stored in the storage means (for example, when a system reset of the second effect control board 012IW12b occurs, the initial image is displayed on the image display device 5, but the step Since the process of 099IWS204 is not executed and the command at power-on such as the setting change command, the setting confirmation command, and the initialization specification command is not received, the log information related to them may not be stored).
According to such a configuration, the optimum processing can be executed depending on the situation.

(4) In the game machine of (3) above, the storage means are a first storage means (for example, a first log area for recording log information for a game store) and a second storage means (for example, for a game machine maker). The second control means is notified by the monitoring means that the power supply voltage of the supplied power supply has changed from less than a predetermined value to more than the predetermined value at the start of control, including the second log area for recording the log information). At that time, predetermined information regarding activation is stored in the first storage means based on the instruction information from the first control means (for example, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is in step 099IWS204, step 012IWS802, step 012IWS805, step 012IWS809. When the monitoring means notifies that the power supply voltage of the supplied power supply is equal to or higher than the predetermined value at the start of control, it is possible to identify that only the second control means has restarted. Specific information (for example, log information including the system reset date and time) is stored in the second storage means (for example, the portion where the second effect control CPU012IW120b executes the processing of step 099IWS001 N and step 099IWS003). May be good.
According to such a configuration, the optimum processing can be executed depending on the situation.

(5) In the gaming machine of (4) above, the second control means includes a first backup process for storing control-related information in the first storage means (for example, a backup process for storing log information in the first log area). , A second backup process for storing control information in a second storage means (for example, a backup process for storing log information in a second log area) can be executed, and the first backup process stores one piece of information. In the second backup process, one piece of information may be stored in a plurality of storage areas (see, for example, FIG. 8-19).
According to such a configuration, the optimum processing can be executed depending on the situation.

In addition, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the inventions related to the following gaming machines (6) to (13). Conventionally, in a game machine, when a player operates a button during an operation valid period as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-164504, if the expectation of a big hit differs depending on the mode of display or production. There was something to do. In such a game machine, the degree of expectation of a big hit only differs depending on the display and the mode of the production when the player operates it, and it is difficult to appropriately raise the expectation of the player by the production. In view of this point, it is required to provide a game machine that appropriately raises the player's expectation by directing and enhances the game entertainment.

The game machine (6) is a game machine (for example, pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display, and the operation of the player can be controlled. Detectable detection means (for example, stick controller 31A, controller sensor unit 35A, etc.) and specific display means capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to variable display (for example, active display area 87AKA1, first hold display area 87AKAB1, second hold). (Display area 87AKB2, etc.), promotion effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120 that executes step 87AKS051 of effect processing during variable display) that can execute promotion effect that promotes the movement of the player, and detection of the detection means. An operation effect execution means that can execute an operation effect based on the result (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes step 87AKS053 of the effect process during variable display) and a predetermined effect execution that can execute a predetermined effect during execution of the variable display. The specific display means includes means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes step 87AKS049 of the effect processing during variable display), and the specific display means includes a plurality of display modes (for example, red display using the display image 87AKC4). The specific display can be displayed by any one of (for example, display colors corresponding to the display images 87AKC1 to 87AKC4), and the promotion effect executing means is a special mode (for example, a large V-con display using the display image 87AKF3). The promotion effect can be executed by any one of a plurality of effect modes including (for example, the size of the V-con display corresponding to the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3), and the predetermined effect executing means is a predetermined mode (for example, display). The predetermined effect can be executed by any one of a plurality of effect modes (for example, a message corresponding to the displayed images 87AKE1 to 87AKE3) including a message of "extreme heat !!" using the image 87AKE3, and the specific effect is specified. Depending on the display mode of the display, the predetermined effect is executed at a different ratio according to the predetermined mode (see, for example, 87AK41, a determination example of the cut-in effect in FIG. 10-12), and the effect differs depending on the effect mode of the predetermined effect. The promotion effect is executed in proportion to the special aspect (see, for example, 87AK51, a determination example of the promotion effect according to the cut-in effect in FIG. 10-13), and the advantage is different in proportion depending on the effect mode of the promotion effect. Controlled by state (for example, variable display connection in FIG. 10-13) See 87AK51, an example of determining the promotion effect according to the result).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately raise the expectation of the player by directing and improve the game entertainment.

(7) In the gaming machine of the above (6), after the specific display is displayed by the specific display means and before the motion effect is executed by the motion effect execution means, the predetermined effect is executed by the predetermined effect execution means. May be feasible (see, eg, FIG. 10-9 (B3)).
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately raise the expectation of the player by directing and improve the game entertainment.

(8) In the game machine according to (6) or (7), the specific display is displayed in response to the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, at the time of the second timing cut-in effect in FIG. 10-9 (B3)). It may be possible to change the display mode.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately raise the expectation of the player by directing and improve the game entertainment.

(9) In any of the game machines (6) to (8) above, depending on which of the plurality of effect modes the predetermined effect is executed (for example, the display image 87AKE1 in the cut-in effect determination example 87AK41). It may be possible to change the display mode of the specific display at different rates (such as when it is determined to be any of ~ 87AKE3).
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately raise the expectation of the player by directing and improve the game entertainment.

(10) In any of the game machines (6) to (9), the display mode of the specific display corresponds to the specific mode before the predetermined effect is executed by the predetermined effect executing means. (For example, when the first timing is determined to be the change pattern 87AKP1-3 in the change pattern determination example 87AK22), it is not necessary to change the display mode of the specific display.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately raise the expectation of the player by directing and improve the game entertainment.

(11) In any of the game machines (6) to (10) above, a setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player (for example, FIG. 9-6). The specific display may be displayed in any one of a plurality of display modes at different ratios depending on the setting of the setting means, such as the CPU 103 that executes the setting value changing process in step S6A.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately raise the expectation of the player by directing and improve the game entertainment.

(12) In any of the game machines (6) to (11) above, a setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player (for example, FIG. 9-6). The predetermined effect may be executed in any one of a plurality of effect modes at different ratios depending on the setting of the setting means, etc., including the CPU 103 that executes the set value change process in step S6A.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately raise the expectation of the player by directing and improve the game entertainment.

(13) In any of the game machines (6) to (12) above, a setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player (for example, FIG. 9-6). The promotion effect may be executed in any one of a plurality of effect modes at different ratios depending on the setting of the setting means, for example, the CPU 103 that executes the set value change process in step S6A in FIG. Decision example 87AK61 of promotion effect in 10-16).
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately raise the expectation of the player by directing and improve the game entertainment.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in the feature part 099IW. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the 2nd effect control board. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the backup memory board. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine in the state where the frame for the gaming machine is opened. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the loss variation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main processing in the feature part 099IW. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main processing in the feature part 099IW. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main processing in the feature part 099IW. It is explanatory drawing which shows the process executed at the time of power-on. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode of the display monitor in the setting change processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows a part of the effect control main processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution example of the backup process with different multiplicity. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of CPU exception event occurrence. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt process for effect control. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the initial roll determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start waiting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the suggestion effect decision table before a game. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the suggestion effect determination processing during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the suggestion effect decision table during a game. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production decision processing during a big hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the suggestion effect determination table, the accessory effect effect determination table, and the light guide plate effect determination table during a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the ending effect processing. It is a flowchart which shows the error notification processing. It is a flowchart which shows the error notification processing. It is a flowchart which shows the error notification processing. It is a flowchart which shows the error notification processing. It is a flowchart which shows maintenance mode processing. It is a flowchart which shows the setting change time recording process. It is a flowchart which shows the present time setting process. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the setting timing of the present time. It is a flowchart which shows the power failure date and time recording processing. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the recording timing of the log information of the power failure date and time. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the display screen in maintenance mode. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the display screen in maintenance mode. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the display screen in maintenance mode. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the display screen in maintenance mode. It is a figure which shows the security cover in the modification 1. It is a figure which shows the opening and closing of the frame for a game machine in the modification 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the security cover in the modification 2. It is a figure which shows the opening and closing of the frame for a game machine in the modification 2. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pachinko game machine in the modification 3. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the maintenance history screen in the modification 4. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the maintenance history screen in the modification 5. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the numerical value range corresponding to 1st special drawing. It is a figure which shows the numerical value range corresponding to 1st special drawing. It is a figure which shows the numerical value range corresponding to 2nd special drawing. It is a figure which shows the numerical value range corresponding to 2nd special drawing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing in the game control main processing. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the screen display. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the variation pattern determination example. It is a figure which shows the active display example and suggestion effect example. It is a figure which shows the cut-in effect example and the promotion effect example. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect determination process. It is a figure which shows the determination example of the final display image. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the change pattern. It is a figure which shows the determination example of the change pattern. It is a figure which shows the decision example about the suggestion effect. It is a figure which shows the determination example of the cut-in effect. It is a figure which shows the determination example of the promotion effect which concerns on the feature part 87AK. It is a figure which shows the determination example of the promotion effect which concerns on the feature part 88AK. It is a figure which shows the determination example of the promotion effect which concerns on the feature part 89AK. It is a figure which shows the determination example of the promotion effect which becomes a modification. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect processing during variable display. It is a figure which shows the production execution example. It is a figure which shows the production execution example. It is a figure which shows the production execution example. It is a figure which shows the production execution example. It is a figure which shows the production execution example.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area.

A variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of a special symbol (also referred to as a special figure) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the right side of the game area). The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to be performed are provided. Each of these consists of 7-segment LEDs and the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Fluctuations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. When the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later is changed, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbols described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). In addition, the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variable display.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effects images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variable display. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of stored items on hold. The number of reserved storages corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storages corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

Further, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A has the number of LEDs lit. The first hold storage number is displayed, and the second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LED lights.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening that is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the tip of the movable wing pieces is in a vertical position. Is close to the winning ball device 6A and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is in the on state (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any as long as it changes between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electric tulip type accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four locations on the lower left and right sides of the game area), general winning openings 10 are provided, which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and has a large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door (for special electric accessory) is in the off state, the large winning opening door closes the large winning opening and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and performs variable display of the ordinary symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal pattern game.

On the left side of the image display device 5, a passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

Above the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3, and game effect lamps 9 for game effects are further provided around the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

A movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided at a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2.

At the lower right position of the game machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the striking ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, the game balls paid out as prize balls and the game balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the pachinko game machine 1 by the player on the ball striking operation handle 30. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal drawing game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 but the normal drawing game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if the normal symbol other than the normal symbol (the normal symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as the confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per normal drawing", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed, or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (the start prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start winning cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a jackpot symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined mode. The open state is a combination of the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as an open upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is open in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the opening upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc., which will be described later) are prepared, and the big hit is made according to these. The type is set. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained or a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as the big hit game state in some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big winning opening becomes open. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened as compared with the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Controls (high opening control, high base control) that make it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening are also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probability variation state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is a state in which a “big hit” is likely to occur in addition to improving the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol.

The time saving state and the probability change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number cut (time cut time reduction, number cut probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, or a probability change state, which is advantageous for the player, and the display result in the normal drawing game is "normal drawing hit". The pachinko game machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on, such as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as (when the process is not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time saving control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, the time saving state is also called the low accuracy high base state, the probability variation state is called the high accuracy high base state, and the normal state is also called the low accuracy low base state. The high accuracy state and the low base state are also called the high accuracy low base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that there may be no "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, and in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or the game effect lamp 9 It may be performed by the point or the like, turning off the light, operating the movable body 32, or the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is a mode in which is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol which is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of a "probability change jackpot" that is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and displayed as a stop, and the probability change state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be aligned and displayed as a stop. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern is in the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", the fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example," "is a predetermined small hit combination as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5. 1 3 5 ”etc.) Is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of big hit game state in the same mode as small hit game state) and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a jackpot combination. The fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution, and a look-ahead advance notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the look-ahead notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and then the variable display is restarted to make one variable display look like a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type in the big hit game state having the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a high accuracy state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high accuracy state and the low accuracy state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a game state, a small hit game state, a game state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It includes an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). It takes in a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a prize-winning door. To transmit.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (a command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)) and a variation pattern used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of winning, the number of stored memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing the program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). (Including the decision etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the output sound) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating a lamp on / off mode) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. It is configured to include the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the game machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a processing of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a data protection processing of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, various timer states, etc.) for advancing the game, as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (used by using an error detection code) and determines whether or not the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined by the parity bit or the checksum whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored to the state when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power failure that is backed up, and an effect control that specifies the display result of the special figure game that is being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may want to send a command. For these commands, the same commands that are set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command that specifies the time of recovery from the power failure, the image display device 5, for example, notifies that the image display device 5 has recovered from the power failure or is recovering from the power failure. Display the screen to do so. The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After the restoration process or the initialization process is completed and the effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of times the jackpot has occurred) and the start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information such as the number of times of winning and the probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of the probability change state) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like (for details, see See below).

Following the special symbol process processing, the normal symbol process processing is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal figure reservations is displayed by turning on the normal figure hold display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After the hold information and the number of hold storages are stored, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning prize, the number of hold storages, and the look-ahead determination is made on the effect control board 12. .. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set to "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when the display result is set to "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be memorized, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various determinations based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the determination value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the determination result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is used by using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The process of deciding on is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. The content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.) is specified, and it is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol change processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are set to change the special symbol, and the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Includes processing to make settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "missing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "miss", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening by starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the open upper limit period for keeping the big winning opening in the open state and the upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this process during opening of the big hit, the process of measuring the elapsed time since the large winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like are used as the basis for the large winning opening. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. Ends processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the jackpot has reached the set upper limit execution number, and a jackpot game state when the upper limit execution number is reached. It includes processing to make settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the post-launch processing is completed.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end processing ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the large winning opening to be in the open state in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to measure the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is. When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

(Main operation of the effect control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. When the effect control board 12 receives the power supply voltage from the power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and press the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). In addition, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like. Turn on the provided receive flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the lookahead advance notice setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead advance notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, and setting for executing the look-ahead notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to, for example, the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is completed. The display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and commanding the lamp control board 14 (illumination signal). Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED according to the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the small hit game state is terminated, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the jackpot middle effect processing, for example, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the jackpot game state is terminated. Update to 7 ”and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process ends.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but the game medium is enclosed and a score is given based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko game machine 1 is shown as the game machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player If the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The execution mode of the game is not limited to the one executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In addition, in this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a proportion of "0%" and the other may have a proportion of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of feature 099IW)
Next, the feature unit 099IW will be described. FIG. 8-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in the feature unit 099IW. In this feature unit 099IW, as shown in FIG. 8-1, a passing gate 012IW041 is provided on the right side of the image display device 5 in place of the passing gate 41 shown in FIG. The game ball that has passed through the passing gate 012IW041 is detected by the gate switch 012IW021 (see FIG. 8-2).

Further, in this feature unit 099IW, as shown in FIG. 8-1, instead of the special variable winning ball device 7 shown in FIG. 1, the first special winning opening forming the first large winning opening is formed on the right side of the game area. A variable winning device 012IW007a and a second special variable winning device 012IW007a constituting the second large winning opening are provided. The game ball that has won the first special variable winning device 012IW007a is detected by the first count switch 012IW023a (see FIG. 8-2). The game ball that has won the second special variable winning device 012IW007b is detected by the second count switch 012IW023b (see FIG. 8-2). Further, a so-called V winning area is provided in the second special variable winning device 012IW007b, and the game ball that has won the V winning area in the second special variable winning device 012IW007b is a V winning switch 012IW024 (FIG. 8- 2) is detected.

In this example, the game ball that has won the general winning opening 10 is detected by the winning opening switch 012IW010a (see FIG. 8-2).

Further, in this example, when the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) inputs the detection signal from the gate switch 012IW021 (when the game ball passes through the passing gate 012IW041), the game ball passes through the passing gate 012IW041. Control is performed to transmit a gate passage designation command for designating that has passed to the second effect control board 012IW12b. Further, when the game control microcomputer 100 inputs the detection signal from the winning opening switch 012IW010a (when the game ball wins in the general winning opening 10), the winning opening for designating that the game ball has won in the general winning opening 10. Control is performed to transmit the winning designation command to the second effect control board 012IW12b.

Further, in this example, when the game control microcomputer 100 receives, for example, a command indicating that the hit ball supply plate (lower plate) has been detected from the payout control microcomputer mounted on the payout control board. , Controls to transmit a full tank detection command indicating that the full tank state of the hit ball supply plate (lower plate) has been detected to the second effect control board 012IW12b. The payout control microcomputer, for example, confirms whether or not a detection signal from a full tank switch for detecting a full tank state provided on the hit ball supply plate (lower plate) has been input to hit the ball. It is possible to detect the full state of the supply plate (lower plate).

In this example, since the passing gate 012IW041 is provided in the right area of the game area, when the game state is controlled to the high base state, the player shoots at the right side of the game area. It is advantageous to perform the operation (so-called right-handed operation). Further, in this example, since the first special variable winning device 012IW007a and the second special variable winning device 012IW007b are provided in the right area of the game area, the player performs a right-handed operation during the big hit game. Is advantageous.

On the other hand, in this example, when the gaming state is not controlled to the high base state (that is, controlled to the low base state) and the jackpot game is not in progress, the player aims at the left side of the game area. It is considered that it is easier for the game ball to win the first start winning opening and it is advantageous to perform the firing operation (so-called left-handed operation).

In this feature unit 099IW, for example, a 16-round jackpot game is executed in the case of a probability variation jackpot, and in the 1st to 3rd rounds and the 5th to 16th rounds, the first special variable winning device 012IW007a is used. It is controlled to be open until a predetermined period (29.5 seconds in this example) elapses or a predetermined number (10 in this example) of game balls are won, and in the fourth round, the second special variable winning is won. The device 012IW007b is controlled in an open state until a predetermined period (29.5 seconds in this example) elapses or a predetermined number (10 in this example) of game balls are won. Then, on the condition that the game ball wins in the V winning area in the second special variable winning device 012IW007b in the fourth round, the game state is controlled to the probabilistic state after the big hit game ends. In this example, in the case of a probability variation jackpot, winning in the V winning area is a condition, but the second special variable winning device 012IW007b is opened for a relatively long period of time (29.5 seconds in this example). Therefore, it will be controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game is completed.

In the feature unit 099IW, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) is subjected to the big hit opening process (step S115) and the big hit opening post-processing (step S116) of the special symbol process process (step S25). When it is detected that a game ball has won a prize in the V winning area in the second special variable winning device 012IW007b (specifically, when an on signal from the V winning switch 012IW024 is input), the game ball is placed in the V winning area. Control is performed to transmit a V prize designation command for designating that a prize has been won (a V prize has occurred) to the second effect control CPU 012IW120b.

Further, in the case of a non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot), for example, a 16-round jackpot game is executed, and in the 1st to 3rd rounds and the 5th to 16th rounds, the first special variable winning device 012IW007a Is controlled to the open state until a predetermined period (29.5 seconds in this example) elapses or a predetermined number (10 in this example) of game balls are won, and in the fourth round, the second special variable The winning device 012IW007b is controlled to be in the open state until a very short period (0.1 seconds in this example) elapses. In this example, in the case of a normal jackpot, the second special variable winning device 012IW007b is controlled to the open state in the fourth round as in the case of the probability variation jackpot, but for an extremely short period (0.1 in this example). Since it is only released for a second), it is rarely controlled to a probabilistic state after the jackpot game ends.

Further, in this feature unit 099IW, as shown in FIG. 8-2, the first effect control board 012IW12a and the second effect control board 012IW12b are mounted in place of the effect control board 12 shown in FIG.

The first effect control board 012IW12a, which receives power from the power supply board, includes a first effect control CPU 012IW120a, ROM012IW121a, RAM012IW122a, a display control unit 012IW123, and I / O 012IW125a. The first effect control CPU012IW120a has a function of receiving a command from the second effect control CPU 012IW120b mounted on the second effect control board 012IW12b and executing the effect based on the received command. Further, in this example, the detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B are input to the first effect control CPU012IW120a mounted on the first effect control board 012IW12a. In this example, the first effect control CPU012IW120a is set to have a timer interrupt time of 10 ms at the start of power supply, and a timer interrupt is generated every 10 ms to execute various processes.

The second effect control board 012IW12b, which receives power from the power supply board, includes a second effect control CPU 012IW120b, ROM012IW121b, RAM012IW122b, a random number circuit 012IW124, I / O012IW125b, a real-time clock 012IW126, and a power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127. The second effect control CPU012IW120b has a function of executing the effect control main process, and also receives an effect control command from the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 that receives power from the power supply board. It has a function to execute the effect control process processing based on the effect control command (however, it controls the effect means such as the actual image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R, and the game effect lamp 9, and the stick controller 31A, etc. The part that receives the input from the input means such as the push button 31B is controlled by the first effect control CPU012IW120a). In this example, the second effect control CPU012IW120b is set to have a timer interrupt time of 10 ms at the start of power supply, and a timer interrupt is generated every 10 ms to execute various processes.

Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b has a function of recording predetermined log information in the log area provided in the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14. Although the details will be described later, the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14 can retain the stored contents even when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b also has a function of recording predetermined log information in a log area provided in the RAM 012IW 122b by using the date and time information output by the real-time clock 012IW126. The RAM012IW122b is backed up by a backup power supply mounted on a power supply board (not shown), and even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, the log information recorded in the log area is retained for at least a predetermined period.

The power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127 monitors the power supply supplied to the second effect control board 012IW12b, and when the power supply voltage is less than a predetermined value (for example, + 8V), the power supply cutoff signal is sent to the second effect control CPU 012IW120b. Is output. Specifically, the power off signal is turned on (low level). In this feature unit 099IW, the power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127 is provided on the second effect control board 012IW12b, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and for example, a relay board on the power supply board or between the power supply board. It may be provided on the top. In this case, the power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127 may be configured to be able to output a power supply cutoff signal to the main board 11, the second effect control board 012IW12b, the first effect control board 012IW12a, and the like. Further, for example, the power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127 may be provided on the main board 11 so that the main board 11 can output a signal corresponding to the power supply cutoff signal to the second effect control board 012IW12b.

In the second effect control board 012IW12b, a power supply of + 3V or + 1V is generated from + 12V by the power supply circuit mounted on the second effect control board 012IW12b. The second effect control CPU012IW120b can operate if + 3V is supplied (for example, the core operates at + 1V and communication with the ROM becomes possible at + 3V), but the power supply circuit that generates + 3V or + 1V is Since + 3V can be generated if + 4 to 5V is supplied, there is a possibility that the operation will occur before the power is stably supplied.

Therefore, when the power is supplied to the second effect control board 012IW12b, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b receives a power cutoff signal from the power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127 (that is, the supplied power supply voltage is a predetermined value). While it is less than (for example, + 8V), the control is not started, and when the input of the power off signal is stopped (that is, the supplied power supply voltage becomes a predetermined value (for example, + 8V) or more, and the power supply is turned on. It is configured to start control (when it is stably supplied). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the second effect control CPU012IW120b from operating before the power is stably supplied.

If the power supply to the game machine is stopped and then the power supply to the game machine is started, the power supply is started when the control of the second effect control CPU012IW120b is started (that is, when the operation becomes possible). A power supply cutoff signal is input from the monitoring circuit 099IW127, and after a waiting period until the input of the power supply cutoff signal is stopped (that is, until the supplied power supply voltage rises and exceeds a predetermined value (for example, + 8V)), The control of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is started (corresponding to the process in the case of Y in step 099IWS001 described later). Further, in this case, the second effect control CPU012IW120b receives at least an initialization designation command or a recovery command from the game control microcomputer 100.

On the other hand, if the system reset of the second effect control CPU012IW120b occurs, the power supply of the game machine itself is not stopped, and the control of the second effect control CPU012IW120b is started (that is, the operation becomes possible). (When), the power supply cutoff signal is not input from the power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127 (that is, the supplied power supply voltage has already risen and therefore exceeds a predetermined value (for example, + 8V)), and the standby period is extended. The control of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is started without passing through (corresponding to the process in the case of N in step 099IWS001 described later). Further, in this case, the second effect control CPU012IW120b does not transmit the power-on command such as the initialization designation command and the recovery command from the game control microcomputer 100.

Therefore, the second effect control CPU012IW120b may have a power failure of the game machine itself depending on the presence or absence of the standby period at the start of control (that is, when the operation becomes possible), or the system reset of the second effect control CPU012IW120b may occur. Can be identified as to whether or not has occurred. Specifically, the second effect control CPU012IW120b has changed from less than a predetermined value to more than a predetermined value when there is a standby period at the start of control (that is, after it becomes operable). Is notified from the power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127 due to the state of the power supply cutoff signal), it can be identified that the power failure of the game machine itself has occurred. Further, in the second effect control CPU012IW120b, when there is no standby period at the start of control (that is, when the operation becomes possible, the power supply voltage of the supplied power supply is already equal to or higher than a predetermined value from the power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127. (When notified by the state of the power cutoff signal), it can be specified that the system reset of the second effect control CPU012IW120b has occurred. Hereinafter, the expressions of power failure of the game machine itself and restart of the game machine itself are used, but this is at least the power of the main board 11 and the effect control board (for example, the first effect control board 012IW12a and the second effect control board 012IW12b). It is a concept that includes a disconnection or restart.

As shown in FIG. 8-2, the second effect control board 012IW12b is interconnected with the backup memory board 099IW14. The backup memory board 099IW14 is a board for storing backup data provided separately from the first effect control board 012IW12a and the second effect control board 012IW12b, and the backup data is backed up according to the backup control signal from the second effect control board 012IW12b. It is configured to be able to execute write processing and read processing of. In the backup data writing process, the backup data is written and stored in the backup data memory. In the backup data reading process, the backup data stored in the backup data memory is read and transmitted to the second effect control board 012IW12b or the like.

FIG. 8-3 shows a configuration example of the second effect control board 012IW12b. Some or all of the electronic components such as the second effect control CPU012IW120b, ROM012IW121b, and RAM012IW122b mounted on the second effect control board 012IW12b can be attached and detached by inserting and removing the connector pins from the connector sockets. It may be attached, and other components may be attached so as to be mountable by soldering or the like. A connector 099IW150, a connector 099IW151, a connector 099IW154, and a connector 099IW156 are mounted on the second effect control board 012IW12b together with these electronic components. Further, the second effect control board 012IW12b is configured to include a plurality of electronic components such as the serial communication circuit 099IW137 in addition to the electronic components such as the second effect control CPU012IW120b, ROM012IW121b, and RAM012IW122b.

The serial communication circuit 099IW137 is a circuit capable of transmitting and receiving communication data by a serial communication method to various boards and circuits other than the second effect control board 012IW12b. The serial communication circuit 099IW137 may be capable of transmitting and receiving communication data corresponding to a plurality of types of serial communication standards such as UART (Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter), SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface), and I2C (Inter-Integrated Circuit). The serial communication circuit 099IW137 may include a plurality of communication processing units including a receiving unit, a transmitting unit, a communication control unit, a serial communication data register, a serial status register, a serial control register, and the like. UART is a pace-synchronized serial communication standard that transfers communication data using a start bit and a stop bit. In this case, the clock signal line is unnecessary, but the communication speed (baud rate) is relatively low. SPI and I2C are clock-synchronous serial communication standards, and transfer communication data using a clock signal. In this case, a clock signal line is required, but the communication speed (baud rate) is relatively high. In the case of SPI, signal lines corresponding to each of the clock signal, the transmission data signal, the reception data signal, and the slave selection signal are provided. In the case of I2C, a signal line corresponding to each of the clock signal and the data signal is provided. The plurality of communication processing units included in the serial communication circuit 099IW137 may have different hardware configurations according to the plurality of types of serial communication standards.

The connector 099IW150, the connector 099IW151, the connector 099IW154, and the connector 099IW156 are configured by using, for example, a receptacle, and have a configuration of a wiring connection device capable of detachably connecting various signal wirings. The connector 099IW150, the connector 099IW151, the connector 099IW154, and the connector 099IW156 enable various signals to be output via different paths such as different wiring patterns on the second effect control board 012IW12b. The connector 099IW150 is a connector port for main board wiring that can connect the main board wiring that is electrically connected to the main board 11. The connector 099IW151 is a connector port for power supply wiring to which a power supply wiring electrically connected to a power supply unit such as a power supply board can be connected. The connector 099IW154 is a connector port for backup wiring to which a backup wiring electrically connected to a backup unit such as the backup memory board 099IW14 can be connected. The connector 099IW156 is a connector port for inspection wiring that can connect inspection wiring that is electrically connected to an information processing device (personal computer or the like) for inspection, testing, or development. The information processing device for inspection may function as an inspection device for the pachinko gaming machine 1 by executing, for example, a specific software program. As described above, the connector 099IW156 is an electronic component used as a connecting member to which the inspection device of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is connected.

The connector 099IW156 enables the inspection wiring to be connected at the trial production stage, the development stage, or the manufacturing stage of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, and the second production control CPU012IW120b is shipped in response to a test command different from the production control command. The previous inspection process may be enabled. The pre-shipment inspection process includes, for example, internal parameters and input / output signals when the second effect control CPU012IW120b executes a part or all of the program code before the completion of the software program during trial production or development. It may include verifiable processing. The verification environment in which the inspection process is executed before shipment may be, for example, an execution environment corresponding to the state in which the pachinko game machine 1 is installed on the game machine installation island, or the pachinko game machine 1 is independently used as a personal computer. It may be an execution environment in which the operating status can be confirmed by connecting to an information processing device such as. Further, the connector 099IW156 makes it possible to connect the inspection wiring at the collection stage of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, and to execute the backup data reading process in response to a test command different from the effect control command. Good. Alternatively, the connector 099IW156 may be removed, for example, at the shipping stage of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Alternatively, the connector 099IW156 is mounted only on a predetermined model such as a demonstration machine or a test machine other than the model in which the pachinko game machine 1 is installed in the game hall, and is mass-produced and installed in the game hall (mass production machine). It may not be installed. A land on which the connector 099IW156 can be mounted may be formed on the substrate surface of the second effect control board 012IW12b. When the connector 099IW156 is removed or not mounted, the copper foil pattern of the land on which the connector 099IW156 is no longer mounted may be soldered. The soldering process is a process of applying solder to the exposed portion of the copper foil pattern, and may be performed by, for example, a cream solder printing machine or an arbitrary method that does not use a cream solder printing machine. .. Depending on whether the connector 099IW156 is mounted or not, the soldering process of the same process may be performed, or the soldering process of different processes may be performed. When the soldering process in the same process is performed, it is not necessary to produce a plurality of patterns of metal masks used in the cream solder printing machine for applying solder to the lands, so that it is possible to prevent an increase in the cost required for substrate production. By soldering unmounted lands that do not mount electronic components such as connector 099IW156, oxidation of the copper foil pattern is prevented, problems such as disconnection due to corrosion of the wiring pattern are prevented, and the quality of the board is maintained appropriately. be able to.

When the electronic component such as the connector 099IW156 is not mounted, the copper foil pattern of the land on which the electronic component is not mounted is not limited to the one coated by soldering, and for example, a resist which is an insulating film is applied. It may be coated. By covering the land on which electronic components are not mounted by any method in this way, it is possible to prevent oxidation of the copper foil pattern, prevent problems such as disconnection due to corrosion of the wiring pattern, and maintain appropriate board quality. I hope I can. On the other hand, the land on which the electronic component is not mounted may not be covered by soldering or the like. For example, when the land is soldered, the solder as a conductor adheres to the copper foil pattern, which may cause an unintended short circuit or current path in the wiring pattern. Therefore, for lands on which electronic components are not mounted, soldering is not performed to prevent solder from adhering to the copper foil pattern, prevent problems such as short circuits in the wiring pattern and changes in the current path, and ensure appropriate board quality. Can be maintained. By performing an insulating coating treatment instead of the solder treatment, it is possible to prevent solder from adhering to the copper foil pattern, prevent problems such as a short circuit of the wiring pattern and change of the current path, and maintain the quality of the substrate appropriately. You may do so.

FIG. 8-4 (A) shows a configuration example of various circuits mounted on the backup memory board 099IW14. The backup memory board 099IW14 is provided with a memory controller 099IW200, RTC099IW201, a serial communication circuit 099IW202, an inspection connection part 099IW203, backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D, and a connector 099IW220. As described above, the backup memory board 099IW14 is provided with backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D as a plurality of backup data storage units. The memory controller 099IW200 can execute the backup data write process and read process according to the backup control signal from the second effect control board 012IW12b. The RTC099IW201 can measure the current date and time and supply date and time information including date information and time information to the memory controller 099IW200. The serial communication circuit 099IW202 is a circuit capable of transmitting and receiving communication data to and from the second effect control board 012IW12b by a serial communication method. The serial communication circuit 099IW202 may be capable of transmitting and receiving communication data corresponding to a specific serial communication standard such as SPI. The serial communication circuit 099IW202 may include a communication processing unit having a hardware configuration corresponding to such a specific serial communication standard. The inspection connection portion 099IW203 may be formed as a specific conductor portion including terminals capable of inputting and outputting inspection signals, such as a test point. When the inspection connection unit 099IW203 is the test point, the test probe is brought into contact with the inspection connection unit 099IW203, and the inspection signal is transmitted between the inspection device and the second effect control CPU012IW120b of the second effect control board 012IW12b. It suffices if it can perform input / output and read backup data. The inspection connection unit 099IW203 receives an inspection signal between the inspection device and the memory controller 099IW200 of the backup memory board 099IW14 or the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D without going through the second effect control CPU012IW120b of the second effect control board 012IW12b. It may be possible to input / output the data and read the backup data. As described above, the inspection connection unit 099IW203 can provide an interface for data communication with the inspection device as an external device on the backup memory board 099IW14.

The backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D may be partially or wholly configured using a non-volatile ferroelectric memory such as FRAM® (Ferroelectric RAM), and some or all may be a SRAM (Static RAM) with a battery. May be configured using. The backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D may be partially or wholly configured by using a flash memory such as a NAND-ROM, an EEPROM, or an HDD (Hard Disk Drive). The non-volatile ferroelectric memory called FRAM (registered trademark) has a memory cell using a ferroelectric film as a capacitor insulating film, and is a memory written in the memory cell even when the operating power is turned off. No data is lost. The configuration using FRAM (registered trademark) does not require battery backup for data retention, and has high speed writing, high number of rewrites, and low power consumption as compared with non-volatile memory such as flash memory, EEPROM, and HDD. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in the installation area, simplify the device configuration, improve the operation efficiency, and appropriately store and store the backup data. In addition, it becomes unnecessary to dispose of the battery, the disappearance of the stored contents due to the replacement of the battery is prevented, and the backup data can be appropriately stored and stored. The backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D may be backed up by a backup power supply mounted on the power supply board. As described above, the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D can retain the stored contents even when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. The backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D may be able to retain the stored contents without using a backup power source, for example, when a part or all of them are configured by using FRAM (registered trademark). Alternatively, the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210B may be able to hold the stored contents by using a backup power source, for example, when a part or all of them are configured by using the SRAM with a battery.

The backup memory board 099IW14 stores and stores various log information in the log areas provided in the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D by using the date and time information output by the RTC099IW201. The memory controller 099IW200 can execute a storage data writing process and a reading process for the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D in response to an instruction or an instruction sent from the second effect control CPU 012IW120b of the second effect control board 012IW12b. .. In this case, by executing the writing process and the reading process of the stored data indicating the log information including the date and time information, the operation history, the setting history, and the operation history and the setting history of the plurality of electronic components used for the game and the production in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are executed. It suffices if the error history can be stored so that it can be verified after the fact.

FIG. 8-4 (B) shows a configuration example for connecting the second effect control board 012IW12b and the backup memory board 099IW14. The second effect control board 012IW12b includes a connector 099IW154 that can be attached to and detached from the connector 099IW220 of the backup memory board 099IW14. The backup memory board 099IW14 includes a connector 099IW220 that can be attached to and detached from the connector 099IW154 of the second effect control board 012IW12b. By connecting the connector 099IW154 and the connector 099IW220, the second effect control board 012IW12b and the backup memory board 099IW14 can be physically and electrically connected. The connector 099IW154 provided on the second effect control board 012IW12b includes terminals TM01 to TM06. The connector 099IW220 provided on the backup memory board 099IW14 includes terminals TM11 to TM16. The terminals TM01 to TM06 included in the connector 099IW154 and the terminals TM11 to TM16 included in the connector 099IW220 have the corresponding terminals (for example, terminal TM01 and terminal TM11) physically and electrically when the connector 099IW154 and the connector 099IW220 are combined. Any relationship may be connected to.

The terminal TM01 included in the connector 099IW154 of the second effect control board 012IW12b can provide a specific voltage such as VD1. The terminal TM02 included in the connector 099IW154 of the second effect control board 012IW12b can receive VD1 of a specific voltage used for confirming the connection with the backup memory board 099IW14. For example, the specific voltage VD1 output from the terminal TM01 included in the connector 099IW154 of the second effect control board 012IW12b is supplied to the terminal TM11 included in the connector 099IW220 of the backup memory board 099IW14. The terminals TM11 and TM12 of the connector 099IW220 may be short-circuited on the board of the backup memory board 099IW14. Therefore, when the connector 099IW154 and the connector 099IW220 are coupled, the voltage corresponding to VD1 is transmitted from the terminal TM12 of the connector 099IW220 on the backup memory board 099IW14 to the terminal TM02 of the connector 099IW154 on the second effect control board 012IW12b. Is supplied. On the other hand, in the unconnected state in which the connector 099IW154 and the connector 099IW220 are not connected, the voltage is not supplied to the terminal TM02 of the connector 099IW154 on the second effect control board 012IW12b.

In the second effect control board 012IW12b, the effect control CPU012IW120b determines the voltage value at the terminal TM02 of the connector 099IW154 in order to confirm the connection state with the backup memory board 099IW14. In this case, if the voltage value of the terminal TM02 is a high voltage value corresponding to VD1, it can be determined that the second effect control board 012IW12b and the backup memory board 099IW14 are connected (connection state). On the other hand, if the voltage value of the terminal TM02 is a low voltage value corresponding to the unsupplied voltage, it is determined that the second effect control board 012IW12b and the backup memory board 099IW14 are not connected (unconnected state). it can. In this way, the connection state between the second effect control board 012IW12b and the backup memory board 099IW14 may be confirmed based on the voltage at the terminal TM02 which is the connection confirmation member. The connection state is not limited to the one that confirms the connection state based on the terminal voltage, and may be, for example, the one that confirms the connection state based on the input state of a specific signal. Alternatively, a switch or a sensor may be used as a connection confirmation member to confirm the connection state.

The terminals TM03 to TM06 included in the connector 099IW154 of the second effect control board 012IW12b are wired and connected to the serial communication circuit 099IW137 included in the second effect control board 012IW12b. The terminals TM13 and TM14 included in the connector 099IW220 of the backup memory board 099IW14 are wired and connected to the serial communication circuit 099IW202. Therefore, the wiring connected to the terminals TM03 and TM04 of the connector 099IW154 and the terminals TM11 and TM12 of the connector 099IW220 is the second effect control CPU012IW120b and the backup memory board 099IW14 via the serial communication circuit 099IW137 and the serial communication circuit 099IW202. An electrical connection is provided so that the stored data can be transferred between the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D. The terminals TM15 and TM16 included in the connector 099IW220 of the backup memory board 099IW14 are wired and connected to the inspection connection portion 099IW203. As a result, the wiring connected to the terminals TM05 and TM06 of the connector 099IW154 and the terminals TM15 and TM16 of the connector 099IW220 is connected to the second effect control CPU012IW120b and the inspection connection portion of the backup memory board 099IW14 via the serial communication circuit 099IW137. It provides an electrical connection to and from 099IW203 so that inspection signals can be sent and received and stored data can be transferred.

The backup memory board 099IW14 is configured to be removable from the second effect control board 012IW12b. As a result, for example, in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 1 that does not use the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D, the backup memory board 099IW14 can be removed to increase the flexibility of the device configuration and increase the manufacturing cost. Can be prevented. Further, since the backup memory board 099IW14 can be removed to read and analyze the stored data, the work load of inspecting the stored data can be reduced. The real-time clock 012IW126 provided on the second effect control board 012IW12b may provide the current time for timing adjustment for executing the effect in which a plurality of pachinko game machines 1 are linked, and has relatively high accuracy. Things are needed. On the other hand, the RTC099IW201 of the backup memory board 099IW14 only needs to be able to specify the context of the storage processing executed for the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D, so that a relatively low-precision one can sufficiently satisfy the application. Can be done. As described above, since the RTC099IW201 of the backup memory board 099IW14 may have a relatively low accuracy, it is possible to prevent an increase in manufacturing cost. The configuration and functions included in the backup memory board 099IW14 may be configured to be provided in the second effect control board 012IW12b. For example, the configuration and function of the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D may be realized by the RAM012IW122b. Even in this case, for example, the wiring pattern on the second effect control board 012IW12b, or the switch or sensor may be used as a connection confirmation member to confirm the connection state.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-5, the pachinko gaming machine (game machine) 1 is roughly classified into an outer frame 012IW001a formed in a vertically long square frame shape and a gaming board constituting the game board surface. It is composed of a (gauge board) 2 (see FIG. 1) and a game machine frame (underframe) 012IW003 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area. Further, in the game machine frame 012IW003, between the door opening position where the glass door frame 012IW003a having a glass window opens the front surface of the game machine frame 012IW003 centering on the left side and the door closing position which closes the front surface. It is rotatably provided, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 012IW003a, and when the glass door frame 012IW003a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

Further, the game machine frame 012IW003 can be opened by inserting the door key owned by the game machine clerk into a lock (not shown) and unlocking it, and the game machine frame 012IW003 and the glass can be opened by players other than the clerk. The door frame 012IW003a cannot be opened.

The main board 11 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state of being housed in a board case 012IW201 configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. Further, the main board 11 is provided with a setting key 012IW051 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state described later.

The setting switching main body portion provided with the operation unit that can be operated by the player such as the setting key 012IW051 is housed in the board case 012IW201 together with the main board 11, and the setting key 012IW051 does not open the board case 012IW201. Is exposed to the back side through an opening formed in the right side of the back side of the substrate case 012IW201 so as to be operable.

Since the board case 012IW201 having the setting key 012IW051 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is impossible to operate the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the front side when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. The operation is possible by opening the gaming machine frame 3 using the door key of. Further, since the setting key 012IW051 requires the operation of the setting key owned by the clerk of the amusement park or the like, only the clerk who has the setting key can operate the setting key 012IW051. The setting key 012IW051 is also a switch capable of executing an ON / OFF switching operation described later. Although the feature unit 099IW illustrates a form in which the door key and the setting key are separate keys, one key may be used in combination.

Further, in the substrate case 012IW201, a display monitor 012IW029 and a display changeover switch 012IW030 for switching the display of the display monitor 012IW029 are arranged. The display monitor 012IW029 and the display changeover switch 012IW030 are connected to the main board 11 and arranged in the upper left portion of the board case 012IW201. That is, the display monitor 012IW029 and the display changeover switch 012IW030 are arranged in front of the board case 012IW201 when the main board 11 is visually recognized. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is not opened, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized is the back surface side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

As described above, the setting key 012IW051 in the feature unit 099IW cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, but the pachinko gaming machine 1 is There is a risk that the setting key 012IW051 will be operated from the inside of the game island to be installed. Therefore, in the present feature unit 099IW, as shown in FIGS. 8-5 and 8-6, the right end portion of the outer frame 012IW001a is the right end portion of the board case 012IW201 including the setting key 012IW051 when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed. A security cover 012IW500A that covers the back side is attached. The curity cover 012IW500A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 012IW500Aa facing in the front-rear direction and a long piece 012IW500Ab extending from the rear end portion of the short piece 012IW500Aa toward the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. , It is composed of a plate-shaped synthetic resin material having transparency. The vertical dimension of the short piece 012IW500Aa is substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the back plate of the substrate case 012IW201. Further, the security cover 012IW500A is fixed to the right end portion of the outer frame 012IW001a via the front end portion of the short piece 012IW500Aa.

As shown in FIG. 8-5, the long piece 012IW500Ab abuts (or approaches) the right portion of the substrate case 012IW201 from the rear of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state where the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed. As a result, the right side portion of the substrate case 012IW201 including the setting key 012IW051 is covered from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, the setting key 012IW051 becomes inoperable by the long piece 012IW500Ab. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8-6, in the state where the game machine frame 012IW003 is open, the setting key 012IW051 moves together with the game machine frame 012IW003 and separates from the long piece 012IW500Ab. When the covering state by 012IW500Ab is released, it becomes an operable state.

That is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 099IW is maintained in a regulated state in which the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 012IW051 is restricted by the security cover 012IW500A when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed. On the other hand, in the state where the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is open, the above-mentioned restricted state by the security cover 012IW500A is released, and the operation of the setting key 012IW051 is allowed.

Since the board case 012IW201 is provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to access the setting key 012IW051 when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed. The set value cannot be changed by operating the setting key 012IW051 unless the player or the like opens the gaming machine frame 012IW003 with the door key.

However, even if the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed in a state where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed on a gaming island (not shown) in the game field, for example, with another pachinko gaming machine adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1. A setting key 012IW051 on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1 by inserting an illegal member such as a wire or a cell plate from between a gaming device such as a card unit or a spacer member installed between the machines and the pachinko game machine 1. Since there is a possibility that the setting value may be changed by operating the machine, the security cover 012IW500A restricts the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 012IW051 while the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed. By maintaining the regulated state, the above-mentioned fraudulent acts can be suitably suppressed.

Further, even in a regulated state in which the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed and the back right side of the board case 012IW201 including the setting key 012IW051 is covered by the security cover 012IW500A, the board case 012IW201 is housed in the board case 012IW201 through the transparent security cover 012IW500A. Since the main board 11 and the like can be seen through, the status of the mounting surface on the main board 11 on which electronic components such as the CPU 103 are mounted, the seal, and the like can be easily confirmed.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes the program read from the ROM 101, and by using the RAM 102 as the work area, various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are executed. Further, the CPU 103 is capable of generating all of the various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing the random number generation program.

In this feature unit 099IW, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, and the normal figure display result determination Numerical data indicating each of the random value MR4 and the random value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 is controlled so as to be countable. In addition, random values other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data that constitutes a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 8-7 and 8-8, which are prepared by the CPU 103 for performing various determinations and determinations. Further, the ROM 101 contains table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation mode of each symbol in a variation display such as a special symbol or a normal symbol. A fluctuation pattern table or the like that stores a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, the display result determination table (set value 1) shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), the display result determination table (set value 2) shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), and FIG. In addition to the display result judgment table (set value 3) shown in -7 (C) and the big hit type judgment table shown in FIG. 8-8 (A), the big hit fluctuation pattern judgment table (not shown) and the small hit fluctuation pattern judgment table (not shown). Includes (not shown), a loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 8-9, a normal figure display result determination table (not shown), a general figure variation pattern determination table (not shown), and the like.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 099IW has a configuration in which the winning probability (ball output rate) of a big hit changes according to a set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is changed by using the display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the set value. .. The set value is composed of three stages of 1 to 3, with 1 having the lowest payout rate and increasing the value in the order of 1, 2 and 3 to increase the payout rate. That is, when 1 is set as the set value, the advantage is the lowest for the player, and as the value increases in the order of 2, 3 the advantage increases stepwise. In this feature unit 099IW, the winning probability of a small hit is the same regardless of the set value.

(Display result judgment table)
8-7 (A) to 8-7 (C) are explanatory views showing a display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with the MR1 is set. In each display result judgment table, the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the case where the first special symbol is the target of the variable display and the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second). That is, a determination value for a big hit and a determination value for a small hit are set for each of the cases where the second special symbol is the target of the variable display.

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1 is used, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is the target of the variable display. In the case of, the jackpot is won with a lower probability (1/320 at the time of non-probability change, 1/32 at the time of probability change) than when the set values are "2" and "3". On the other hand, some of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, and the small hits are won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set values are "2" and "3". It is designed to do. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display (1/320 for non-probability change, 1/32 for probability change). To do. On the other hand, since half of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, the probability (1/2) is higher than when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display. You are supposed to win.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 2 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/300 at the time of non-probability change, 1/30 at the time of probability change) than in a certain case. On the other hand, some of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, and the small hits are won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set values are "1" and "3". It is designed to do. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display (1/300 for non-probability change, 1/30 for probability change). To do. On the other hand, since half of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, the probability is higher than when the first special symbol is the target of variable display, and the set value. The small hit is won with the same probability (1/2) as when is "1" and "3".

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (C), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 3 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability than the case of "2" (1/280 at the time of non-probability change, 1/28 at the time of probability change). On the other hand, some of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, and the small hits are won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set values are "1" and "2". It is designed to do. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is the target of the variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability as when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display (1/280 at the time of non-probability change, 1/28 at the time of probability change). To do. On the other hand, since half of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, the probability is higher than when the first special symbol is the target of variable display, and the set value. The small hit is won with the same probability (1/2) as when is "1" and "2".

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and the value of MR1 corresponds to any of the jackpots shown in FIGS. 8-7 (A) to 8-7 (C). If it matches the hit determination value, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit type A to big hit type C). Further, when MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hits shown in FIGS. 8-7 (A) to (C), it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is decided with the probability according to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 8-7 (A) to 8-7 (C) indicates the probability of a big hit (ratio) and the probability of a small hit (ratio). Further, deciding whether or not to make a big hit means deciding whether or not to control the big hit game state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control the small hit game state, but stop at the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B. It also means deciding whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 8-7, the case where the winning probability of the small hit is the same regardless of the set value is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, as in the case of the big hit winning probability, the small hit winning probability may be increased as the set value increases in the order of 1, 2, and 3. Further, in this case, the setting difference of the winning probability of the small hit may be the same ratio as the setting difference of the winning probability of the big hit. Specifically, if the probability of winning a small hit at the set value "1" is 1/100, the probability of winning a small hit at the set value "2" is designed to be 1 / 93.75. The probability of winning a small hit at the set value "3" may be set to 1 / 87.5.

Further, in a game machine without a small hit, the configuration shown in the feature unit 099IW may be applied.

Further, in the feature unit 099IW, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit by using the display result determination table shown in FIGS. 8-7 (A) to 8-7 (C). A big hit judgment table and a small hit judgment table are provided separately, and the big hit judgment is made depending on whether the first special symbol is a variable display or the second special symbol is a variable display regardless of the variable special symbol designation buffer. A common table may be used, and the small hit may be determined using separate tables depending on whether the variable special figure designation buffer is the first or the second.

Further, in this feature unit 099IW, the case where the advantage is higher in the order of the set value "1" <set value "2" <set value "3" is shown. For example, the order of the advantage is ranked according to the gaming state. May be configured to change. For example, it is applied to a game machine that is controlled to a high probability / high base state, maintains a high probability / high base state until the next big hit occurs, and is configured to obtain a certain amount of prize balls in a small hit game. In this example, as shown in FIG. 8-7, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, a small hit is generated with a high probability of 1/2 and a prize ball is easily obtained. In a specific game state (high probability / high base state in this example), unlike other game states, a big hit is unlikely to occur (high probability / high base state is likely to continue). The value "1" may be set to have the highest advantage.

Further, for example, when applied to a game machine in which the probability change state ends based on the execution of the variation display of a predetermined number of times (probability change end number) after being controlled to the probability change state (high probability state), the same probability change occurs. If it is the number of ends, the probability variation continuation rate (consecutive villa rate) may be increased in the order of set value "1" <set value "2" <set value "3".

In the feature unit 099IW, a total of three setting values, 1 to 3, are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited to this. The set value that can be set to 1 may be 2 or 4 or more.

(Big hit type judgment table)
FIG. 8-8 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In this feature unit 099IW, the jackpot type is determined by using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning opening (that is, when the variation display of the first special symbol is performed). A common jackpot type determination table is used when the jackpot type is determined using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning slot (that is, when the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner). Although it is configured to be used, different tables may be provided so that the ratio of which jackpot type is determined is different.

In the jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the jackpot type is selected from the jackpot type A to the jackpot type C based on the random number (MR2) for determining the jackpot type. A table referenced to determine one.

In the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 8-8 (A), the determination values corresponding to the random numbers (MR2) for determining the jackpot type are assigned to each set value, but they are assigned to simplify the explanation. The ratio of the determined judgment values is shown. That is, the ratio of which of the jackpot type A to the jackpot type C is determined for each set value is shown. The loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 8-9 and the non-reach loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 8-10, which will be described later, are also actually assigned determination values corresponding to random numbers. To simplify, the percentage of assigned determination values is shown.

As shown in FIG. 8-8 (A), in the jackpot type determination table, when the set value is "1", the ratio of being determined to the jackpot type C is high, and when the set value is "2", When the rate determined for the jackpot type B is high and the set value is "3", the determination value is assigned so that the rate determined for the jackpot type A is high.

Here, the jackpot type in the feature section 099IW will be described with reference to FIG. 8-8 (B). In the feature section 099IW, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period in the jackpot game are determined for each jackpot type. Has been done.

The fanfare period is, for example, a period during which the jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed on the main board 11 side, and the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first effect control board 012IW12a and the second effect control board 012IW12b side. After that, it is a period during which the fanfare effect as an effect operation for notifying the start of the jackpot game state is executed.

The interval period is, for example, a period during which the post-opening process of the big hit in step S116 is executed on the main board 11 side, and the big winning opening is open on the first effect control board 012IW12a and the second effect control board 012IW12b side. This is the period during which the interval effect as an effect operation for notifying the start of the next round is executed after the end of the round.

The ending period is, for example, a period during which the jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed on the main board 11 side, and the end of the jackpot gaming state is notified on the first effect control board 012IW12a and the second effect control board 012IW12b side. This is the period during which the ending effect as the effect action to be performed is executed.

As shown in FIG. 8-8 (B), the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are the longest in the case of the jackpot type A, then the longest in the case of the jackpot type B, and the longest in the case of the jackpot type C. It is set to be short.

As described above, in the feature unit 099IW, when the set value is "1", the ratio of determining the jackpot type C is high, so that the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period tend to be relatively short. On the other hand, when the set value is "3", the rate of determining the jackpot type A is high, so that the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period tend to be relatively long. Therefore, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period becomes longer in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3".

The feature unit 099IW is configured so that the winning probability (ball output rate) of the jackpot increases in the order of "1" <"2" <"3", but at the same time, the set value is "1". The average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period becomes longer in the order of "<" 2 "<" 3 ". With such a configuration, when the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is set to be high, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period can be lengthened, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed, and the game is gambling. Can be prevented from becoming too high.

This feature unit 099IW is configured to be able to execute a jackpot suggestion effect (details will be described later) that suggests a set value during a jackpot game, and this jackpot suggestion effect is used for a fanfare period, an interval period, and an ending. It is feasible in the period. With such a configuration, the interest of the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period can be enhanced. In addition, by directing the player's attention to the suggestion effect during the big hit, it is possible to make it difficult to notice the length of each period.

In the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period, a common effect may be executed regardless of the length of the set period. In this case, it is desirable that an effect (for example, display of a still image) that is difficult for the player to notice the length of the period is commonly executed.

Further, in this feature unit 099IW, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are set for each jackpot type, and the ratio of which jackpot type is determined is different for each set value, so that the jackpot can be hit. When the winning probability (ball output rate) is set to be high, the average period of the fanfare period, interval period, and ending period is lengthened, that is, the progress of the game is delayed, but the setting is not limited to such a configuration. The fanfare period, interval period, and ending period may be fixedly set for each value. Further, for example, one of a plurality of types of fanfare periods, interval periods, and ending periods having different predetermined periods may be determined by lottery. In this case, a table in which the judgment values are set so that the ratio of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period in which the relatively long period is set increases in the order of the jackpot types A <B <C is used. As a result, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period can be increased in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3".

In the feature unit 099IW, in any of the jackpot type A to the jackpot type C, the time saving control and the probability variation control executed after the end of the jackpot game state are characterized by a predetermined number of times (100 times in the feature unit 099IW). It ends when the figure game is executed or when the special figure game is entered into the jackpot game state before the predetermined number of special figure games are executed. For example, the number of time reduction control and the probability variation control is different for each jackpot type. Alternatively, in the case of a specific jackpot type, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. It may be done. In the case of such a specific jackpot type, the jackpot game state is continuously generated without going through the normal state, which is a so-called consecutive villa state. In this feature unit 099IW, the ratio of big hits is different for each set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but in addition to or instead of such a configuration, the probability change continues for each set value. The rate (consecutive villa rate) may be different.

Further, in this feature unit 099IW, there is no difference in the advantage (for example, the number of rounds during the jackpot game, the presence / absence of time reduction control and the probability variation control, the number of controls, etc.) between the jackpot type A to the jackpot type C, and the fanfare period and interval The average period of the period and the ending period is configured to be different, but for example, the number of rounds during the jackpot game, the presence or absence of time reduction control and probability variation control, and the number of controls are different for each jackpot type, and the advantage is different. You may do so. In this case, the effect during the round may be different for each jackpot type, or may be the same regardless of the jackpot type.

In this feature unit 099IW, an example is exemplified in which the jackpot type when the variable display result is a jackpot is determined at a different ratio from the jackpot type A, the jackpot type B, and the jackpot type C according to the set value. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the set value set, one of the jackpot type A, the jackpot type B, and the jackpot type C cannot be determined. There may be more than one. In other words, if the determination rate of the jackpot type differs depending on the set value, one of the jackpot types is not determined (the determination rate is 0%), or a specific jackpot type is 100%. Included in determining by percentage.

Further, in this feature unit 099IW, the case where the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period are different depending on the jackpot type is shown, but not limited to such a mode, the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending are not limited to the jackpot type. It may be configured so that the period is different. For example, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period may be uniformly determined according to any of the set values "1" to "3". Further, for example, a lottery process with a selection probability according to the set value is performed according to any of the set values "1" to "3", and the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are determined. You may.

In this way, in this feature unit 099IW, the determination ratio of the jackpot type when the variable display result becomes a jackpot differs according to the set value, so that the game entertainment can be improved. ..

In the feature unit 099IW, the jackpot type is determined by using MR2 which is a random value for determining the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is a special figure display result. It may be determined using MR1 which is a random value for determination.

Further, in the feature unit 099IW, the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player (the jackpot probability and the small hit probability increase, and the jackpot type C as the jackpot type is easily determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be.

Further, the feature unit 099IW exemplifies a mode in which the jackpot probability changes according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the game playability itself does not change, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the playability may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is 65%, which is the game property (so-called probability variation loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a specific round during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a probabilistic state based on passing through a predetermined count switch, the rate at which the game ball passes through the count switch during the big hit game differs depending on the big hit type. When the property (so-called V probability variation type) is set and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the high base is medium (time reduction control). In (middle), the game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) may be set in which the game ball is controlled to the big hit game state based on passing through a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7. Further, although the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are the same as those set in 1 to 3, the jackpot probability and the small hit probability are higher than in the case where these set values are any of 1 to 3. A setting in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4) may be provided.

Further, when the game playability is changed according to the set value in this way, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, in the above example, when the set value is 1 or 4, the effect switch (the game ball passes through the count switch) is passed through a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7. It is used as a switch for executing a predetermined effect each time, and when the set value is 2 or 3, the predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a game switch (game ball). It may be used as a switch for controlling the gaming state to a probabilistic state or a jackpot gaming state based on passing through the count switch).

(Small hit type judgment table)
FIG. 8-8 (C) is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. As shown in FIG. 8-8 (C), in the feature unit 099IW, small hit types A to C are provided as small hit types. As shown in FIG. 8-8 (C), in the feature unit 099IW, the determination ratios of the small hit types A to C are the same regardless of which of the set values "1" to "3".

Further, in this feature unit 099IW, the opening period and the number of times of opening the large winning opening during the small hit game are the same regardless of which of the small hit types A to C, and the degree of advantage in the game is the same. ..

(Variation pattern judgment table)
Further, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the variation pattern is selected from the plurality of types described above according to the predetermined determination result. Determine to one of the fluctuation patterns of.

Specifically, as the fluctuation pattern judgment table, the jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table used when it is predetermined to set the fluctuation display result to "big hit" and the fluctuation display result to be "small hit". A small hit fluctuation pattern judgment table used when is pre-determined and a loss fluctuation pattern judgment table used when it is pre-determined to make the fluctuation display result "miss" are prepared in advance. ..

(Loss fluctuation pattern judgment table)
FIG. 8-9 is an explanatory diagram showing a loss fluctuation pattern determination table. In this feature unit 099IW, the period from the time when the setting is changed when the power is turned on to the execution of the fluctuation display a predetermined time (30 times in this example) (hereinafter, also referred to as a special period) and the other period (hereinafter, also referred to as a special period) Hereinafter, it is also referred to as a non-special period), and is configured to use a different loss fluctuation pattern determination table.

Specifically, in the special period, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the first loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 8-9 (A), and in the non-special period, it is shown in FIG. 8-9 (B). The fluctuation pattern is determined using the second loss fluctuation pattern determination table. In the feature unit 099IW, the period from the time when the setting is changed when the power is turned on to the time when the fluctuation display is executed a predetermined time (30 times in this example) is set as a special period, but the present invention is limited to this. For example, the period until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example) may be set as a special period regardless of whether or not the setting is changed when the power is turned on. Further, a special period may be set by using the real-time clock 012IW126 or the like as long as it is in a predetermined time zone (for example, from 9:00 am to 11:00 am). In addition, the period until the first big hit may occur may be a special period.

In the first and second loss fluctuation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 8-9 (A) and (B), normal reach loss and super reach loss are obtained in the order of set values "1" <"2" <"3". Judgment values are assigned so that the ratio is high and the ratio of non-reach loss is low. With such a configuration, since the execution rate of normal reach and super reach differs depending on the set value, the set value is suggested by the frequency of execution of normal reach and super reach.

Further, the first loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 8-9 (A) has a higher ratio of normal reach loss than the second loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 8-9 (B), and further, a set value. Judgment values are assigned so that the difference in the ratio of normal reach loss between them becomes large. With such a configuration, it is easier to recognize the difference in the frequency of normal reach execution in the special period than in the non-special period (that is, it is easier to recognize the suggestion of the set value), so that the motive for playing the game in the special period is Can be given and the game entertainment can be enhanced.

For example, the fluctuation pattern with super reach (or a specific fluctuation pattern among them) is determined at the same ratio regardless of the difference in the set value (or the difference between the special period and the non-special period). You may do so. By doing so, the execution rate differs only for a specific fluctuation pattern (normal reach loss in this example) according to the set value, and the set value is suggested by the frequency with which the specific fluctuation pattern is executed. become. On the contrary, the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern that causes the super reach loss may be different depending on the set value.

Further, the first and second loss fluctuation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 8-9 (A) and 8-9 (A) and (B) are either normal reach loss or super reach loss at times other than non-reach loss, depending on the set value. Judgment values are assigned so that the ratio (that is, the balance of normal reach loss: super reach loss) is different. Specifically, in the first loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 8-9 (A), the ratio of normal reach loss increases remarkably in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3" (this example). Then, it increases by 5%). Specifically, in the second loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 8-9 (B), the normal reach loss is in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3". The ratio of is slightly higher (in this example, it is increased by 0.2%). With such a configuration, the set value is suggested by the selection tendency between the normal reach loss and the super reach loss. In addition, the difference in selection tendency between the special period and the non-special period can be increased.

In this feature unit 099IW, it is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect at a different ratio according to the set value, but this depends on the execution ratio of the normal reach loss and the entire super reach loss depending on the set value. This is a concept that includes that the execution ratios of normal reach loss and super reach loss are different, and that only normal reach loss has different execution ratios depending on the set value.

The feature unit 099IW displays a common background image on the image display device 5 regardless of which of the first and second loss fluctuation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 8-9 (A) and 8-9 (B) is used. Then, the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner. Further, when the set value is set to any of 1 to 3, the image display device 5 displays a common background image and displays the decorative pattern in a variable manner. It should be noted that the dedicated background image may be displayed only during a special period or a period from when the power is turned on until the variable display is executed a predetermined time (30 times in this example). With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the game interest during the special period or the period from when the power is turned on until the variable display is executed a predetermined time (30 times in this example).

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the example of the feature unit 099IW. (Selected only in) may be provided so that the special variation pattern can be selected only in a special period. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game during a special period, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

(Non-reach loss fluctuation pattern judgment table)
FIG. 8-10 is an explanatory diagram showing a non-reach loss fluctuation pattern determination table. In this feature unit 099IW, a plurality of types of non-reach loss fluctuation patterns having different fluctuation times are provided, and when the fluctuation pattern is determined to be non-reach loss, it is further determined to be one of non-reach loss A to C. It is configured in. Not limited to such a configuration, for example, the loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 8-9 may include non-reach loss A to C, and any of non-reach loss A to C, normal reach loss, and super reach loss. It may be configured to determine the crab.

As shown in FIG. 8-10, in the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern determination table, when the set value is "1", the ratio of non-reach loss C (variation time 7 seconds) is high, and the set value is "2". When the value is "3", the ratio determined to non-reach loss B (variation time 8 seconds) is high, and when the set value is "3", the ratio determined to non-reach loss A (variation time 9 seconds) is high. Judgment value is assigned to.

In the feature unit 099IW, when the set value is "1", the rate of determination as non-reach loss C is high, so that the fluctuation time at the time of non-reach loss tends to be relatively short. On the other hand, when the set value is "3", the rate of determination as non-reach loss A is high, so that the fluctuation time at the time of non-reach loss tends to be relatively long. Therefore, the average fluctuation time becomes longer in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3".

The feature unit 099IW is configured so that the winning probability (ball output rate) of the jackpot increases in the order of "1" <"2" <"3", but at the same time, the set value is "1". The average fluctuation time becomes longer in the order of "<" 2 "<" 3 ". With such a configuration, when the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is set to be high, the average fluctuation time can be lengthened, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed, and the gambling becomes too high. Can be prevented.

The feature unit 099IW is configured so that the average fluctuation time is different by changing the ratio of non-reach loss A to C having different fluctuation times depending on the set value. A plurality of types of fluctuation patterns other than reach loss (for example, normal reach loss, super reach loss, etc.) may be provided so that the fluctuation time is different, and the selected ratio may be different depending on the set value. In addition, when multiple types of fluctuation patterns (for example, normal reach loss, super reach loss, etc.) are provided so that the fluctuation time is different, the time of the sway display of the decorative pattern and the high-speed fluctuation display may be different to produce the effect. It is desirable that there is no difference in appearance.

Further, in the present feature unit 099IW, the average fluctuation time is configured to be different according to the set value, but instead of or in addition to such a configuration, the final decorative symbol (final) is set according to the set value. The period during which the stop symbol) is displayed as a stop may be different. With such a configuration, when the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is set to be high, the period during which the fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) is stopped and displayed can be lengthened, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed. , It is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Further, in this feature unit 099IW, the fluctuation time is set for each of the non-reach loss A to C, and the ratio of which of the non-reach loss A to C is determined is different for each set value, so that the jackpot is won. When the probability (ball output rate) is set high, the average fluctuation time is lengthened, that is, the progress of the game is delayed, but the fluctuation time of each fluctuation pattern is not limited to such a configuration. Is fixedly set, and the fluctuation time may be longer when the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is set higher.

The feature unit 099IW is provided with a variation pattern for shortening the variation time, which is shorter than other variation patterns. For example, a variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss (variation time 1.5 seconds), which is shorter than the non-reach loss A (variation time 9 seconds), is provided. Then, this variation pattern for shortening is configured to be used, for example, when the number of reserved storages is a predetermined number (for example, 3) or more. In such a configuration, when the number of reserved memories has reached the upper limit or is close to the upper limit, this state is eliminated and the variable display is efficiently performed (that is, the game is efficiently advanced). ) Is the purpose. Therefore, it can be said that it is inappropriate to delay the progress of the game when the number of reserved memories is equal to or more than a predetermined number. Therefore, in the feature unit 099IW, the variation pattern for shortening used when the number of reserved storages is equal to or more than a predetermined number has a common variation time regardless of the set value. Regardless of the configuration of the feature unit 099IW, the variation time for shortening used when the number of reserved storages is equal to or greater than a predetermined number may be different depending on the set value.

(Setting confirmation process, setting change process)
Next, the change of the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 099IW will be described. 8-11 to 8-13 are flowcharts showing the game control main processing in the feature unit 099IW. In the feature unit 099IW, the processing of steps IWS001 to S002 is the same as the processing of steps S1 to S2 shown in FIG.

When the initial setting is performed, the CPU 103 sets the time until the effect control means (specifically, the first effect control CPU012IW120a and the second effect control CPU012IW120b) starts when the power supply to the game machine is started. The effect control means start waiting timer for measurement is set (step 012IWS003). In this case, the effect control means activation waiting timer is set with a sufficient time from the start of power supply to the game machine until the first effect control CPU012IW120a and the second effect control CPU012IW120b are activated. Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the effect control means activation wait timer (step 012IWS004), and confirms whether or not the value of the effect control means activation wait timer after the subtraction is 0 (step 012IWS005). If the value of the effect control means activation waiting timer is not 0, the process returns to step 012IWS004, and the processes of steps 012IWS004 to S005 are repeatedly executed. If the value of the effect control means activation waiting timer is 0, the process proceeds to step 012IWS006.

By executing the processes of steps 012IWS003 to S005, the processes after step 012IWS006 are executed after waiting until the first effect control CPU012IW120a and the second effect control CPU012IW120b are started, and the setting values are changed, confirmed, and RAM. Initialization and recovery processing are executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which various commands such as a setting value command, an initialization specification command, and a recovery command, which will be described later, are transmitted before the first effect control CPU012IW120a and the second effect control CPU012IW120b are started. It is possible to prevent the command from being missed.

Next, the CPU 103 resets the RAM clear flag indicating that the clear switch has been pressed when the power is turned on to the game machine (step 012IWS006).

In this example, the RAM clear flag is not cleared in the power off processing (see step 012IWS031) described later, but the RAM clear flag is once cleared by step 012IWS006 when the power is turned on to the game machine, and then the clear switch is set. If so, the case where the RAM clear flag is newly set (see steps 012IWS016 and S022) is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, if the RAM clear flag is also cleared when the power off processing is executed, and then the clear switch is set when the power is turned on to the game machine, the RAM clear flag is newly set. May be good.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) by the same process as in step S4 (step 012IWS007). Specifically, in step 012IWS007, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step 012IWS007; No), the process proceeds to step 012IWS012.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step 012IWS007; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a data check of the backed up data (performed by using an error detection code) by the same process as in step S5, and the data is normal. Whether or not it is determined (step 012IWS008). In step 012IWS008, for example, it is determined by the parity bit or the checksum whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal. When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step 012IWS008; No), the process proceeds to step 012IWS010.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step 012IWS008; Yes), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the set value stored in the RAM 102 is a value other than the set values "1" to "3". (Step 012IWS009). If the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any of the set values "1" to "3", the process proceeds to step 012IWS011.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (N in step 012IWS008), or when it is determined that the set value stored in the RAM 102 is a value other than the set values "1" to "3" (Y in step 012IWS009). Is set by the CPU 103 to set a RAM abnormality flag indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the RAM 102 (step 012IWS010). Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS012.

When the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any of the set values "1" to "3" (N in step 012IWS009), the CPU 103 is executing the setting change process for changing the set value. It is confirmed whether or not the setting changing flag indicating that the setting is being changed is set (step 012IWS011). If the setting changing flag is set (step 012IWS011; Yes), that is, if a power failure occurs while changing the setting value and the power supply to the game machine is restarted, the process proceeds to step 012IWS012.

In step 012IWS012, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor 012IW090 is on (step 012IWS012). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 012IW090 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting key 012IW051 is on (step 012IWS013). If the setting key 012IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 012IWS014). If the output signal from the clear switch is on, the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear 2 process (step 012IWS015).

In this example, the RAM clear processing includes a RAM clear 1 process (see step 012IWS051) and a RAM clear 2 process (see step 012IWS015) that is executed when a RAM abnormality occurs.

In the RAM clear 1 process, the CPU 103 performs a process of clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area. However, in the RAM clear 1 process, the area other than the area for storing information for performance display such as the ratio, the combination ratio, and the base, and the area for storing the set value in the storage area of the RAM 102 is cleared, and the ratio and the connection ratio are cleared. Information for performance display such as role ratio and base, and information on set values are not cleared and are retained. Hereinafter, the storage area of the RAM 102 that is cleared by the RAM clear 1 process is referred to as a clear storage area 1.

In the RAM clear 2 process, the CPU 103 performs a process of clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area. However, in the RAM clear 2 processing, the area other than the area for storing information for performance display such as the ratio, the combination ratio, and the base in the storage area of the RAM 102 is cleared, and the performance display such as the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base Information is not cleared and is retained. Further, in the RAM clear 2 process, the value of the set value stored in the RAM 102 is also cleared. Hereinafter, the storage area of the RAM 102 that is cleared by the RAM clear 2 process is referred to as a clear storage area 2. Therefore, in this example, the clear storage area 2 of the RAM 102 cleared by the RAM clear 2 process is wider than the clear storage area 1 of the RAM 102 cleared by the RAM clear 1 process.

Then, the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag (step 012IWS016), and proceeds to step 012IWS025. The RAM clear flag is set in the clear storage area 2 of the RAM 102.

On the other hand, when the output signal from the door opening sensor 012IW090 is off (N in step 012IWS012), when the setting key 012IW051 is off (N in step 012IWS013), or when the output signal from the clear switch is off (N in step 012IWS013). In step 012IWS014 N), the CPU 103 controls to transmit a set value abnormality error command to the second effect control CPU 012IW120b (step 012IWS017).

Next, the CPU 103 shifts to the loop processing of steps 012IWS018 to S020. In the loop process, the CPU 103 executes a 4 ms weight process for measuring a 4 ms weight time (step 012 IWS018). Then, when the weight time of 4 ms elapses, the CPU 103 proceeds to step 012IWS019 and displays a predetermined error (step 012IWS019). For example, the CPU 103 controls the display monitor 012IW029 to display a display (for example, display of "E") indicating that a RAM error has occurred. Further, the CPU 103 controls to externally output a security signal to an external device such as a hall computer via an external terminal plate (step 012IWS020). Then, the processes after step 012IWS018 are repeatedly executed.

By executing the processes of steps 012IWS007 to S020, the backup RAM is not normal in the feature unit 099IW (N in steps 012IWS007 and S008, Y in step 012IWS009), or a power failure occurs during the setting change. In the case (Y of step 012IWS011), the RAM is cleared on the condition that the setting key 012IW051 is turned on and the clear switch is turned on while the game machine frame 012IW003 is open, and the set value after step 012IWS025. Can be changed. On the other hand, unless the game machine frame 012IW003 is opened and the setting key 012IW051 and the clear switch are turned on, the loop process is executed, the set value cannot be changed, and the game control does not proceed.

If the setting changing flag is not set (step 012IWS011; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 012IWS021). If the output signal from the clear switch is on, the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag (step 012IWS022).

In this example, by executing the processes of step 012IWS022 and step 012IWS016, the RAM clear flag is set when the clear switch is first detected when the power is turned on to the game machine. After that, before the timer interrupt is set and the timer interrupt process (game control process) is started, there are multiple scenes to check whether the clear switch is detected when the power is turned on. However, instead of directly checking the status of the clear switch, it is determined whether or not the ON of the clear switch is detected when the power is turned on by checking whether or not the RAM clear flag is set. (See steps 012IWS025, S034, S048).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor 012IW090 is on (step 012IWS023). If the output signal from the door open sensor 012IW090 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting key 012IW051 is on (step 012IWS024). If the setting key 012IW051 is on, the CPU 103 checks whether the RAM clear flag is set (step 012IWS025). If the RAM clear flag is not set, the CPU 103 controls to transmit a setting confirmation command indicating that the setting confirmation process for confirming the set value is executed to the second effect control CPU 012IW120b (step 012IWS026). ). Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS030.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear flag is set, the CPU 103 controls to transmit a setting change command indicating that the setting change process for changing the setting value is executed to the second effect control CPU 012IW120b ( Step 012IWS027). Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the RAM abnormality flag is set (step 012IWS028). If the RAM error flag is set (that is, if an error in the RAM 102 is detected), the CPU 103 fills the set value confirmation buffer (a storage area provided in the RAM 102 for storing the current set value). Set to the set value "1" (step 012IWS029). Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS030. At this time, the CPU 103 resets the RAM error flag.

When the first effect control board 012IW12a and the second effect control board 012IW12b receive a setting confirmation command or a setting change command, they perform control to notify that the setting is being confirmed or the setting is being changed (for example). , A predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a decorative light emitting body such as a decorative LED is made to emit light in a predetermined manner). In this case, when an operation button for effect such as the push button 31B is pressed on the first effect control board 012IW12a and the second effect control board 012IW12b, "maintenance mode" or the like is displayed and the mode shifts to the maintenance mode. It may be configured to do so. The "maintenance mode" is, for example, the date and time setting of the real-time clock 012IW126, the occurrence history of various errors (recording when and what kind of error occurred), and the setting change history (when the set value was changed or after the change). This mode allows you to check the recording of the set value of. When the setting key 012IW051 is turned off and the setting confirmation process and the setting change process are completed, the maintenance mode is also terminated.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a 4 ms weight process for measuring a 4 ms weight time (step 012 IWS030). Then, when the weight time of 4 ms elapses, the CPU 103 proceeds to step 012IWS031 and executes the power off processing (step 012IWS031). In the power off processing of step 012IWS031, the CPU 103 executes a process of detecting whether or not a power off signal has been output (whether or not it has been turned on). The power off signal is output when, for example, the power supply monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a drop in the voltage of the power supply supplied to the game machine. Then, in the power off processing, when the CPU 103 detects that the power off signal has been output, it executes a power supply stop processing for saving necessary data (for example, backup flag, checksum) in the backup RAM area. To do.

Next, the CPU 103 identifies the set value stored in the set value confirmation buffer, and displays the specified set value on the display monitor 012IW029 (step 012IWS032). Further, the CPU 103 controls to externally output a security signal to an external device such as a hall computer via an external terminal board (step 012IWS033).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the RAM clear flag is set (step 012IWS034). If the RAM clear flag is not set, the process proceeds to step 012IWS043 as it is.

If the RAM clear flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the setting changing flag (step 012IWS035) and starts the setting change process. Next, it is confirmed whether or not the initial set flag indicating that the value has already been set in the clear switch buffer for the first time since the power of the game machine is turned on is set (step 012IWS036). The clear switch buffer is provided in the RAM 102 and is a buffer for setting the input state (whether it is on or off) of the clear switch. For example, in the clear switch buffer, a value of "1" is set when the clear switch is on, and a value of "0" is set when the clear switch is off. If the initial setting flag is set (if the value has already been set in the clear switch buffer for the first time since the power of the game machine is turned on), the process proceeds to step 012IWS039 as it is.

If the initially set flag is not set (that is, if the value has never been set in the clear switch buffer since the game machine was turned on), the CPU 103 puts the clear switch buffer on. The indicated value (for example, "1") is set (step 012IWS037). Further, the CPU 103 sets the initial set flag (step 012IWS038).

Next, the CPU 103 sets the value currently set in the clear switch buffer in the clear switch buffer last time (step 012IWS039). The previous clear switch buffer is provided in the RAM 102 and is a buffer for setting the input state (whether it is on or off) of the clear switch confirmed last time (4 ms before in this example). For example, in the previous clear switch buffer, a value of "1" is set if the previously confirmed clear switch is on, and a value of "0" is set if the clear switch confirmed last time is off.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms the current input state of the clear switch and sets the current input state of the clear switch in the clear switch buffer (step 012IWS040). Next, in the CPU 103, the value set in the clear switch buffer last time is in the off state (for example, "0"), and the value set in the clear switch buffer is in the on state (for example, "1"). It is confirmed whether or not (step 012IWS041).

If the value set in the clear switch buffer last time is in the off state and the value set in the clear switch buffer is in the on state, the CPU 103 updates the set value displayed on the display monitor 012IW029. It is displayed and stored in the set value confirmation buffer (updated and stored for the set value already stored) (step 012IWS042). For example, when "1" is displayed as the set value on the display monitor 012IW029, the display of the display monitor 012IW029 is updated and displayed to "2", and the set value "2" is stored in the set value confirmation buffer. When "2" is displayed as the set value on the display monitor 012IW029, the display of the display monitor 012IW029 is updated and displayed to "3", and the set value "3" is stored in the set value confirmation buffer. When "3" is displayed as the set value on the display monitor 012IW029, the display of the display monitor 012IW029 is updated and displayed to "1", and the set value "1" is stored in the set value confirmation buffer.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting key 012IW051 is on (step 012IWS043). If the setting key 012IW051 remains on, the process proceeds to step 012IWS030, the processes of steps 012IWS030 to S043 are repeatedly executed, and the setting confirmation process and the setting change process are repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the setting key 012IW051 is turned off, the CPU 103 ends the setting confirmation process and the setting change process, and proceeds to step 012IWS044.

When the RAM clear flag is not set (that is, when the clear switch is not turned on when the power of the game machine is turned on) by executing the above steps 012IWS025 to S043 (steps 012IWS025, S034). N), the setting confirmation command is transmitted (step 012IWS026), and the setting confirmation process (particularly step 012IWS032) is performed, but the setting change process is not performed. On the other hand, when the RAM clear flag is set (that is, when the clear switch is turned on when the power of the game machine is turned on) (Y in steps 012IWS025 and S034), a setting change command is transmitted (step 012IWS027). At the same time, a setting confirmation process (particularly step 012IWS032) and a setting change process (particularly 012IWS035-S042) are performed.

Next, the CPU 103 sets a predetermined value (for example, a value corresponding to 30 seconds) in the security information timer for setting the output period of the security signal (step 012IWS044). In this example, when the setting confirmation process or the setting change process is executed when the power is turned on to the game machine, the external output of the security signal is started by executing the process of step 012IWS033. , Step 012 The security information timer is set in IWS044, and the information output process (step S23) is executed based on the value of the security information timer, so that the security signal continues until a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) elapses. Is output to the outside.

On the other hand, in this example, by executing the process of step 012IWS020, the security signal is output externally even when a RAM abnormality or the like occurs. In this case, the power supply to the game machine is reset. The security signal is continuously output to the outside until it is reset.

Next, the CPU 103 resets the setting changing flag (step 012IWS045). Further, the CPU 103 erases the set value displayed on the display monitor 012IW029 (step 012IWS046). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit a set value command indicating the set set value to the second effect control CPU 012IW120b (step 012IWS047).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the RAM clear flag is set (step 012IWS048). If the RAM clear flag is not set, the process proceeds to the recovery process of step 012IWS049. The processing of steps 012IWS049 and S050 in the feature unit 099IW is the same as the processing of steps S6 and S7 shown in FIG.

If the RAM clear flag is set, the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear 1 process and performs the process of clearing the clear storage area 1 of the RAM 102 (012IWS051). The processing of steps 012IWS052 to S055 in the feature unit 099IW is the same as the processing of steps S9 to S12 shown in FIG.

FIG. 8-14 is an explanatory diagram showing a process executed when the power is turned on. In this feature unit 099IW, as shown in FIG. 8-14, when the setting key 012IW051 is turned on when the power is turned on (furthermore, when the output signal from the door opening sensor 012IW090 is turned on), the clear switch is turned on. If so, the setting confirmation process (particularly step 012IWS032) and the setting change process (particularly 012IWS035-S042) are executed, and the initialization process (RAM clear 1 process (step 012IWS051)) is executed, and the clear switch is off. For example, only the setting confirmation process (particularly step 012IWS032) is executed, and the recovery process (step 012IWS049) is executed. If the setting key 012IW051 is off when the power is turned on, only the initialization process (RAM clear 1 process (step 012IWS051)) is executed if the clear switch is on, and if the clear switch is off, only the initialization process (RAM clear 1 process (step 012IWS051)) is executed. Only the recovery process (step 012IWS049) is executed.

Next, the display mode of the display monitor 012IW029 in the setting confirmation process and the setting change process will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 8-15 (A) and 8-15 (B), when the power is turned off (power is cut off) by the operation of a clerk at the amusement park, the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is supplied. When the supply is stopped, the display on the display monitor 012IW029 ends. If the large winning opening is open during a big hit game or a small hit game at the timing when the power is turned off, the large winning opening is closed by stopping the supply of electric power to the solenoid 82.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-15 (C), when the clerk of the game hall turns on the power while operating the clear switch (in the case of Yes in step S3 of the game control main process), the setting key 012IW051 is turned on. The setting confirmation process is executed by the CPU 103 on the condition that the setting value is set to, and the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed on the display monitor 012IW029.

In the state where the set value is displayed on the display monitor 012IW029 in this way, as shown in FIG. 8-15 (D), the CPU 103 detects the operation of the clear switch by the clerk of the amusement park or the like in the setting change process. The numerical values displayed on the display monitor 012IW029 are sequentially updated each time the display is performed (for example, each time the clear switch is operated, the values are updated as 1 → 2 → 3 → 1 → ...). Further, the set value displayed on the display monitor 012IW029 is stored (updated and stored) in the backup area of the RAM 102.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-15 (E), the CPU 103 turns off the display monitor 012IW029 based on the setting key 012IW051 being turned off by the operation of the clerk of the game hall or the like, thereby turning off the display monitor 012IW029. Notify the clerk or the like that the new set value is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102.

When the hold storage is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, the hold storage is cleared. Further, when the big winning opening is closed at the timing of FIG. 8-15 (A) (the timing when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off), the RAM clear processing is executed when the setting is changed. As the memory of the jackpot is erased, the jackpot remains closed. After that, the CPU 103 finishes the setting change process, and is in a state where the game can be played, that is, a state in which the fluctuation display result, the jackpot type, the lottery for determining the fluctuation pattern, the payout of the prize ball, and the like can be executed.

In the setting change process in the feature unit 099IW, a mode in which the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed as the initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 012IW029 is illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. The initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 012IW029 in the setting change process is the most disadvantageous setting value for the player (“1” in the case of the feature unit 099IW), or the most advantageous for the player. The set value (“3” in the case of the feature unit 099IW) may be displayed.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 8-15, the case where the set value is displayed using the first display of the four-digit display of the display monitor 012IW029 when the set value is confirmed or changed is shown. For example, the set value may be displayed by using the second and subsequent displays of the display monitor 012IW029. Further, for example, the display monitor 012IW029 may be configured to display the set value by performing a dedicated 4-digit display. In this case, for example, if the set value is "1", the display monitor 012IW029 displays four digits of "-S-1", or if the set value is "2", the display monitor 012IW029 displays "-S-2". The 4-digit display of "-S-3" may be performed on the display monitor 012IW029 if the set value is "3". Further, for example, the set value may be displayed on all four-digit displays of the display monitor 012IW029. For example, if the set value is "1", the display monitor 012IW029 displays the four digits of "1111", and if the set value is "2", the display monitor 012IW029 displays the four digits of "2222". You may.

(Special design normal processing)
Next, the processing of the special symbol normal processing (step S110) in the feature unit 099IW will be described. 8-16 and 8-17 are flowcharts showing a special symbol normal process (step S110) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total reserved storage number (the total number of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number) (step 012IWS171). For example, check the count value of the total pending storage counter for counting the total pending storage.

If the total number of pending storage is not 0, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the second number of reserved storage is 0 (step 012IWS172). For example, it is confirmed whether or not the count value of the second hold storage number counter for counting the second hold storage number is 0. If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 103 is a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or the special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol). Is set to the data indicating "second" (step 012IWS173). If the second reserved storage number is 0, the CPU 103 sets the data indicating "first" in the special symbol pointer (step 012IWS174).

By executing the processes of steps 012IWS172 to S174, in the feature unit 099IW, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variation display of the first special symbol. Not limited to such an aspect, for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are displayed according to the starting winning order in which the game balls are won in the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening. And may be configured to execute.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 102 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 012IWS175). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 has each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = 1 in the first reserved storage buffer. Is read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage buffer. It is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the hold storage counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 012IWS176). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first hold storage counter and sets each storage area in the first hold storage buffer. Shift the content. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second hold storage counter is subtracted by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second hold storage buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 is placed in the storage area corresponding to the first hold storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first hold storage buffer of the RAM 102. Each stored random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n-1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", each stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102. The random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved storage number (or each second reserved storage number) is always extracted is the first reserved storage number (or each second reserved storage number). The order of the second reserved storage number) = 1, 2, 3, 4 is matched.

Then, the CPU 103 reduces the value of the total pending storage number by 1. That is, the count value of the total pending storage counter is subtracted by 1 (step 012IWS177). The CPU 103 stores the value of the total pending storage counter before the count value is subtracted by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a set value command indicating the set value set in the RAM 102 to the second effect control board 012IW12b (step 012IWS178). As described above, in the feature unit 112, the setting value command is transmitted when the setting change process is executed at the time of turning on the power by executing the process of step 012IWS047. However, even after the power is turned on, the step By executing the process of 012IWS178, a set value command is transmitted every time the variable display is started.

In this example, the same setting value command is transmitted when the setting value command is transmitted in step 012IWS047 and when the setting value command is transmitted in step 012IWS178, but the setting value command is different. It may be configured to send commands. For example, in step 012IWS047, a command for directly specifying a set value (for example, commands 9E01 (H) to 9E03 (H) according to the set values "1" to "3") is transmitted, while in step 012IWS178, the set value is set. A identifiable variation pattern command may be transmitted, and the variation pattern commands may be configured to be prepared for the number of set values (for example, for the set value "1", commands 1C00 (H) to are prepared as variation pattern commands. The setting value "2" may be configured to prepare commands 2C00 (H) to as fluctuation pattern commands, and the setting value "3" may be configured to prepare commands 3C00 (H) to as fluctuation pattern commands.

Further, in the case of the above configuration, even if the same variation pattern is used, if a different variation pattern command is transmitted for each set value, the total number of variation patterns x the number of set values (3 in this example). ) Minute fluctuation pattern command is required, which may increase the data capacity. Therefore, for example, even if the set value command is transmitted only when a specific fluctuation pattern is used, and only the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the specific fluctuation pattern is provided with the fluctuation pattern commands corresponding to the set value. Good. In this case, for example, the set value command is transmitted only when the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation with the highest output frequency is used, and only the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation is the fluctuation pattern command for the number of the set value. May be provided.

Further, in this example, the case where the same setting value command is transmitted by the setting value command (see step 012IWS047) transmitted at the time of turning on the power and the setting value command (see step 012IWS178) transmitted at the start of fluctuation is shown. It is not limited to any mode. For example, even if the setting value command for turning on the power and the setting value command for starting fluctuation are configured as separate commands, different setting value commands are sent at the time of turning on the power and at the start of fluctuation. Good.

Further, in this example, the case where the setting value command is transmitted separately from the fluctuation pattern command is shown at the start of fluctuation, but it is configured to transmit the effect control command that is used as both the fluctuation pattern command and the setting value command. May be good. In this case, for example, even if the fluctuation pattern command specifies the same fluctuation pattern A, if the setting value is "1", the fluctuation pattern command A-1 is transmitted, and if the setting value is "2", the fluctuation pattern command A-1 is transmitted. The variation pattern command A-2 may be transmitted, and if the set value is "3", the variation pattern command A-3 may be transmitted.

Further, the game control microcomputer 100 side is configured to be able to output the same fluctuation pattern command (for example, fluctuation pattern command A) regardless of the set value, and either the first effect control CPU012IW120a or the second effect control CPU012IW120b side It may be configured so that which fluctuation pattern is selected or the selection ratio is different depending on the set value of. For example, if the set value is 1, the fluctuation pattern A-1 is selected or the fluctuation pattern A-1 is selected at a high rate, and if the setting value is 2, the fluctuation pattern A-2 is selected or the fluctuation pattern A-2 is high. The variation pattern A-3 may be selected or the variation pattern A-3 may be selected at a high rate if the setting value is 3. In this case, for example, the fluctuation patterns A-1 to A-3 may be configured so that the fluctuation time is the same, but the presence / absence of pseudo-ream, the number of pseudo-ream, the presence / absence of reach, and the type are different. Further, in this case, for example, when the setting value command is not normally received, the fluctuation pattern A-1 is uniformly selected, or when the setting value command is not normally received, the dedicated selection ratio is selected. It may be configured to select a fluctuation pattern with.

Further, in this example, the case where the set value command is transmitted at the start of fluctuation is shown, but the setting value command may be transmitted at the end of fluctuation, for example, not limited to such a mode.

Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the background designation command to the second effect control board 012IW12b according to the current gaming state (step 012IWS179). In this case, for example, the CPU 103 controls to send a probability change state background specification command in the case of a probability change state, and controls to transmit a time reduction state background specification command in the case of a time reduction state, which is a normal state. In this case, control is performed to send the normal state background specification command.

Next, the CPU 103 reads the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result from the random number buffer area, and executes the jackpot determination module. The big hit judgment module compares a predetermined big hit judgment value or small hit judgment value (see FIG. 8-7) with a random number value MR1, and if they match, decides to make a big hit or a small hit. It is a program to be executed. That is, it is a program that executes processing of big hit determination and small hit determination.

If the value of the random number value MR1 does not match any of the jackpot determination values (N in step 012IWS180), the CPU 103 performs a small hit determination process (step 012IWS181). Then, when it is decided to make a small hit (Y in step 012IWS181), the CPU 103 sets a small hit flag indicating that it is a small hit (step 012IWS182), and proceeds to step 012IWS186.

If the value of the random number value MR1 does not match either the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value (N in step 012IWS181), that is, if it is out of the range, the process proceeds to step 012IWS186 as it is.

When the value of the random number value MR1 matches any of the jackpot determination values (Y in step 012IWS180), the CPU 103 sets a jackpot flag indicating that it is a jackpot (step 012IWS183). Next, the CPU 103 uses the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 8-8) to correspond to a type corresponding to a value matching the value of the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type stored in the random number buffer area (“big hit type A”). , "Big hit type B" or "Big hit type C") is determined as the big hit type (step 012IWS184).

Further, the CPU 103 sets the data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 (step 012IWS185). For example, when the jackpot type is "big hit type A", "01" is set as the data indicating the jackpot type, and when the jackpot type is "big hit type B", "02" is set as the data indicating the jackpot type. When the jackpot type is "big hit type C", "03" is set as the data indicating the jackpot type.

Next, the CPU 103 determines the stop symbol of the special symbol (step 012IWS186). For example, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, "-", which is an outlier symbol, is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol. Further, for example, when the jackpot flag is set, "7", which is the jackpot symbol, is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol. Further, it may be determined to be a different special symbol stop symbol depending on the jackpot type. Further, for example, when the small hit flag is set, "5", which is the small hit symbol, is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S111) (step 012IWS187).

(Main processing of production control)
Next, the operation of the effect control means in the feature unit 099IW will be described. FIG. 8-18 (A) is a flowchart showing the effect control main process in the feature unit 099IW.

In the effect control main process, first, the second effect control CPU012IW120b confirms whether or not a power supply cutoff signal is input from the power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127 (step 099IWS001). When the power cutoff signal is input (Y in step 099IWS001), the second effect control CPU012IW120b determines that the game machine itself has been disconnected (that is, the game machine itself has restarted). It waits until the input of the power cutoff signal is stopped (N in step 099IWS002). Then, when the input of the power cutoff signal is stopped (Y in step 099IWS002), the process proceeds to the process of step 099IWS201.

When the power cutoff signal has not been input from the beginning of the process (Y in step 099IWS001), the second effect control CPU012IW120b has undergone a system reset of the second effect control CPU012IW120b (that is, for the second effect control). It is determined that only CPU012IW120b has restarted), date and time information is input from the real-time clock 012IW126, and log information storage processing including the input date and time information as the system reset date and time of the second effect control CPU012IW120b is executed (step 012IWS003). ). Then, the process proceeds to step 099IWS201.

In the feature unit 099IW, the processing of steps 099IWS201 to S202 is the same as the processing of steps S71 to S72 shown in FIG. In the initialization process of step 099IWS201, the feature unit 099IW controls the image display device 5 to display an initial image (as long as it is an image that can recognize that the game machine is operating). Not limited to such a configuration, the image display device 5 is controlled to display the initial image only when it is determined that the system reset of the second effect control CPU012IW120b has occurred, or the game machine itself is restarted. By controlling the display of different initial images when it is determined that only the second effect control CPU012IW120b has been restarted, the activation history (that is, the system reset of the second effect control CPU012IW120b, etc.) (Whether or not has occurred) may be recognizable at a glance.

When the initial operation control process of step 012IWS202 is executed, the second effect control CPU012IW120b does not determine that the system reset of the second effect control CPU012IW120b has occurred (N in step 012IWS203), the date and time from the real-time clock 012IW126. The information is input, and the storage process of the log information including the input date and time information as the power-on date and time is executed (step 012IWS204).

By executing the processes of step 012IWS003 and step 012IWS204, the data indicating the log information including the system reset date and time or the power-on date and time is stored in the log area provided in the backup data memory 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14. Written and stored as. The second effect control CPU 012IW120b transmits a control signal corresponding to a backup command for turning on the power to the backup memory board 099IW14 via the serial communication circuit 099IW137. In the backup memory board 099IW14, the memory controller 099IW200 may respond to a backup command indicated by a control signal received via the serial communication circuit 099IW202 and execute a process of writing log information including a system reset date and time or a power-on date and time. ..

In the main feature unit 099IW, in the effect control main process, the second effect control CPU012IW120b is disconnected from the game machine itself when a power supply cutoff signal is input from the power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127 at the start of control ( That is, it is determined that the game machine itself has restarted), and the start of control is waited until the input of the power cutoff signal is stopped (corresponding to the processing of Y and 099IWS002 in step 099IWS001). Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes a storage process of log information including the power-on date and time (corresponding to the process of step 099IWS204). In addition, when the game machine itself is disconnected (that is, the game machine itself is restarted), the command at power-on such as the setting change command, the setting confirmation command, the initialization specification command, and the recovery command from the main board 11 Is transmitted, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes processing based on those commands (for example, corresponding to processing in steps 012IWS802, 012IWS805, 012IWS809, etc. described later). Further, the storage process of the log information including the power failure date and time (for example, corresponding to the process of step 012IWS847 described later) is also executed.

On the other hand, in the effect control main process, when the power supply cutoff signal is not input from the power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127 at the start of control, the system reset of the second effect control CPU012IW120b occurs in the second effect control CPU012IW120b ( That is, it is determined that only the second effect control CPU012IW120b has restarted), and the log information including the system reset date and time is stored in the log area without waiting for the start of control (corresponding to the process of step 099IWS003). When a system reset of the second effect control CPU012IW120b occurs (that is, only the second effect control CPU012IW120b is restarted), a setting change command, a setting confirmation command, an initialization specification command, and a recovery command are performed from the main board 11. Since the command at the time of turning on the power is not transmitted, the second effect control CPU012IW120b does not execute the process based on those commands. In addition, the log information including the power-on date and time and the log information including the power-on date and time are not stored.

As described above, in the feature unit 099IW, when the control of the second effect control CPU012IW120b is started (that is, when the operation becomes possible), the game machine itself is cut off (that is, the game machine itself is restarted) and the second It is possible to specify which of the system reset of the effect control CPU012IW120b (that is, the restart of only the second effect control CPU012IW120b) has occurred. Then, when a system reset of the second effect control CPU012IW120b occurs, the process of storing the log information including the system reset date and time is executed, while the process of waiting for the start of control (Y, 099IWS002 in step 099IWS001) and the power supply. Second production control even if necessary when a power failure occurs in the game machine itself, such as storage processing of log information including the input date and time (step 099IWS204) and storage processing of log information including the power interruption date and time (step 012IWS847 described later). When the system of the CPU 012IW120b is reset, unnecessary processing is not executed. Therefore, the situation at the time of turning on the power can be suitably determined, and the optimum processing can be executed according to the situation.

In the feature unit 099IW, in the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14, as the log area for recording the log information, the first log area for recording the log information for the game store and the log information for the game machine maker It is configured to provide a second log area for recording. Then, when the game machine itself is disconnected, a storage process for storing the log information including the power-on date and time and the log information including the power-on date and time information in the first log area is executed (steps 012IWS204, 012IWS847). Equivalent to processing). On the other hand, when the system reset of the second effect control CPU012IW120b occurs instead of the power failure of the game machine itself, a storage process for storing the log information including the system reset date and time in the second log area is executed (step). Corresponds to the processing of 012IWS003).

In the feature unit 099IW, the inspection device is connected to the pachinko gaming machine 1 for the log information recorded in the second log area, and the inspection device and the second effect control CPU012IW120b of the second effect control board 012IW12b are connected to each other. , Read by inputting and outputting inspection signals. That is, it has an output means for outputting log information that can specify the activation history. With such a configuration, log information including the system reset date and time can be used as information for development and debugging of the game machine maker.

There are various types of log information to be backed up, such as system data, effect control error data, and received command data. In this example, the first log area is displayed as history information in the maintenance mode. Log information is stored. For example, log information such as the power-on date / time, setting change start date / time, setting confirmation start date / time, and RAM clear date / time is stored (a part for executing processing such as steps 099IWS204, 012IWS802, 012IWS805, 012IWS809. 8-47).

On the other hand, log information used as information for development and debugging is stored in the second log area. For example, log information such as the system reset date and time, exception event information described later, and received command data is stored (the part that executes processing such as step 099IWS003 and 099IWS42).

In this feature unit 099IW, the log information recorded in the second log area is not displayed as history information on the maintenance history screen in the maintenance mode, but is not limited to such a configuration and is recorded in the second log area. A part or all of the log information (excluding the one that overlaps with the log information recorded in the first log area) may be displayed as history information on the maintenance history screen in the maintenance mode.

Further, when a predetermined backup condition is satisfied, for example, when a system reset of the second effect control CPU012IW120b occurs, log information is stored in both the first log area and the second log area. The process may be executed. The classification of log information stored in the first log area and the second log area is not limited to the configuration of this example. Further, 3 or more log areas may be provided.

Further, the backup method may be different between the first log area and the second log area. For example, when the backup method is batch backup, the data to be backed up by one backup is stored in the interrupt process based on the occurrence of the effect control timer interrupt process once, and when the backup method is split backup. The data to be backed up by one backup is stored in the interrupt process based on the occurrence of the effect control timer interrupt process multiple times. In this way, by properly using the backup method, backup can be appropriately performed according to the log information.

Further, the backup multiplicity may be different between the first log area and the second log area. The degree of multiplicity is the degree of mirroring in which data to be backed up indicating the same log information is stored in a distributed manner while being duplicated in a plurality of different log areas. You can specify the number of times. For example, when the multiplicity is "1", mirroring is not performed, and the backup target data indicating the same log information is stored and backed up only once. When the multiplicity is "2", mirroring is performed twice, and the backup target data indicating the same log information is stored twice in different storage areas for backup. When the multiplicity is "3", mirroring is performed three times, and the backup target data indicating the same log information is stored three times in different storage areas for backup. By increasing the degree of multiplexing, redundancy (availability) can be improved and the reliability of stored data can be improved.

FIG. 8-19 shows an execution example of backup processing having different multiplicities. The second effect control CPU012IW120b includes the functions of the memory writing processing units 43AKM11 and 43AKM12 and the functions of the occurrence event information creation processing units 43AKM21 and 43AKM22 by executing the program read from the ROM012IW121b. The backup data memories 099IW210A to 210C of the backup memory board 099IW14 are provided with backup storage units 43AKA21 together with backup storage units 43AKA11 to 43AKA13. The backup storage unit 43AKA11 includes a backup storage area 43AKA111 to 43AKA113 as a log area, the backup storage unit 43AKA12 includes a backup storage area 43AKA121 to 43AKA123 as a log area, and the backup storage unit 43AKA13 has a log area. As a backup storage area 43AKA131 to 43AKA133. On the other hand, the backup storage unit 43AKA21 includes backup storage areas 43AKA 211 to 43AKA213 as a log area.

The occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKM21 creates backup data corresponding to the case where the backup condition having a multiplicity of "3" is satisfied. The memory writing processing unit 43AKM11 acquires the backup data created by the occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKM21. The backup data acquired at this time is transferred to the backup memory board 099IW14 and stored in the log area of the backup storage units 43AKA11 to 43AKA13. For the three backup storage units 43AKA11 to 43AKA13, the same backup data created by the occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKAM21 is distributed and stored while being duplicated. For example, the backup data first acquired from the occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKAM21 is stored in the backup storage area 43AKA111 of the backup storage unit 43AKA11, the backup storage area 43AKA121 of the backup storage unit 43AKA12, and the backup storage area 43AKA131 of the backup storage unit 43AKA13. , It is memorized by copying and writing. The backup data next acquired from the occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKAM21 is stored in the backup storage area 43AKA112 of the backup storage unit 43AKA11, the backup storage area 43AKA122 of the backup storage unit 43AKA12, and the backup storage area 43AKA132 of the backup storage unit 43AKA13. It is memorized by copying and writing. The next backup data acquired from the occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKAM21 is the backup storage area 43AKA113 of the backup storage unit 43AKA11, the backup storage area 43AKA123 of the backup storage unit 43AKA12, and the backup storage area 43AKA133 of the backup storage unit 43AKA13. It is memorized by copying and writing.

The occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKM22 creates backup data corresponding to the case where the backup condition having a multiplicity of "1" is satisfied. The memory writing processing unit 43AKM12 acquires the backup data created by the occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKM22. The backup data acquired at this time is transferred to the backup memory board 099IW14 and stored in the log area of the backup storage unit 43AKA21. Further, the multiplicity corresponds to "1", and a single backup data is stored without being distributed without mirroring. For example, the backup data first acquired from the occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKAM22 is stored by writing to the backup storage area 43AKA211 of the backup storage unit 43AKA21 without copying. The backup data next acquired from the occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKAM22 is stored by writing to the backup storage area 43AKA212 of the backup storage unit 43AKA21 without copying. The backup data acquired next from the occurrence event information creation processing unit 22 is stored by writing to the backup storage area 43AKA213 of the backup storage unit 43AKA21 without copying.

The log information recorded in the second log area is not displayed as history information on the maintenance history screen in the maintenance mode, and cannot be confirmed without using a dedicated inspection device, for example, so some log information is missing. Although it is permissible (at least not a problem for the administrator of the game machine in the game store), the log information recorded in the first log area is displayed as history information on the maintenance history screen in the maintenance mode. , It is desirable that the backup is surely performed.

However, for example, a part or all of the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14 are configured by using a non-volatile ferroelectric memory such as FRAM (registered trademark) (Ferroelectric RAM), and serial communication circuit 099IW137 and serial communication. When the communication data is transmitted / received by the serial communication method via the circuit 099IW202 (for example, the communication speed is slower than that of the bus connection method), if the backup is performed by increasing the degree of multiplexing, The backup may take a long time to complete. Then, when the administrator of the game store immediately restarts the game machine in the situation where the predetermined error occurs, the predetermined error is not recorded as log information (that is, it is displayed as history information on the maintenance history screen). There is a possibility that the situation will be distrustful.

Therefore, regarding the log information to be stored in the first log area, the backup multiplicity is set to "1", and the backup target data indicating the log information is stored and backed up only once. Further, regarding the log information to be stored in the second log area, the backup multiplicity is set to "2" or "3", and the backup target data indicating the log information is stored and backed up only twice or three times. .. Further, the backup method to the first log area may be a batch backup so that the processing can be completed quickly, and the backup method to the second log area may be a split backup to distribute the processing load. With such a configuration, in the maintenance mode, the log information that should be displayed as the history information on the maintenance history screen is missing (for example, the backup process is not completed by the time the game machine is restarted). In addition to preventing this, it is possible to improve the redundancy (availability) of the log information stored in the second log area used as information for development and debugging of the game machine maker. That is, a suitable backup can be realized according to the characteristics of the log information.

Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes the interrupt initial setting process (step 099IWS205). In the interrupt initial setting process of step 099IWS205, it is sufficient that the priority of the interrupt controlled by the interrupt controller mounted on the second effect control board 012IW12b can be initially set. The interrupt priority controlled by the interrupt controller may be set in the program management area provided in ROM012IW121b or the like based on the interrupt priority data stored in advance. For example, the interrupt priority may be set so that the serial reception interrupt has a higher priority than the effect control timer interrupt. Then, the second effect control CPU012IW120b is set to interrupt permission (step 099IWS206), and then enters the loop process.

FIG. 8-18 (B) shows an example of setting the processing priority in the second effect control CPU 012IW120b. The processing priority of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is determined in advance based on the specifications of the second effect control board 012IW12a, as well as the interrupt priority controlled by the interrupt controller mounted on the second effect control board 012IW12a. If possible. As an example, the processing when a CPU exception event occurs has the highest priority, then the serial reception interrupt has the highest priority, and then the processing according to the interrupt priority controlled by the interrupt controller has priority. The processing priority may be set in advance so as to be the degree.

The CPU exception event occurrence processing is a process executed in the second effect control CPU012IW120b when an exception event occurs due to an abnormality in the internal state or the like. The exception event of the second effect control CPU012IW120b may occur when an undefined instruction that is not defined in the instruction set is decoded. The exception event of the second effect control CPU012IW120b may occur when an invalid operation such as division by zero or overflow is executed. The exception event of the second effect control CPU012IW120b may occur when a memory protection violation in virtual memory occurs. The exception event of the second effect control CPU012IW120b may occur in the case of a TLB (Translation Lookaside Buffer) error in which the conversion from the virtual address to the physical address becomes abnormal. As described above, the CPU exception event occurrence processing is executed when the exception event of the second effect control CPU012IW120b occurs. Therefore, when the event occurrence condition corresponding to the internal state of the second effect control CPU012IW120b is satisfied, the CPU exception event occurrence processing is executed. The CPU exception event occurrence processing can be executed when the event occurrence condition that can be satisfied according to the internal state of the control device or the processing device, such as the second effect control CPU012IW120b, is satisfied.

FIG. 8-20 is a flowchart showing an example of processing when a CPU exception event occurs. In the CPU exception event occurrence processing, first, the exception time preprocessing is executed (step 099IWS41). In the exception-time preprocessing of step 099IWS41, the control information for executing the instruction code is saved in a predetermined area (stack area or the like) of, for example, RAM012IW122b. The control information for executing the instruction code may include the stored value of the program counter (PC: Program Counter) and the value of the program status word (PSW: Program Status Word). Following the exception-time pre-processing, the exception-time backup process is executed (step 099IWS42). In the exception-time backup process of step 099IWS42, the storage process of the log information including the exception event information is executed. In this case, the control signal corresponding to the backup instruction for when an exception event occurs is transmitted to the backup memory board 099IW14. The backup command for when an exception event occurs includes exception event information that can identify the exception event that occurred in the second effect control CPU012IW120b, and date and time information acquired from the real-time clock 012IW126 (for example, date and time information acquired from RTC099IW201). It may be used). The exception event information may indicate the type of exception event in an identifiable manner. When the memory controller 099IW200 of the backup memory board 099IW14 receives the backup instruction for when an exception event occurs, it may execute the process of writing the log information including the exception event information.

After the exception-time backup process, other exception-time processes are executed (step 099IWS43). In step 099IWS43, for example, the exception handling routine may be started by accessing the vector table and jumping to the acquired exception handler address. At this time, the stored value of the internal register (general-purpose register or the like) of the second effect control CPU012IW120b may be saved. If the exception event can be resolved by the exception handling routine, or if the exception event cannot be resolved and a reset occurs, the same backup process as in step 099IWS42 can be executed to resolve the exception event or resolve it. The log information when it does not exist may be memorable. When the exception-time processing is completed, the exception-time post-processing is executed (step 099IWS44), and the CPU exception event occurrence processing is terminated. In the exception-time post-processing of step 099IWS44, the stored value of the internal register (general-purpose register, etc.) of the second effect control CPU012IW120b is restored, and the control information for executing the instruction code is restored, thereby processing before the exception event occurs. It should be possible to return to.

The CPU exception event occurrence processing includes the exception time backup processing of step 099IWS42. In the exception time backup process of step 099IWS42, as backup data indicating log information, data including exception event information regarding the second effect control CPU012IW120b among a plurality of electronic components is used as backup data memory 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14. The write process for writing to the log area provided in is executed. The CPU exception event occurrence processing is executed when the exception event of the second effect control CPU012IW120b occurs, assuming that the event occurrence condition corresponding to the internal state of the second effect control CPU012IW120b is satisfied. In this way, when the event occurrence condition according to the internal state of the control device or processing device such as the second effect control CPU012IW120b is satisfied, a plurality of electronic components are used for the storage area such as the log area. It is possible to execute a writing process for writing and storing information about.

After being set to interrupt permission by step 099IWS206 of the effect control main process, a timeout occurs in a predetermined channel of the timer circuit 135 every predetermined time (2 milliseconds, etc.), so that the second effect control board 012IW12a is mounted. An interrupt request signal corresponding to a timer interrupt for effect control is output from the interrupt controller to the second effect control CPU012IW120b. The second effect control CPU012IW120b, which has received the interrupt request signal and has received the interrupt request, starts executing the effect control timer interrupt process.

FIG. 8-21 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control timer interrupt processing. In the feature unit 099IW, the processing of steps 012IWS204 to S208 is the same as the processing of steps S73 to S77 shown in FIG. When the effect random number update process of step 012IWS208 is executed, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes the effect mode change process of changing the effect mode (step 012IWS209).

The feature unit 099IW can control three types of effect modes, effect mode A to effect mode C, and for example, the background screen of the image display device 5 differs depending on which effect mode is controlled. The types of characters that appear in the advance notice and reach effects are different. In the effect mode change process of step 012IWS209, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b controls to change from the current effect mode to a different effect mode when a predetermined effect mode change condition is satisfied. For example, the effect mode may be changed based on the predetermined date and time based on the date and time information from the real-time clock 012IW126. Further, for example, a lottery process based on a random number may be executed, and the effect mode may be changed based on the decision to change the effect mode.

In step 012IWS209, when the effect mode is changed, the second effect control CPU012IW120b may, for example, set a flag corresponding to the effect mode after the change and reset the flag corresponding to the effect mode before the change. .. For example, when the effect mode A is changed, the effect mode A flag may be set and the effect mode B flag or the effect mode C flag before the change may be reset. Further, for example, when the effect mode is changed to B, the effect mode B flag may be set and the effect mode A flag or effect mode C flag before the change may be reset. Further, for example, when the effect mode is changed to C, the effect mode C flag may be set and the effect mode A flag or effect mode B flag before the change may be reset.

The production mode may be changed in a predetermined order such as production mode A → production mode B → production mode C → production mode A → ... It may be changed at random from modes A to C.

Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes error notification processing for performing various error notifications (step 012IWS210). Next, the second effect control CPU012IW120b controls the maintenance mode during the setting confirmation, and executes the maintenance mode process for displaying the maintenance history screen and the setting change / confirmation history screen (step 012IWS211).

In the maintenance mode process of step 099IWS211, control is performed so that the maintenance history screen and the setting change / confirmation history screen can be displayed. On the maintenance history screen, for example, when the setting confirmation status or the maintenance mode menu screen corresponding to the setting confirmation status is displayed, the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B that is operated by the staff of the game hall is detected. Based on the result, it can be displayed when it is determined that the maintenance history selection operation has been performed. When the maintenance history screen is displayed, all log information is read from the log areas provided in the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14 (strictly speaking, the log for the amusement shop among the log information). Only the information is read, and the log information for the game machine maker is not read). The image display device 5 displays a maintenance history screen that includes the read log information as history information. The setting change / confirmation history screen can be displayed when it is determined that the setting change / confirmation history selection operation has been performed based on the detection result of the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B by the staff of the game hall. Become. When the setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed, all the setting change and setting confirmation log information is read from the log areas provided in the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14. The image display device 5 displays a setting change / confirmation history screen that includes the read setting change and setting confirmation log information as history information. Note that the maintenance history screen and the setting change / confirmation history screen can be displayed even if they can be displayed based on the detection result of the operation performed by the person in charge at the manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine 1, unlike the staff at the game hall. Good. The maintenance history screen and the setting change / confirmation history screen are screens that cannot be visually recognized by the player of the pachinko game machine 1 during the game, and can be confirmed by the staff of the game hall or the person in charge at the manufacturer. Just do it.

Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes the setting change time recording process for recording the date and time when the set value is changed in the setting change process (step 012IWS212). Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes the current time setting process for setting the current time during the maintenance mode (step 012IWS213). Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes a power failure date / time recording process for recording the power failure date / time when the power failure occurs (step 012IWS214). Then, after executing the backup process during the effect control (step 099IWS215), the effect control timer interrupt process ends.

In the effect control timer backup process executed in step 099IWS215 of the effect control timer interrupt process, it is determined whether or not the preset backup condition is satisfied. Then, when it is determined that the backup condition is satisfied, the backup process for storing and storing the backup target data corresponding to the satisfied backup condition is executed. As the backup condition, it is sufficient that a plurality of different conditions can be set according to the occurrence of an event including various changes and settings in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The backup control table showing a plurality of backup conditions may be stored in advance in a predetermined area (program management area or the like) provided in, for example, ROM012IW121b. The data to be backed up may include different data depending on the backup conditions. Alternatively, the backup target data may include data common to a plurality of backup conditions. Regardless of which backup condition is satisfied, the backup target data indicating the log information including the date and time information may be stored. As a backup method for storing the backup target data, a batch backup and a split backup may be prepared. In the case of batch backup, the data to be backed up by one backup is stored in the interrupt process based on the occurrence of one timer interrupt for effect control. In the case of split backup, the backup target data for one backup is stored in the interrupt processing based on the occurrence of multiple timer interrupts for effect control.

The backup process for storing and storing the backup target data according to the backup condition is executed every time the effect control timer interrupt process is executed and when the backup condition is satisfied in the backup process during the effect control in step 099IWS215. It may be possible, or it may be possible to execute all at once when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. When the backup process is executed in a batch at the time of power failure, when it is determined that the backup condition is satisfied in the backup process during the effect control, for example, a backup target showing log information including date and time information in a predetermined area of RAM012IW122b Remember the data.

(Command analysis processing)
8-22 and 8-23 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step 012IWS206). The effect control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the second effect control CPU012IW120b confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the second effect control CPU012IW120b first confirms whether or not the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 012IWS301). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the second effect control CPU012IW120b reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step 012IWS302). After reading, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step 012IWS303). The reason for +2 is that it reads 2 bytes (1 command) at a time.

If the received effect control command is a set value command (step 012IWS304), the second effect control CPU012IW120b stores the set value indicated by the received set value command in the set value storage area formed in the RAM 012IW122b. (Step 012IWS305). Further, the second effect control CPU012IW120b sets a set value command reception flag indicating that the set value command has been normally received at least once after the power is turned on to the game machine (step 012IWS306). In the feature unit 099IW, the set value and the set value command reception flag stored in the set value storage area are reset in the initialization process (step 012IWS201) when the power supply to the game machine is started. And.

Further, in this feature unit 099IW, the set value command is transmitted when the power is turned on to the game machine and the setting change process is performed, but the set value command is normally performed due to missing command or garbled data. If the data cannot be received in, the process of step 012IWS305 is not executed and the set value is not stored in the set value storage area. However, in this feature unit 099IW, even if the set value command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on, the set value command is transmitted for each fluctuation display, so that the process of step 012IWS305 is performed based on the set value command received thereafter. It is executed and the setting value can be stored in the setting value storage area.

Further, even if the set value command is received, the set value included in the set value command may be an abnormal value. Therefore, when the set value command is read out on the second effect control CPU012IW120b side, the set value is set. It may be configured to determine whether or not the setting value included in the command is a normal value. For example, in this example, the set value is configured to be set to any of "1" to "3", but includes values such as "5" and "10" that should not be set. If this is the case, the setting value included in the setting value command may be determined to be abnormal. Further, for example, the second effect control CPU012IW120b side stores the set value indicated by the received set value command, and then when a new set value command is received, the newly received set value is received. If the setting value indicated by the command and the setting value stored last time do not match, it may be determined that an inconsistency has occurred, and it may be determined that the setting value is abnormal. Then, even if it is determined that the set value included in the set value command is an abnormal value, it is assumed that the set value command has not been received normally, and the effect is restricted according to the processing method shown in this feature unit 099IW. It may be configured to do so.

(Initial roll setting)
In the feature unit 099IW, when either the initialization designation command or the recovery command is received from the main board 11 in the command analysis process on the second effect control board 012IW12b side, the image display device 5 receives a predetermined initial stage. Control is performed to display a roll (specifically, a combination of decorative symbols that is displayed on the image display device 5 until the first variable display is started) (hereinafter, also referred to as an initial roll effect). ).

If the received effect control command is an initialization specification command or a recovery command (step 012IWS307), the second effect control CPU012IW120b confirms whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 012IWS308). .. If the set value command reception flag is set (that is, when the setting change process is executed and the set value command is received normally), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM012IW122b. Based on the stored setting values, using the initial roll determination table, even initial rolls (for example, "246" and "224"), which are a combination of even decorative symbols, and odd decorative symbols Determine one of a combination of odd initial rolls (eg, "135", "113", etc.) and a special initial roll, which is a combination of decorative symbols including special symbols (eg, star symbols) (step). 012IWS309). Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS314.

FIG. 8-24 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the initial roll determination table. In step 012IWS309, a lottery process based on a random number is performed according to the allocation of the determination value according to the set value stored in the set value storage area using the initial roll determination table shown in FIG. 8-24 (A), and the initial result is performed. Determine the outcome. In the initial roll determination table shown in FIG. 8-24 (A), the ratio of odd initial rolls determined increases in the order of set values "1" <"2" <"3". Therefore, if the odd initial roll is displayed on the image display device 5 before the start of the game, the setting value is advantageous as compared with the case where the setting is changed and the even initial roll is displayed. It will be suggested that it is set to. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-24 (A), the special initial result may be determined only when the set value is "3". Therefore, if the special initial result is displayed on the image display device 5 before the start of the game, it is confirmed that the setting has been changed and that the setting value is "3". With such a configuration, it is possible to give an interest in the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the start of the game, to give an motivation to play the game from an early time zone of the business hours of the game store, and to enhance the interest.

If the setting value command reception flag is not set (that is, the setting change process is executed, but the setting value command cannot be received normally due to missing command or garbled data), the second The effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode A (step 012IWS310). It should be noted that whether or not the effect mode A is set can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. In the effect mode A, the second effect control CPU012IW120b determines the initial result using the initial roll determination table shown in FIG. 8-24 (A), assuming that the set value is "1" (the initial roll is determined (A). Step 012IWS311). Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS314.

By executing the process of steps 012IWS310 to S311, the feature unit 099IW cannot normally receive the set value command, and when the effect mode A is set, the set value is the most disadvantageous setting. The initial roll is determined as being "1". As shown in FIG. 8-24 (A), with respect to the set value "1", the ratio of the odd initial rolls determined is the lowest, and the special initial rolls are not determined. By configuring in such a way, it is possible to reduce the situation where an odd initial number or a special initial number is displayed and the player is disappointed even though a disadvantageous setting value is set, and the interest in the game is reduced. It is possible to prevent the decrease of.

If it is not the effect mode A, the second effect control CPU012IW120b confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode C (step 012IWS312). It should be noted that whether or not the effect mode C is set can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. In the effect mode C, the second effect control CPU012IW120b determines the initial result using the initial result determination table for the effect mode C (step 012IWS313). Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS314.

FIG. 8-24 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an initial roll determination table for the effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 8-24 (B), in the initial roll determination table for the effect mode C, an odd initial roll is determined as compared with the case of the setting value "3" which is the most advantageous for the player. The ratio is low, and it may not be determined as a special initial roll.

By executing the processing of steps 012IWS312 to S313, the feature unit 099IW sets a disadvantageous setting value when the setting value command cannot be normally received and the effect mode C is set. In spite of this, the odd initial rolls and special initial rolls are displayed to reduce the situation in which the player is disappointed, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b controls the image display device 5 to display the initial rolls determined in steps 012IWS309, S311, and S313 (step 012IWS314).

It should be noted that the feature unit 099IW describes that the image display device 5 controls the display, the game effect lamp 9 is turned on, and the sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The second effect control CPU012IW120b does not directly control the image display device 5, the game effect lamp 9, and the speakers 8L, 8R. More specifically, the second effect control CPU012IW120b is the first effect control CPU012IW120a. Sends a command for controlling the image display device 5, the game effect lamp 9, and the speakers 8L and 8R. Then, the first effect control CPU012IW120a controls the image display device 5, the game effect lamp 9, the speakers 8L, and 8R based on the command from the second effect control CPU012IW120b to perform various effects and notifications. This also applies to other similar descriptions in the feature section 099IW.

On the other hand, when it is not the effect mode C (that is, when the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the second effect control CPU012IW120b determines the initial result to be an even initial number and displays an image. The device 5 controls to display even initial rolls (step 012IWS315).

By executing the process of step 012IWS315, the feature unit 099IW uniformly displays an even initial result when the set value command cannot be normally received and the effect mode B is set. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the situation where an odd initial number or a special initial number is displayed to disappoint the player even though an unfavorable setting value is set, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. I have to.

Even when the set value command is not normally received in the effect mode B, the odd-numbered initial roll symbol may be determined at a low rate. In this case, for example, an initial roll is used by using a table in which the determination ratio of the odd initial roll symbol is set lower than the set value "1" of the initial roll determination table shown in FIG. 8-24 (A). It may be configured to determine the eye pattern.

In this example, the case where the even initial number is uniformly displayed when the set value command cannot be received normally and the effect mode B is set is not limited to such a mode. .. For example, when the set value command cannot be received normally and the effect mode B is set, and the set value command cannot be received normally, such as a combination of symbols of "???" as the initial result. It may be configured to display a dedicated initial roll. Any combination of symbols that does not suggest a set value in some form may be displayed as an initial result.

In addition, the processing when the setting value command cannot be received normally (or when the setting value cannot be stored normally) is not limited to the one shown in this example. For example, when N is determined in step 012IWS308, the set value "1" may be stored in the set value storage area as a default to determine the initial result. Further, for example, a dedicated setting value (for example, setting value "4") indicating that the setting value command could not be received normally is stored in the setting value storage area to determine the initial result. May be good.

If the received effect control command is a set value abnormality error command (step 012IWS316), the second effect control CPU012IW120b executes the set value abnormality error notification (step 012IWS317). For example, the second effect control CPU012IW120b displays a character display such as "a setting value abnormality error has occurred" in the image display device 5, or a sound or an error sound indicating a setting value abnormality error from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output, and the game effect lamp 9 and the LED are controlled to emit light in a predetermined error pattern. In this case, when the set value abnormality error notification is performed, the maximum volume sound or error sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 and LED are emitted with the maximum brightness (for example, a full-color LED). In that case, it is desirable to make it emit light in white.

If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (effect control command that specifies a variation pattern) (step 012IWS320), the second effect control CPU012IW120b transmits the received variation pattern command to the RAM012IW122b. Store in the command storage area (step 012IWS321). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step 012IWS322).

If the received effect control command is a display result specification command (effect control command that specifies whether to make a big hit, whether to make a small hit, a big hit type, or a small hit type) (step 012IWS323), the second effect The control CPU 012IW120b stores the received display result designation command in the display result designation command storage area formed in the RAM 012IW 122b (step 012IWS324).

If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation command (effect control command that specifies that the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed) (step 012IWS325), the second effect control CPU012IW120b sets the confirmation command reception flag. (Step 012IWS326).

If the received effect control command is a jackpot start designation command (effect control command that specifies the start of the jackpot game) (step 012IWS327), the second effect control CPU012IW120b sets the jackpot start designation command reception flag (step 012IWS328). ).

If the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command (effect control command that specifies the end of the jackpot game) (step 012IWS329), the second effect control CPU012IW120b sets the jackpot end designation command reception flag (step 012IWS330). ).

If the received effect control command is another command, the second effect control CPU012IW120b stores the received effect control command or sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step 012IWS331). Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS301.

The feature unit 099IW is configured so that the odd initial roll is not displayed when the setting change process is not executed when the power is turned on. However, even if the odd initial roll can be displayed. Good. Further, also in this case, the ratio determined by the odd initial number may be different depending on the set value (that is, the set value may be suggested).

Further, for example, in place of or in addition to the odd initial roll and the even initial roll, the initial roll that denies the possibility of a specific set value (for example, the possibility of the set value 1 is denied and is set. (It is confirmed that the value is 2 or the set value 3), an initial result that is determined to be a specific set value, or the like may be provided so that the value is displayed according to the set value. For example, in the case of the set value 1, the possibility that the set value is 1 is denied when the specific initial result is displayed by preventing the determination of the specific initial result, and the set value 2 or It will be confirmed that the set value is 3. Further, for example, by setting a specific initial roll to be determined only in the case of the set value 3, it is confirmed that the set value is 3 when the specific initial roll is displayed. .. Further, at the time of determining the initial outcome, one of these initial outcomes may be determined by lottery. In this case, the determined ratio may be different depending on the set value.

(Setting suggestion production)
In the feature unit 099IW, the set value can be changed, and as the setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value, the pre-game suggestion effect executed before the start of the game, the above-mentioned initial roll effect, and the game (for example, during the game). , The suggestion effect during the game executed during the change display of the decorative pattern), the setting suggestion based on the determination tendency of the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern, and the suggestion effect during the big hit executed during the big hit (for example, during the big hit game) can be executed. Has been done. In the feature unit 099IW, the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the jackpot suggestion effect can be executed by a plurality of types of effect modes in which the reliability of the suggestion is different. The reliability of the suggestion may be different for each. For example, the reliability of the suggestion may be increased in the order of pre-game suggestion effect> jackpot suggestion effect> in-game suggestion effect, or in the order of pre-game suggestion effect> in-game suggestion effect> jackpot suggestion effect. The reliability of the suggestion may be increased in the order of suggestion effect during game> suggestion effect during big hit> suggestion effect during pre-game, or suggestion effect during jackpot> suggestion effect during game> suggestion effect during pre-game. Further, the execution ratio of each setting suggestion effect may be set to be set. For example, the administrator of the game machine does not execute some or all of the setting suggestion effects (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect and the initial appearance effect suggesting that the setting has been changed), or the execution ratio. It may be possible to change the setting so as to lower (or raise). For example, after the power is turned on, the setting screen is displayed, and by operating the operation means such as the push button 31B or the operation means (operable only by the administrator) such as the switch provided inside the game machine, the setting related to the setting suggestion effect is set. May be changed.

(Variable display start waiting process)
FIG. 8-25 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start waiting process. In the variable display start waiting process, the second effect control CPU012IW120b confirms whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step 012IWS501).

When the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the second effect control CPU012IW120b controls to end the customer waiting demo effect if it is being executed (step 012IWS502, step 012IWS503).

Then, the second effect control CPU012IW120b resets the variation pattern command reception flag (step 012IWS504), updates the value of the effect process flag to “1” (step 012IWS505), and ends the variable display start waiting process.

When the variation pattern command reception flag is not set, the second effect control CPU012IW120b matches the predetermined condition with the timed result by the timed means unless the customer waiting demo effect is being executed (N in step 012IWS506). Check whether or not (step 012IWS507). In step 012IWS507, for example, when the timer set when the previous variable display (display result "loss") ends (for example, set in 30 seconds) times out, it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied. Further, even when the timer is not set (that is, when the fluctuation display is not executed even once after the power is turned on and before the game is started), it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied. That is, when the variable display is not executed and the predetermined period elapses (and the jackpot game state is not controlled), or when the game is not started, the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the customer waiting demo effect is produced by the process described later. Will be executed.

If the timing result by the timing means matches the predetermined condition, the second effect control CPU012IW120b determines whether or not the number of fluctuations after the power is turned on is 0 (step 012IWS508). That is, in step 012IWS508, it is confirmed whether the game has not started yet. Whether or not the number of fluctuations after the power is turned on is 0 is specifically determined by the number of fluctuation counters for counting the number of executions of the variation display of the decorative symbol after the power is turned on to the gaming machine described later. It can be determined by confirming whether or not the value of (see step 012IWS603) is 0.

If the number of fluctuations after the power is turned on is 0, the second effect control CPU012IW120b confirms whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 012IWS509). If the set value command reception flag is set (that is, when the set value command is normally received), the second effect control CPU012IW120b is based on the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM012IW122b. Then, using the pre-game suggestion effect determination table, whether or not the pre-game suggestion effect is executed and the mode of the effect when the pre-game suggestion effect is executed are determined according to the set value (step 012IWS510). Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS515.

In the feature unit 099IW, when the customer waiting demonstration effect of the mode including the pre-game suggestion effect of the first effect mode is executed, the decorative lamp is changed to the first special color (blue) different from the normal color (for example, white). When the customer waiting demo effect is controlled and includes the pre-game suggestion effect of the second effect mode, the decorative lamp is controlled to the second special color (red), and the pre-game suggestion effect of the third effect mode is performed. When the customer waiting demonstration effect of the including aspect is executed, the decorative lamp is controlled to the third special color (rainbow color).

FIG. 8-26 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a pre-game suggestion effect determination table. In step 012IWS510, a lottery process based on random numbers is performed according to the allocation of determination values according to the set values stored in the set value storage area, using the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 8-26 (A). Whether or not to execute the pre-game suggestion effect and the mode of the effect are determined. In the pre-game suggestion effect determination table of FIG. 8-26 (A), judgment values are assigned so that the ratio of pre-game suggestion effects executed increases in the order of set values "1" <"2" <"3". Has been done. Further, the determination values are assigned so that the ratio of the set values "1" <"2" <"3" in which the second effect mode is determined increases. With such a configuration, it is suggested that the pre-game suggestion effect is executed, and that the second effect mode is executed rather than the first effect mode, so that the set value is set to be advantageous. Become. In addition, by executing the pre-game suggestion effect, it is suggested that the setting has been changed when the power is turned on. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-26 (A), the third effect mode may be determined only when the set value is "3". Therefore, by executing the pre-game suggestion effect according to the third effect mode, it is confirmed that the setting has been changed and that the set value is "3".

If the setting value command reception flag is not set (that is, the setting change process is executed, but the setting value command cannot be received normally due to missing command or garbled data), the second The effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode A (step 012IWS511). It should be noted that whether or not the effect mode A is set can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. In the effect mode A, the second effect control CPU012IW120b executes the pre-game suggestion effect using the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 8-26 (A), assuming that the set value is "1". The presence or absence of the above and the mode of production are determined (step 012IWS512). Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS515.

Steps 012 By executing the processes of IWS511 to S512, the feature unit 099IW cannot normally receive the set value command, and when the effect mode A is set, the set value is the most disadvantageous setting. Assuming that it is "1", whether or not the pre-game suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode are determined. As shown in FIG. 8-26 (A), the ratio of the set value "1" determined as the second effect mode is the lowest, and the third effect mode may not be determined. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the situation in which the pre-game suggestion effect is executed by the second effect mode and the third effect mode even though the disadvantageous set value is set, and the player is disappointed. However, it is possible to prevent the decline in interest in games.

If it is not the effect mode A, the second effect control CPU012IW120b confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode C (step 012IWS513). It should be noted that whether or not the effect mode C is set can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. In the effect mode C, the second effect control CPU012IW120b determines whether or not the pre-game suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode using the pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C (step 012IWS514). Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS515.

FIG. 8-26 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 8-26 (B), in the pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C, it is determined that the pre-game suggestion effect is executed as compared with the case of the set values "2" and "3". The ratio itself is low, the ratio determined to be the first effect mode or the second effect mode is low, and the third effect mode may not be determined.

By executing the processes of steps 012IWS513 to S514, a disadvantageous setting value is set in the feature unit 099IW when the setting value command cannot be normally received and the effect mode C is set. In spite of this, the situation in which the pre-game suggestion effect is executed by the second effect mode and the third effect mode to disappoint the player on the contrary is reduced, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game.

Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b controls to execute the customer waiting demo effect in the mode including the pre-game suggestion effect determined to be executed in steps 012IWS510, S512, and S514 (step 012IWS515). Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS517.

On the other hand, when it is not the effect mode C (that is, when the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b shifts to step 012IWS516 as it is. That is, in the effect mode B, the pre-game suggestion effect is restricted from being executed.

By executing the process of step 012IWS513, the feature unit 099IW does not execute the pre-game suggestion effect when the set value command cannot be normally received and is in the effect mode B. It is possible to reduce the situation in which the pre-game suggestion effect is executed even though the disadvantageous setting value is set and the player is disappointed, and it is possible to prevent the player from being less interested in the game.

Even when the set value command is not normally received in the effect mode B, the pre-game suggestion effect may be configured to be executable at a low rate. In this case, for example, using a table in which the execution rate of the pre-game suggestion effect is set lower than the set value "1" of the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 8-26 (A), before the game is used. It may be configured to determine the presence or absence and type of suggestive effect.

Not limited to the example shown in FIG. 8-26 (A), only a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) among the plurality of effect modes is executed so that the execution ratio differs depending on the set value. It may be.

Further, for example, when a specific effect mode (for example, a second effect mode) among a plurality of effect modes is executed, the possibility of a specific set value may be denied. For example, in the case of the setting value 1, it is set when the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed by preventing the determination of the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode). The possibility that the value is 1, is denied, and it is confirmed that the value is 2 or 3. Further, when a specific effect mode (for example, a second effect mode) is executed, it may be determined that the value is a specific set value. For example, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed by determining the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) only in the case of the set value 3. It will be confirmed that the set value is 3.

In this feature unit 099IW, the pre-game suggestion effect can be executed at different ratios according to the set value, but this is the pre-game suggestion effect (first effect mode, second effect mode, and second effect mode) according to the set value. The execution ratio of (including 3 effect modes) is different, the execution ratios of the first effect mode, the second effect mode, and the third effect mode are different depending on the set value, and only a specific effect mode is set according to the set value. It is a concept that includes different execution ratios.

Note that the feature unit 099IW is configured so that the pre-game suggestion effect is not executed when the setting value is not changed when the power is turned on and the setting value command has not yet been received. Not limited to this, the pre-game suggestion effect may be executed even when the setting has not been changed. In this case, it is possible to determine whether or not the pre-game suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode when the pre-game suggestion effect is executed at different ratios depending on whether the setting is changed or not.

For example, FIG. 8-26 (C) is a pre-game suggestion effect determination table used when a command at the time of restoration is received. Comparing the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 8-26 (A) with the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 8-26 (C), when the command at the time of recovery is received, that is, the setting change is made. When it is not performed, the rate at which the pre-game suggestion effect is executed is lower than when the setting is changed, and the difference in the execution rate between the set values is also smaller. By doing so, it is possible to make the reliability of the suggestion by the pre-game suggestion effect different between when the setting is changed and when it is not changed.

If the number of fluctuations after the power is turned on is not 0, the CPU 120 controls to execute the customer waiting demo effect in the mode including the execution history information of the setting suggestion effect (excluding the pre-game suggestion effect) (step 012IWS516).

When the process of step 012IWS516 is executed, for example, in the image display device 5, the execution history indicating the number of executions of the setting suggestion effect (in-game suggestion effect or jackpot suggestion effect), the execution content (execution mode), and the like. A customer-waiting demonstration effect in which information is displayed is executed. When the process of step 012IWS516 is executed, the customer waiting de effect is executed, and when a predetermined operation (for example, the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B) is performed during the execution of the customer waiting demo effect, The image display device 5 may display the execution history information of the setting suggestion effect. Further, on the side of the first effect control board 012IW12a and the second effect control board 012IW12b, the number of executions and the execution contents of the setting suggestion effect (initial roll effect, pre-game suggestion effect, in-game suggestion effect, jackpot suggestion effect, etc.) It may be possible to store information indicating (the mode of effect at the time of execution) and perform an effect of estimating a set value from this information and notifying the effect. It should be noted that this effect notifies the setting expectation degree (or estimated setting value) calculated based on a predetermined standard from the execution status of the setting suggestion effect, and does not notify the actual setting value. ..

In the feature unit 099IW, the pre-game suggestion effect is executed only before the game is started by the processing of steps 012IWS508 to 012IWS515. Further, the process of step 012IWS516 shows the execution history information of the setting suggestion effect during the customer waiting demo effect, but the information about the pre-game suggestion effect is excluded. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the pachinko game machine 1 interested in the state before the start of the game and to give the motivation to play the game from the early hours of the business hours of the game store, which can enhance the interest. .. Not limited to the example of the feature unit 099IW, for example, the real-time clock 012IW126 or the like is used so that the pre-game suggestion effect is executed only in a predetermined time zone (for example, from 9:00 am to 11:00 am). You may. Further, the execution history information of the setting suggestion effect may not include the information regarding the suggestion effect during the game in the special period.

In addition to the configuration of the feature unit 099IW, the number of executions and the execution contents of the setting suggestion effect are accumulated as execution history information, and at the end of the game, the image display device 5 displays the execution history information as described later. It may be configured to display a code or the like. In addition, when the player uses a mobile terminal such as a mobile phone with a camera function to take a picture of the two-dimensional code displayed on the game machine and sends it to a Web server on the Internet, the Web server based on the received information. The game history of the player may be managed, and a process of giving a predetermined privilege may be performed according to the game history. Further, the player may access the Web server (or analyze the two-dimensional code) using the mobile terminal to acquire the execution history information and display it on the display device provided in the mobile terminal. Further, the player may use the mobile terminal to read the two-dimensional code including the execution history information so that the setting suggestion image suggesting the set value is displayed on the display device provided in the mobile terminal. For example, a setting value estimated based on a predetermined standard is calculated from the execution history information, and a setting suggestion image suggesting the calculated setting value (just an estimation and different from the actual setting value) is displayed. You may.

Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not it has been detected that the game end operation has been performed by the player (step 012IWS517). For example, the second effect control CPU012IW120b confirms whether or not it has been detected that the game end option has been selected and the decision operation has been performed based on the detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B. .. If it is detected that the game end operation has been performed, the second effect control CPU012IW120b extracts the log information from the log area provided in the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14, and the extracted log. A two-dimensional code including information (for example, log information of the probability change failure date and time described later) is generated (step 012IWS518). Then, the second effect control CPU012IW120b controls to display the generated two-dimensional code on the image display device 5 (step 012IWS519), and ends the variable display start waiting process.

Although the feature unit 099IW describes that the operation has been performed, the second effect control CPU012IW120b does not directly input the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B. More specifically, first, the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B is input on the first effect control CPU012IW120a side, and the second effect control CPU012IW120b goes through the first effect control CPU012IW120a. Enter a command indicating that the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B has been operated. This also applies to other similar descriptions in the feature section 099IW.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 8-27 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display start setting process, the second effect control CPU012IW120b first reads the variable pattern command from the variable pattern command storage area (step 012IWS601). Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b displays the decorative symbol according to the variation pattern command read in step 012IWS601 and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command). (Stop symbol) is determined (step 012IWS602). That is, by executing the process of step 012IWS602 by the second effect control CPU 012IW120b, the display result (decorative pattern) of the variable display of the identification information is changed according to the variable display pattern (variable pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determining means. The display result determination means for determining the stop symbol) is realized. The second effect control CPU012IW120b stores the data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. In step 012IWS602, the second effect control CPU012IW120b determines whether or not it is a big hit based on the received variation pattern command, and determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based only on the variation pattern command. May be good.

In step 012IWS602, for example, when the received display result designation command indicates a probability variation jackpot, the second effect control CPU012IW120b determines a combination of decorative symbols having the same odd-numbered symbols as the stop symbols. .. Further, for example, when the received display result specification command indicates a normal jackpot (non-probability variation jackpot), the second effect control CPU012IW120b is a combination of decorative symbols in which three symbols are the same even-numbered symbols as stop symbols. To determine.

Further, when the received display result designation command indicates a small hit, the second effect control CPU012IW120b sets a combination of decorative symbols of the small hit symbol according to the small hit type specified by the display result designation command. decide. In this example, in the case of the small hit type A, the combination of "135" is determined as the small hit symbol, and in the case of the small hit type B, the combination of "357" is determined as the small hit symbol. In the case of type C, the combination of "579" is determined as the small hit symbol.

If the received display result specification command indicates an error, a combination of decorative symbols other than the above is determined. However, if a reach effect is involved, the combination of decorative symbols with the two left and right symbols aligned is determined.

When the pseudo-ream is specified by the variation pattern command, the second effect control CPU012IW120b has a chance symbol (for example, "223" or "445") as a temporary stop symbol of the pseudo-ream in step 012IWS602. In this way, the combination of the jackpot symbol that does not reach but one symbol is out of alignment) is also determined.

The second effect control CPU012IW120b extracts, for example, a random number for determining the stop symbol, and stops the decorative symbol by using the stop symbol determination table in which the data indicating the combination of the decorative symbols and the numerical value are associated with each other. Determine the design. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of the decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b adds 1 to the value of the fluctuation count counter for counting the number of executions of the variation display of the decorative symbol after the power is turned on to the game machine (step 012IWS603). In the feature unit 099IW, the value of the fluctuation count counter is reset in the initialization process (step 012IWS201) when the power supply to the game machine is started, and the fluctuation count counter is set when the power is turned on to the game machine. It is assumed that the value starts from the state of 0.

Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes the in-game suggestion effect determination process for determining the presence / absence of the in-game suggestion effect and the effect mode (step 012IWS604).

Next, the second effect control CPU012IW120b selects the process table according to the in-game suggestion effect if the variation pattern and the execution of the in-game suggestion effect are determined (step 012IWS605). Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 012IWS606).

The process table is a table in which process data to be referred to when the second effect control CPU012IW120b executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the second effect control CPU012IW120b controls the effect device (effect component) such as the image display device 5 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of a collection of a plurality of combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data. The display control execution data includes data and the like indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative symbol. Specifically, data related to the change of the display screen of the image display device 5 is described. Further, in the process timer set value, the fluctuation time in the mode of fluctuation is set. The second effect control CPU012IW120b refers to the process table and controls to display the decorative symbol in the variation mode set in the display control execution data only for the time set in the process timer set value. Further, the process table is stored in the ROM 012IW121b of the second effect control board 012IW12b. In addition, the process table is prepared according to each fluctuation pattern.

In the process table used when executing the effect control for the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the reach effect, the left symbol is stopped and displayed when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the fluctuation, and the right symbol is stopped when the predetermined time elapses. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbol to be stopped and displayed in the process table, the image for displaying the symbol is synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbol, the pseudo-ream, and the temporary stop symbol in the sliding effect. You may.

Further, when the execution of the in-game suggestion effect is determined in the in-game suggestion effect determination process of step 012IWS604, the process table including the in-game suggestion effect is selected in step 012IWS605, and step 012IWS607 is performed according to the selected process table. And by executing the variable display during effect process (step S172), the in-game suggestion effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol.

Further, the second effect control CPU012IW120b is a production device (image display device 5 as an effect component, effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). (Step 012IWS607), the control of the various lamps and the speakers 8L and 8R as production parts is executed.

In this feature unit 099IW, the second effect control CPU012IW120b controls the variation pattern command so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one, but the second effect control CPU012IW120b , The fluctuation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command.

Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation time timer (step 012IWS608). Then, the second effect control CPU012IW120b updates the value of the effect process flag to “2” (step 012IWS609), and ends the variable display start setting process.

(Suggestion production decision processing during the game)
FIG. 8-28 is a flowchart showing an example of the suggestion effect determination process (step 012IWS604) during the game. The in-game suggestion effect determination process is executed in the variable display start setting process (step S171). In the in-game suggestion effect determination process, when the second effect control CPU012IW120b is in the special period (Y in step 012IWS701), the first in-game suggestion effect determination table is selected (step 012IWS702), and during the special period. If not (N in step 012IWS701), the suggestion effect determination table during the second game is selected (step 012IWS703). For example, when a setting change end command or a setting value command is received, a special period flag is set, and when the fluctuation display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example), the special period flag is reset. For example, by confirming the state of the special period flag, it is possible to confirm in step 012IWS701 whether or not the special period is in progress.

Next, the second effect control CPU012IW120b confirms whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 012IWS704). If the set value command reception flag is set (that is, when the set value command is normally received), the second effect control CPU012IW120b is based on the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM012IW122b. Then, using the selected in-game suggestion effect determination table, it is determined whether or not the in-game suggestion effect is executed, and the effect mode when the effect is executed (step 012IWS705).

FIG. 8-29 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a first in-game suggestion effect determination table used in the special period, and FIG. 8-29 (B) is a second in-game suggestion effect used in the non-special period. It is explanatory drawing which shows the determination table.

In the first and second in-game suggestion effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 8-29 (A) and (B), the in-game suggestion effect is executed in the order of set values "1" <"2" <"3". Judgment values are assigned so that the ratio to be calculated is high. With such a configuration, it is suggested that the setting value is set to be advantageous by executing the suggestion effect during the game.

Further, regarding the second production mode (appearance of mini characters A and B), the ratio of execution in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3" is high, and the first production mode (appearance of mini character A). Judgment values are assigned so that the difference in execution ratio between the set values is larger than that. That is, there is a high degree of reliability that the second effect mode is set to a set value that is more advantageous than the first effect mode.

Further, in the first and second in-game suggestion effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 8-29 (A) and (B), the in-game suggestion effect of the second effect mode with high reliability is executed only during the special period. It is configured as follows. With such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game during a special period, and it is possible to enhance the interest.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-29 (A) and 8-29 (B), the third effect mode (character C appearance) may be determined only when the set value is "3". Therefore, it is confirmed that the set value is "3" by executing the suggestion effect during the game according to the third effect mode.

If the setting value command reception flag is not set (that is, the setting change process is executed, but the setting value command cannot be received normally due to missing command or garbled data), the second The effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode A (step 012IWS706). It should be noted that whether or not the effect mode A is set can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. In the effect mode A, the second effect control CPU012IW120b determines whether or not to execute the in-game suggestion effect and the effect mode using the selected in-game suggestion effect determination table, assuming that the set value is "1". (Step 012IWS707).

Steps 012 By executing the processes of IWS706 to S707, the feature unit 099IW cannot normally receive the set value command, and when the effect mode A is set, the set value is the most disadvantageous setting. Assuming that it is "1", whether or not the suggestion effect is executed during the game and the effect mode are determined. As shown in FIGS. 8-29 (A) and (B), for the set value "1", the ratio of determining that the suggestion effect is executed during the game is low, and the ratio determined as the second effect mode is low. Is the lowest and may not be determined as the third effect mode. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the situation where the suggestion effect during the game is executed by the second effect mode and the third effect mode even though the disadvantageous set value is set, and the player is disappointed. However, it is possible to prevent the decline in interest in games.

If it is not the effect mode A, the second effect control CPU012IW120b confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode C (step 012IWS708). It should be noted that whether or not the effect mode C is set can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. In the effect mode C, the second effect control CPU012IW120b determines whether or not the in-game suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode using the in-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C (step 012IWS709).

FIG. 8-29 (C) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an in-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 8-29 (C), in the in-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C, the ratio of determining to execute the in-game suggestion effect is lower than in the case of the set value "3". , It may not be determined as the third effect mode.

By executing the processes of steps 012IWS708 to S709, a disadvantageous setting value is set in the feature unit 099IW when the setting value command cannot be normally received and in the effect mode C. In spite of this, the situation in which the suggestion effect during the game is executed by the second effect mode and the third effect mode to disappoint the player on the contrary is reduced, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game.

On the other hand, when it is not the effect mode C (that is, when the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b ends the process as it is. That is, in the case of the effect mode B, the suggestion effect is not executed during the game.

By executing the process of step 012IWS708, the feature unit 099IW does not execute the suggestion effect during the game when the set value command cannot be normally received and the effect mode B is set. It is possible to reduce the situation where the suggestion effect is executed during the game and disappoint the player even though the disadvantageous setting value is set, and it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the interest in the game.

Even when the set value command is not normally received in the effect mode B, the suggestion effect during the game may be made executable at a low rate. In this case, for example, a table in which the execution rate of the in-game suggestion effect is set lower than the set value "1" of the in-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIGS. 8-29 (A) and (B) is used. Therefore, it may be configured to determine the presence / absence and type of the suggestion effect during the game.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 8-29 (A) and (B), and only a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) among the plurality of effect modes is executed according to the set value. The proportions may be different.

Further, for example, when a specific effect mode (for example, a second effect mode) among a plurality of effect modes is executed, the possibility of a specific set value may be denied. For example, in the case of the setting value 1, it is set when the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed by preventing the determination of the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode). The possibility that the value is 1, is denied, and it is confirmed that the value is 2 or 3. Further, when a specific effect mode (for example, a second effect mode) is executed, it may be determined that the value is a specific set value. For example, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed by determining the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) only in the case of the set value 3. It will be confirmed that the set value is 3.

In this feature unit 099IW, it is possible to execute the in-game suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value, but this is the in-game suggestion effect (first effect mode, second effect mode, and second effect mode) according to the set value. The execution ratio of (including 3 effect modes) is different, the execution ratios of the first effect mode, the second effect mode, and the third effect mode are different depending on the set value, and only a specific effect mode is set according to the set value. It is a concept that includes different execution ratios.

It should be noted that the feature unit 099IW is configured to be able to execute a suggestion effect during the game in a common mode (for example, the first effect mode) in the special period and the non-special period, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. , It may be possible to execute a suggestion effect during the game in a different mode. For example, the size, color, and the like of the mini character A may be different between the special period and the non-special period.

Further, the feature unit 099IW is configured so that whether or not the suggestion effect is executed during the game and the effect mode when the suggestion effect is executed are different depending on whether it is a special period or a non-special period and the set value. However, in addition to such a configuration, for example, the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern, the presence / absence of reach effect, the type of reach effect, the presence / absence of pseudo-continuous effect, the type of pseudo-continuous effect, and the display result are big hits. Depending on whether or not the suggestion effect is executed during the game, the effect mode when the suggestion effect is executed may be different.

For example, the suggestion effect during the game may be executed only when the variation pattern includes the reach effect (that is, the variation time is longer than the non-reach variation pattern). Further, for example, in the fluctuation pattern including the super reach B and the fluctuation pattern including the super reach A having a higher expectation than the super reach B, the latter is more likely to execute the suggestion effect during the game. Or, the reliability when the suggestion effect during the game is executed may be high, the ratio of the suggestion effect during the game being executed is high, and the reliability when the suggestion effect is executed is high. It may be made higher.

Further, for example, in the fluctuation pattern including the pseudo-ream effect and the variation pattern not including the pseudo-ream effect (or the number of pseudo-reams is smaller than that of the former), the former has a higher ratio of the suggestion effect being executed during the game. It may be set to be high, the reliability when the suggestion effect during the game is executed may be high, or the ratio when the suggestion effect during the game is executed is high and when it is executed. The reliability may be increased.

Further, for example, in the fluctuation pattern in which the display result is a big hit and the fluctuation pattern in which the display result is not a big hit, the former may have a higher ratio of the suggestion effect being executed during the game. The reliability when the middle suggestion effect is executed may be high, or the ratio of the suggestion effect during the game being executed may be high, and the reliability when the middle suggestion effect is executed may be high. ..

(Production decision processing during big hit)
FIG. 8-30 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect determination process during the big hit. The big hit middle effect determination process is executed in the big hit opening pre-process (step S114). In the big hit middle effect determination process, the second effect control CPU012IW120b confirms whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 012IWS901). If the set value command reception flag is set (that is, when the set value command is normally received), the second effect control CPU012IW120b is based on the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM012IW122b. Then, it is determined whether or not the suggestion effect is executed during the big hit, and the effect mode when the effect is executed (step 012IWS902). Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS907.

In step S012IWS902, when the period from the start of the game to the execution of the variation display a specific number of times (100 times in this example) (hereinafter, also referred to as a specific period), the third is shown in FIG. 8-31 (A). The 1 jackpot suggestion effect determination table is selected, and if it is not during the specific period, the second jackpot suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 8-31 (B) is selected. Then, based on the selected jackpot suggestion effect determination table and the set value, it is determined whether or not the jackpot suggestion effect is executed, and the effect mode when the effect is executed. The "game start time" here refers to the time when the first fluctuation display is started after the power is turned on, but is not limited to this, for example, the first fluctuation after the end of the previous consecutive villa. It may be the time when the display is started, or it may be the time when the first variable display is started after the end of the customer waiting demonstration effect. Further, in this feature unit 099IW, the period from the start of the game to the execution of the fluctuation display a specific number of times (100 times in this example) is set as a specific period regardless of whether or not the setting is changed when the power is turned on. However, when the setting is changed when the power is turned on, the period from the start of the game until the variation display is executed a specific number of times (100 times in this example) may be set as a specific period. Further, for example, the specific period is divided into a plurality of periods, and the first specific period (the period from the start of the game until the variation display is executed 50 times) and the second specific period (the 51st variation after the start of the game). It is also possible to use a jackpot suggestion effect determination table in which the presence / absence of the jackpot suggestion effect and the determination rate of the effect mode are different from the display to the execution of the 100th variation display).

In the first and second jackpot suggestion effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 8-31 (A) and (B), the jackpot suggestion effect is executed in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3". Judgment values are assigned so that the ratio to be calculated is high. With such a configuration, it is suggested that the setting value is set to be advantageous by executing the suggestion effect during the big hit.

Further, regarding the second effect mode and the third effect mode, the ratio of execution in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3" is high, and the execution ratio between the set values is high between the specific period and the non-specific period. Judgment values are assigned so that the difference between them becomes large. That is, in the specific period, the suggestion effect during the big hit, which is more reliable than in the non-specific period, is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game in a specific period, and it is possible to enhance the interest. Not limited to the configuration of the feature unit 099IW, the jackpot suggestion effect (or a specific effect mode thereof) may be executed only in a specific period and may not be executed in a non-specific period.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-31 (A) and 8-31 (B), the fourth effect mode may be determined only when the set value is "3". Therefore, it is confirmed that the set value is "3" by executing the suggestion effect during the big hit according to the fourth effect mode.

In the feature unit 099IW, when the jackpot suggestion effect is executed by the third effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-43 (A1), the decorative symbol that becomes the jackpot is stopped and displayed in the image display device 5. After that, as shown in FIG. 8-43 (B1), the dialogue C image (“high setting !?”) 012IW102 is displayed.

Further, when the jackpot suggestion effect is executed according to the fourth effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-43 (A1), after the decorative symbol that becomes the jackpot is stopped and displayed in the image display device 5, FIG. As shown in 8-44 (C1), the dialogue D image (“high setting confirmed”) 012IW105 is displayed.

If the setting value command reception flag is not set (that is, the setting change process is executed, but the setting value command cannot be received normally due to missing command or garbled data), the second The effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode A (step 012IWS903). It should be noted that whether or not the effect mode A is set can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. In the effect mode A, the second effect control CPU012IW120b determines whether or not the jackpot suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode using the selected jackpot suggestion effect determination table, assuming that the set value is "1". (Step 012IWS904). Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS907.

Steps 012 By executing the processes of IWS903 to S904, the feature unit 099IW cannot normally receive the set value command, and when the effect mode A is set, the set value is the most disadvantageous setting. Assuming that it is "1", whether or not the suggestion effect is executed during the big hit and the effect mode are determined. As shown in FIGS. 8-31 (A) and (B), the ratio of the set value "1" determined to be the second effect mode or the third effect mode is the lowest, and the fourth effect mode is determined. There is no case. With such a configuration, the player is disappointed by the big hit suggestion effect being executed by the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the third effect mode even though the disadvantageous set value is set. It is possible to reduce the situation where the game is played and prevent the game from becoming less interesting.

If it is not the effect mode A, the second effect control CPU012IW120b confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode C (step 012IWS905). It should be noted that whether or not the effect mode C is set can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. In the effect mode C, the second effect control CPU012IW120b determines whether or not the jackpot suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode using the jackpot suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C (step 012IWS906). Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS907.

FIG. 8-31 (C) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a jackpot suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 8-31 (C), in the jackpot suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C, the ratio of determining that the jackpot suggestion effect is to be executed is low, and the set values are “2” and “3”. Compared with the above, the ratio of the second effect mode and the third effect mode is determined to be lower, and the fourth effect mode may not be determined.

By executing the processing of steps 012IWS905 to S906, the feature unit 099IW sets a disadvantageous setting value when the setting value command cannot be normally received and the effect mode C is set. In spite of this, it is possible to reduce the situation in which the suggestion effect during a big hit is executed by the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the third effect mode to disappoint the player, and to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game. I have to.

On the other hand, when it is not the effect mode C (that is, when the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b shifts to step 012IWS907 as it is. That is, in the case of the effect mode B, the suggestion effect during the jackpot is restricted from being executed.

By executing the process of step 012IWS905, the feature unit 099IW does not execute the jackpot suggestion effect when the set value command cannot be normally received and is in the effect mode B. Even though a disadvantageous setting value is set, it is possible to reduce the situation where the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed and the player is disappointed, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

Even when the set value command is not normally received in the effect mode B, the suggestion effect during the big hit may be executed at a low rate. In this case, for example, a table in which the execution rate of the jackpot suggestion effect is set lower than the setting value "1" of the jackpot suggestion effect determination table shown in FIGS. 8-31 (A) and (B) is used. Therefore, it may be configured to determine the presence / absence and type of the suggestion effect during the big hit.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 8-31 (A) and (B), and only a specific effect mode (for example, the third effect mode) among the plurality of effect modes is executed according to the set value. The proportions may be different.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 8-31 (A), when a big hit occurs in a specific period, the suggestion effect during the big hit is always executed, but it may not be executed at a low rate. You may. In this case, the ratio of non-execution may be different depending on the set value. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 8-31 (B), the ratio of not executing the suggestion effect during the big hit is the same regardless of the set value, but the ratio of not being executed differs depending on the set value. You may let it.

Further, in this feature unit 099IW, when a big hit occurs in a specific period, a big hit middle suggestion effect is executed as a setting suggestion effect. In addition to or instead of such a configuration, A setting suggestion effect (for example, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a dialogue image suggesting a set value is displayed) may be executed based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied in a specific period. In this case, the predetermined condition may be satisfied, for example, when the number of executions of the reach effect or the pseudo continuous effect reaches the predetermined number of times, or when a specific super reach effect or a notice effect is executed.

In this feature unit 099IW, it is possible to execute the jackpot suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value, but this is the jackpot suggestion effect (first effect mode, second effect mode, third effect) according to the set value. The execution ratios of the effect mode and the fourth effect mode are different, the execution ratios of the first effect mode, the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the fourth effect mode are different depending on the set value, and the set value. It is a concept including that the execution ratio is different only in a specific effect mode (for example, the third effect mode) according to the above.

Next, the second effect control CPU012IW120b determines whether or not to execute the accessory effect (step 012IWS907).

Here, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-43 (A1), it is assumed that the movable member 012IW101 is provided above the image display device 5. In such a configuration, when the accessory effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 8-43 (B2), the movable member 012IW101 is controlled to move to the front surface of the image display device 5.

As shown in FIGS. 8-43 (A1) and (B2), when the accessory effect is executed, the movable member 012IW101 moves to the front surface of the image display device 5, so that the image display device 5 is affected by the big hit suggestion effect. The position where the dialogue image is displayed becomes difficult to see. In this feature unit 099IW, since the jackpot suggestion effect and the accessory effect are executed at different timings of the fanfare period in the jackpot game, the movable member 012IW101 that actually moves to the front of the image display device 5 is a jackpot. It does not obscure the dialogue image displayed by the medium suggestion effect. However, if the movable member 012IW101 is operated by the accessory effect during the fanfare period, the player may pay attention to the movable member 012IW101 and overlook the dialogue image displayed by the big hit suggestion effect. Therefore, in step 012IWS907, by using the accessory effect determination table shown in FIG. 8-31 (D), the accessory effect is not executed when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the suggestion effect during the big hit from becoming difficult to recognize and degrading the interest. Further, with such a configuration, even if the jackpot suggestion effect and the accessory effect are executed at the same timing, it is possible to prevent the jackpot suggestion effect from becoming difficult to recognize.

When it is decided to execute the jackpot suggestion effect, the execution timing of either the jackpot suggestion effect or the character effect is changed (for example, the character effect is performed during the fanfare period, and the jackpot suggestion effect is performed. (Performed during the ending period), it may be possible to prevent the suggestion effect during the big hit from becoming difficult to recognize. Further, when it is decided to execute the jackpot suggestion effect, the operation mode of the movable member 012IW101 is changed (for example, controlled so as not to stop at a position overlapping with the dialogue image by the jackpot suggestion effect), or the jackpot is hit. The display position of the dialogue image by the medium suggestion effect may be changed to prevent the big hit medium suggestion effect from becoming difficult to recognize. Further, when it is decided to execute the suggestion effect during the big hit, the execution of the accessory effect may be restricted by lowering the execution rate of the accessory effect. In addition, the execution of the character effect may be restricted only for a specific period. Further, not limited to the example shown in FIG. 8-31 (D), the accessory effect may be executed at a low rate even when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed.

Next, the second effect control CPU012IW120b determines the presence / absence of the light guide plate effect (step 012IWS909) when the accessory effect is not executed (N in step 012IWS908).

Here, a light guide plate 012IW103 having translucency capable of transmitting light and a light emitting body provided so that light can be incident from the end face of the light guide plate are provided on the front surface of the image display device 5, and the light guide plate 012IW103 is provided. It is assumed that the light emitting body is provided with a reflecting portion that reflects the light incident on the inside of the light guide plate 012IW103 from the end surface of the light guide plate 012IW103 and emits it to the front surface of the game machine. Then, by making the light emitting body emit light, it is possible to execute the light guide plate effect of emitting light to the front surface of the game machine from the reflection portion provided on the light guide plate 012IW103. In such a configuration, when the light guide plate effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 8-43 (B3), light is emitted from the reflecting portion provided on the light guide plate 012IW103 to the front surface of the game machine, resulting in a “big hit”. Appears. Further, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the image displayed on the image display device 5 while the light guide plate effect is being executed.

In step 012IWS909, by using the light guide plate effect determination table shown in FIG. 8-31 (E), the light guide plate effect is executed at different ratios depending on the presence or absence of the suggestion effect during the big hit and the effect mode when it is executed. To. Specifically, when the jackpot suggestion effect of the first effect mode is executed, the light guide plate effect is executed at a high rate, and the jackpot suggestion of the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the fourth effect mode is performed. When the effect is executed, the rate at which the light guide plate effect is executed is low. That is, when the jackpot suggestion effect of the effect mode that is not suggested to be an advantageous set value is executed, the light guide plate effect is executed at a high rate, and the jackpot suggestion effect is configured to be difficult to see. There is. For example, as shown in FIG. 8-43 (B4), the light guide plate effect is executed when the dialogue A image (“setting is ...”) 012IW104 is displayed by the jackpot suggestion effect of the first effect mode. If this is done, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the dialogue A image. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest of the game due to the suggestion effect during the big hit of the effect mode that is not desirable for the player. When the jackpot suggestion effect of the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the fourth effect mode is executed, the execution timing of either the jackpot suggestion effect or the light guide plate effect is changed (for example, the light guide plate). The production may be performed during the fanfare period, and the suggestion production during the big hit may be performed during the ending period).

(Ending production processing)
FIG. 8-32 is a flowchart showing an ending effect process (step S177) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. In the ending effect processing, the second effect control CPU012IW120b first subtracts 1 from the value of the effect period measurement timer (step 012IWS951). The effect period measurement timer is set based on the completion of all rounds of the jackpot game in the jackpot effect process (see step S176). Next, the second effect control CPU012IW120b confirms whether or not the effect period measurement timer has timed out (step 012IWS952).

When the effect period measurement timer has not timed out (N in step 012IWS952), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b subtracts 1 from the process timer value (step 012IWS953), and the effect device (image display) according to the contents of the process data n. The process of controlling the device 5, the game effect lamp 9, the speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) is executed (step 012IWS954). For example, an effect of displaying the end of the jackpot or displaying a predetermined character is executed.

Then, the second effect control CPU012IW120b confirms whether or not the process timer has timed out (step 012IWS955), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step 012IWS956). Then, the process timer setting value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step 012IWS957).

If the effect period measurement timer has timed out (Y in step 012IWS952), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the jackpot game ending this time is a jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot (step 012IW958). Whether or not it is a probability variation jackpot can be determined, for example, by checking the display result specification command stored in the display result specification command storage area. If it is not a probabilistic jackpot (N in step 012IW958), the process directly proceeds to step 012IWS961.

If the jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot is terminated (Y in step 012IWS958), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the V prize designation command has been received (step 012IWS959). If the V prize designation command has been received (Y in step 012IWS959), the process proceeds to step 012IWS961 as it is.

If the V prize designation command is not received (N in step 012IWS959), the second effect control CPU012IW120b inputs the date and time information from the real-time clock 012IW126, and the input date and time information is used as the probability change failure date and time to back up the backup memory board 099IW14. Log information is stored in the log area provided in the data memory 099IW210A to 210D (step 012IWS960). That is, in this case, although it is controlled by the jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot and the second special variable winning device 012IW007b is opened for a relatively long period of time (29.5 seconds in this example), the second is Since the game ball does not win in the V winning area in the special variable winning device 012IW007b and is not controlled to the probability change state, log information is recorded as the probability change failure date and time. Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS961.

After that, the second effect control CPU012IW120b updates the value of the effect process flag to “0” (step 012IWS961), and ends the ending effect process.

In this example, the case where the probability change failure is detected and the log information is recorded in the ending period at the end of the big hit game is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, in this example, since the second special variable winning device 012IW007b is opened in the fourth round during the jackpot game, at the end of the fourth round (when the second special variable winning device 012IW007b is closed after the fourth round). Or, even if it is configured to detect whether or not the probability change has not been established and record the log information during the 5th round after the 4th round (while the 2nd special variable winning device 012IW007b of the 5th round is open). Good.

(Error notification processing)
8-33 to 8-36 are flowcharts showing an error notification process (step 012IWS210). In the error notification process, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b first confirms whether or not the first left-handed notification in-progress flag indicating that the first left-handed notification is being executed is set (step 012IWS101). If the first left-handed notification flag is not set, the second effect control CPU012IW120b determines whether or not the second left-handed notification flag indicating that the second left-handed notification is being executed is set. Confirm (step 012IWS102).

If the second left-handed notification flag is not set, the second effect control CPU012IW120b confirms whether or not the jackpot game is in progress (step 012IWS103). Whether or not the jackpot game is in progress is determined by, for example, that the value of the effect process flag updated in the effect control process process is a value indicating the jackpot effect process (step S176) to the ending effect process (step S177). It can be determined by confirming whether or not it is present. If it is not during the big hit game, the second effect control CPU012IW120b confirms whether or not it is in the high base state (step 012IWS104). To check whether or not the system is in the high base state, for example, check whether or not a command that can identify the state in the high base state (for example, a probability change state background specification command or a time saving state background specification command) has been received. It can be judged by doing.

Unless it is in the high base state (that is, in the low base state), the second effect control CPU012IW120b confirms whether or not it has received the gate passage designation command (step 012IWS105). If the gate passage designation command is received (that is, if the passage of the game ball of the passage gate 012IW041 is detected), the second effect control CPU012IW120b counts the number of game balls that have passed through the passage gate 012IW041. The value of the gate passage counter for this purpose is added by 1 (step 012IWS106), and it is confirmed whether or not the value of the gate passage counter after the addition is 5 (step 012IWS107).

If the value of the gate passage counter is 5, the second effect control CPU012IW120b controls the image display device 5 to start displaying the left-handed notification display (step 012IWS108). For example, the image display device 5 controls to start displaying a character display such as "Aim to the left!". Further, the second effect control CPU012IW120b sets the first left-handed notification flag (step 012IWS109). Further, the second effect control CPU012IW120b sets a value corresponding to a predetermined period (5 seconds in this example) in the first left-handed notification timer for measuring the execution period of the first left-handed notification (step). 012IWS110). That is, in this case, since it is in the low base state and not in the big hit game, the left-handed operation is originally performed, but the total passage of the game ball to the passing gate 012IW041 provided in the right area of the game area is totaled. If it is detected 5 times in, it means that the right-handed operation is being performed, so the first left-handed notification is performed to urge the player to perform the left-handed operation.

If the value of the gate passage counter after addition is not 5, the second effect control CPU012IW120b confirms whether or not the value of the gate passage counter after addition is 10 (step 012IWS111). If the value of the gate passage counter is 10, the second effect control CPU012IW120b controls the image display device 5 to start displaying the left-handed notification display (step 012IWS112). For example, the image display device 5 controls to start displaying a character display such as "Aim to the left!". In this case, for example, it may be configured to display a large-sized left-handed notification display as compared with the case where the first left-handed notification is executed. Further, the second effect control CPU012IW120b controls to start all the lights of the game effect lamp 9 (step 012IWS113). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b controls to start outputting a predetermined notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R (step 012IWS114). In addition, the second effect control CPU012IW120b sets the second left-handed notification flag (step 012IWS115). Further, the second effect control CPU012IW120b sets a value corresponding to a predetermined period (33 seconds in this example) in the second left-handed notification timer for measuring the execution period of the second left-handed notification (step). 012IWS116). That is, in this case, when the base is low and the game is not a big hit, the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 012IW041 provided in the right area of the game area is detected 10 times in total. Therefore, the second left-handed notification is performed to urge the player to perform the left-handed operation. If the second effect control CPU012IW120b is set, the first left-handed notification flag and the first left-handed notification timer are reset.

In this example, the execution condition of the second left-handed notification is satisfied based on the fact that the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 012IW041 is detected 10 times in total, whereas the game ball to the passing gate 012IW041 is satisfied. Since the execution condition of the first left-handed notification is satisfied based on the fact that the passage is detected five times in total, the execution condition of the second left-handed notification is satisfied based on the execution condition of the first left-handed notification for two. The execution conditions are satisfied.

Further, in this example, it is assumed that the execution condition of the left-handed notification is satisfied based on the fact that the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 012IW041 is detected 5 times or 10 times in total. It is not limited to any aspect. For example, when the second start winning opening is provided in the right region of the game ball, if the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening is detected even once, the execution condition of the left-handed notification is satisfied. It may be configured to execute the left-handed notification.

Further, the second effect control CPU012IW120b inputs the date and time information from the real-time clock 012IW126, and the input date and time information is used as the left-handed notification date and time, and the log information is set in the log area provided in the backup data memory 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14. Is memorized (step 012IWS117). As described above, in this example, there are two types of left-handed notifications, the first left-handed notification and the second left-handed notification, but the log is only when the second left-handed notification, which is more important, is executed. When recording in information and executing the first left-handed notification of low importance, log information is not recorded.

If the gate passage designation command has not been received (N of step 012IWS105, that is, if the passage of the game ball of the passage gate 012IW041 has been detected, has the second effect control CPU012IW120b received the winning opening winning designation command? It is confirmed whether or not (step 012IWS118). If the winning opening winning designation command is received (that is, if the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening 10 is detected), the second effect control CPU012IW120b The value of the gate passage counter is cleared to 0 (step 012IWS119). That is, the fact that the winning opening winning designation command is received means that the game ball is won in the general winning opening 10 provided in the left area of the game area. Is detected, and the player is performing a left-handed operation, so the value of the gate passage counter is cleared to 0.

Further, even when the jackpot game is in progress (Y in step 012IWS103) or in the high base state (Y in step 012IWS104), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b shifts to step 012IWS119, and the gate passage counter Clear the value to 0 (step 012IWS119). That is, the value of the gate passage counter is cleared to 0 because the right-handed operation is performed during the big hit game or the high base state.

When the first left-handed notification flag is set (Y in step 012IWS101), that is, when the first left-handed notification is being executed, the second effect control CPU012IW120b performs the first left-handed notification. Check if the timer has timed out (step 012IWS120). If the first left-handed notification timer has timed out, the second effect control CPU012IW120b controls to end the display of the left-handed notification display in the image display device 5 (step 012IWS121). Further, the second effect control CPU012IW120b resets the first left-handed notification flag (step 012IWS122).

When the second left-handed notification flag is set (Y in step 012IWS102), that is, when the second left-handed notification is being executed, the second effect control CPU012IW120b performs the second left-handed notification. Check if the timer has timed out (step 012IWS123). If the second left-handed notification timer has timed out, the second effect control CPU012IW120b controls to end the display of the left-handed notification display in the image display device 5 (step 012IWS124). Further, the second effect control CPU012IW120b controls to end all the lights of the game effect lamp 9 (step 012IWS125), and also controls to end the output of a predetermined notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R (step 012IWS126). ). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b resets the second left-handed notification flag (step 012IWS127). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b clears the value of the gate passage counter to 0 (step 012IWS128).

In this example, the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening 10 is detected, the jackpot game is in progress, the high base state is in effect, and the notification period (33 seconds) of the second left-handed notification is determined. The case where the value of the gate passage counter is cleared to 0 is shown based on the elapse, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the value of the gate passage counter is cleared to 0 based on the fact that the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening 10 is detected, the jackpot game is in progress, and the high base state is in progress, while the second The value of the gate passage counter may not be cleared even after the notification period (33 seconds) of the left-handed notification has elapsed, and various processing modes can be considered.

Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the first full tank notification flag indicating that the first full tank notification is being executed is set (step 012IWS129). If the first full tank notification flag is not set, the second effect control CPU012IW120b determines whether or not the second full tank notification flag indicating that the second full tank notification is being executed is set. Confirm (step 012IWS130).

If the second full tank notification flag is not set, the second effect control CPU012IW120b confirms whether or not the full tank detection command has been received (step 012IWS131). If the full tank detection command is received, the second effect control CPU012IW120b determines whether or not the full tank flag indicating that the full tank state of the hit ball supply plate (lower plate) is being detected is set. Confirm (step 012IWS132). If the full tank flag is not set, the second effect control CPU012IW120b sets the full tank flag (step 012IWS133) and measures the duration of the full tank state of the hit ball supply plate (lower plate). The full tank timer is set (step 012IWS134).

If the full tank flag is set, the second effect control CPU012IW120b confirms whether or not the value of the full tank timer is a value corresponding to 10 seconds (step 012IWS135). If the value of the full tank timer is a value corresponding to 10 seconds (that is, if the hit ball supply plate (lower plate) continues to be full for 10 seconds), the second effect control CPU012IW120b The image display device 5 controls to start displaying the full tank notification display (step 012IWS136). For example, the image display device 5 controls to start displaying a character display such as "The lower plate is full!". Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets the first full tank notification flag (step 012IWS137). Further, the second effect control CPU012IW120b sets a value corresponding to a predetermined period (5 seconds in this example) in the first full tank notification timer for measuring the execution period of the first full tank notification (step). 012IWS138).

If the value of the full tank timer is not a value corresponding to 10 seconds, the second effect control CPU012IW120b confirms whether or not the value of the full tank timer is a value corresponding to 30 seconds (step 012IWS139). ). If the value of the full tank timer is a value corresponding to 30 seconds (that is, if the hit ball supply plate (lower plate) is continuously full for 30 seconds), the second effect control CPU012IW120b The image display device 5 is controlled to start displaying the full tank notification display (step 012IWS140). For example, the image display device 5 controls to start displaying a character display such as "The lower plate is full!". In this case, for example, a larger size full tank notification display may be displayed as compared with the case where the first full tank notification is executed. Further, the second effect control CPU012IW120b controls to start all the lights of the game effect lamp 9 (step 012IWS141). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b controls to start outputting a predetermined notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R (step 012IWS142). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets the second full tank notification flag (step 012IWS143). Further, the second effect control CPU012IW120b sets a value corresponding to a predetermined period (33 seconds in this example) in the second full tank notification timer for measuring the execution period of the second full tank notification (step). 012IWS144). If the second effect control CPU012IW120b is set, the first full tank notification flag and the first full tank notification timer are reset.

In this example, when the second full tank notification is executed, the case where all the lights of the game effect lamp 9 and the output of the predetermined notification sound are executed is shown as in the case where the second left-handed notification is executed. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, it may be configured to execute either all the lights of the game effect lamp 9 or the output of a predetermined notification sound, or it may be configured to light only a part of the game effect lamp 9. Good.

Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b inputs the date and time information from the real-time clock 012IW126, and uses the input date and time information as the full notification date and time for the log information in the log area provided in the backup data memory 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14. Is memorized (step 012IWS145). As described above, in this example, there are two types of full tank notification, the first full tank notification and the second full tank notification, but only when the second full tank notification, which is more important, is executed, the log is logged. When recording in the information and executing the first full tank notification of low importance, the log information is not recorded.

On the other hand, if the full tank detection command is not received (N in step 012IWS131), that is, if the full tank state of the hit ball supply plate (lower plate) is not detected, the second effect control CPU012IW120b is set. For example, the full tank flag is reset and the full tank timer is reset (step 012IWS146).

When the first full tank notification flag is set (Y in step 012IWS129), that is, when the first full tank notification is being executed, the second effect control CPU012IW120b is notified of the first full tank. Check if the timer has timed out (step 012IWS147). If the first full tank notification timer has timed out, the second effect control CPU012IW120b controls to end the display of the full tank notification display in the image display device 5 (step 012IWS148). Further, the second effect control CPU012IW120b resets the first full tank notification flag (step 012IWS149).

When the second full tank notification flag is set (Y in step 012IWS130), that is, when the second full tank notification is being executed, the second effect control CPU012IW120b is notified of the second full tank. Check if the timer has timed out (step 012IWS150). If the second full tank notification timer has timed out, the second effect control CPU012IW120b controls to end the display of the left-handed notification display in the image display device 5 (step 012IWS151). Further, the second effect control CPU012IW120b controls to end all the lights of the game effect lamp 9 (step 012IWS152), and also controls to end the output of a predetermined notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R (step 012IWS153). ). Further, the second effect control CPU012IW120b resets the second full tank notification flag (step 012IWS154). Further, the second effect control CPU012IW120b resets the full tank flag and resets the full tank timer (step 012IWS155).

(Maintenance mode processing)
FIG. 8-37 is a flowchart showing the maintenance mode process (step 012IWS211). In the maintenance mode processing, the second effect control CPU012IW120b first confirms whether or not the maintenance mode in-progress flag indicating that the maintenance mode is in progress is set (step 012IWS451). If the maintenance mode flag is not set, the second effect control CPU012IW120b confirms whether or not the setting checking flag indicating that the setting is being checked is set (step 012IWS452).

If the setting confirmation flag is not set, the second effect control CPU012IW120b confirms whether or not the setting confirmation command has been received (step 012IWS453). If the setting confirmation command is received, the second effect control CPU012IW120b controls the image display device 5 to start displaying the setting confirmation display (step 012IWS454). For example, the image display device 5 controls to start displaying a character display such as "setting is being confirmed". Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets the setting checking flag (step 012IWS455).

If the setting checking flag is set (Y in step 012IWS452), the push button 31B is turned on in the second effect control CPU 012IW120b (specifically, the detection signal from the push sensor 35B is input. (Whether or not) is confirmed (step 012IWS456). If the push button 31B is turned on, the second effect control CPU012IW120b controls the image display device 5 to start displaying the maintenance mode menu screen (step 012IWS457). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets the maintenance mode flag (step 012IWS458).

As described above, by executing the processes of steps 012IWS452 to S458, in this example, maintenance is performed based on the fact that the push button 31B is pressed during the setting confirmation when the power is turned on to the game machine. The mode is controlled and the maintenance mode menu screen is displayed.

If the push button 31B is not turned on (N in step 012IWS456), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the recovery command has been received (step 012IWS459). If the command at the time of restoration is received, the second effect control CPU012IW120b controls to end the display of the setting confirmation display in the image display device 5 (step 012IWS460). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b resets the setting confirmation flag (step 012IWS461). That is, the fact that the recovery command is received during the setting confirmation means that the setting key 012IW051 is turned off by the player and the setting confirmation process is completed (see N in step 012IWS043 and step 012IWS049). Controls to end the display of the confirmation display.

If the maintenance mode flag is set (Y in step 012IWS451), the second effect control CPU012IW120b confirms whether or not it has detected that the maintenance history selection operation has been performed by the player (step 012IWS462). .. For example, the second effect control CPU012IW120b confirms whether or not it has detected that the maintenance history selection operation has been performed based on the detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B. If it is detected that the maintenance history selection operation has been performed, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b extracts all the log information from the log areas provided in the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14 (step). 012IWS463). Strictly speaking, in step 012IWS463, only the log information for the game store is read, and the log information for the game machine maker is not read. Then, the second effect control CPU012IW120b controls the image display device 5 to display the maintenance history screen including the extracted log information as history information (step 012IWS464).

If the maintenance history selection operation is not detected (N in step 012IWS462), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not it has detected that the player has performed the setting change / confirmation history selection operation (N). Step 012IWS465). For example, the second effect control CPU012IW120b confirms whether or not it has been detected that the setting change / confirmation history selection operation has been performed based on the detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B. If it is detected that the setting change / confirmation history selection operation has been performed, the second effect control CPU012IW120b has log information stored in the log area provided in the backup data memory 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14. Of these, all the log information of setting change and setting confirmation is extracted (step 012IWS466). Then, the second effect control CPU012IW120b controls the image display device 5 to display the setting change / confirmation history screen including the extracted setting change and setting confirmation log information as history information (step 012IWS467).

If it is not detected that the setting change / confirmation history selection operation has been performed (N in step 012IWS465), the second effect control CPU012IW120b confirms whether or not the recovery command has been received (step 012IWS468). .. If the recovery command is received, the second effect control CPU012IW120b controls to erase the maintenance mode menu screen, maintenance history screen, and setting change / confirmation history screen in the image display device 5 (step 012IWS469). .. Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b resets the flag during the maintenance mode (step 012IWS470). That is, the fact that the recovery command is received during the setting confirmation means that the setting key 012IW051 is turned off by the player and the setting confirmation process is completed (see N in step 012IWS043 and step 012IWS049). Controls to end the mode.

In this example, it is determined that the setting key 012IW051 is turned off based on the reception of the recovery command, and the maintenance mode is terminated, but the mode is not limited to such a mode. For example, in this example, when the setting key 012IW051 is turned off, the setting value command is also transmitted (see step 012IWS047). Therefore, it is determined that the setting key 012IW051 is turned off based on the reception of the setting value command, and the maintenance mode is used. May be configured to terminate.

(Setting change time recording process)
FIG. 8-38 is a flowchart showing the setting change time recording process (step 012IWS212). In the setting change time recording process, the second effect control CPU012IW120b first confirms whether or not the setting change command has been received (step 012IWS801). If the setting change command is received, the second effect control CPU012IW120b inputs the date and time information from the real-time clock 012IW126, and uses the input date and time information as the setting change start date and time in the backup data memory 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14. Log information is stored in the provided log area (step 012IWS802). Further, the second effect control CPU012IW120b sets a setting change command reception flag indicating that the setting change command has been received (step 012IWS803).

If the setting change command has not been received (N in step 012IWS801), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the setting confirmation command has been received (step 012IWS804). If the setting confirmation command is received, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b inputs the date and time information from the real-time clock 012IW126, and uses the input date and time information as the setting confirmation start date and time in the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14. Log information is stored in the provided log area (step 012IWS805). Further, the second effect control CPU012IW120b sets a setting confirmation command reception flag indicating that the setting confirmation command has been received (step 012IWS806).

If the setting confirmation command has not been received (N in step 012IWS804), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the initialization designation command has been received (step 012IWS807). If the initialization designation command is received, the second effect control CPU012IW120b confirms whether or not the setting change command reception flag is set (step 012IWS808). If the setting change command reception flag is not set (that is, when the setting change process is not executed and only the initialization process is executed), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b receives the date and time information from the real-time clock 012IW126. Is input, and the input date and time information is used as the RAM clear date and time, and the log information is stored in the log area provided in the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14 (step 012IWS809).

On the other hand, if the setting change command reception flag is not set (Y in step 012IWS808), that is, when both the setting change processing and the initialization processing are executed, the second effect control CPU012IW120b stores the setting value of the RAM012IW122b. Read the current set value stored in the area (step 012IWS810). In this example, when the setting change process is executed, the setting value command is transmitted before the initialization specification command (see steps 012IWS047 and S052), so that the setting value storage area of RAM012IW122b is the latest. The setting value of is supposed to be stored. Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b inputs the date and time information from the real-time clock 012IW126, associates the input date and time information with the read setting value, and sets the input date and time information as the setting change end date and time. Log information is stored in the log area provided in (step 012IWS811). The second effect control CPU012IW120b resets the set setting change command reception flag.

In this example, when the processing of steps 012IWS810 and S811 is executed, the initialization processing should also be executed when the setting change processing is executed, but only the log information related to the setting change is recorded. However, by omitting the recording of the log information related to the RAM clear, it is possible to prevent the log information from being unnecessarily recorded.

If the initialization command has not been received (N in step 012IWS807), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the recovery command has been received (step 012IWS812). If the recovery command is received, the second effect control CPU012IW120b confirms whether or not the setting confirmation command reception flag is set (step 012IWS813). If the setting confirmation command reception flag is not set (that is, if the setting confirmation process is not executed and only the recovery process is executed), the process ends as it is.

On the other hand, if the setting confirmation command reception flag is not set (Y in step 012IWS813), that is, when both the setting confirmation process and the recovery process are executed, the second effect control CPU012IW120b is the set value storage area of the RAM012IW122b. Read the current setting value stored in (step 012IWS814). Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b inputs the date and time information from the real-time clock 012IW126, associates the input date and time information with the read setting value, and uses the input date and time information as the setting confirmation end date and time as the backup data memory 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14. Log information is stored in the log area provided in (step 012IWS815). The second effect control CPU012IW120b resets the set setting confirmation command reception flag.

In this example, when the setting confirmation process is not executed and only the recovery process is executed, the case where the log information is not recorded is shown, but the log information may be recorded. In this case, for example, when N in step 012IWS813, date and time information is input from the real-time clock 012IW126, and the input date and time information is used as the recovery date and time to log to the log area provided in the backup data memory 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14. It may be configured to store information.

(Current time setting process)
FIG. 8-39 is a flowchart showing the current time setting process (step 012IWS213). In the current time setting process, the second effect control CPU012IW120b first confirms whether or not the maintenance mode flag is set (step 012IWS821). If the maintenance mode flag is set (that is, if the maintenance mode is in progress), whether or not the current time setting flag indicating that the current time is being set is set in the second effect control CPU012IW120b. (Step 012IWS822).

If the current time setting flag is not set, the second effect control CPU012IW120b confirms whether or not it has been detected that the player has performed the current time setting selection operation (step 012IWS823). For example, the second effect control CPU012IW120b confirms whether or not it has detected that the current time setting selection operation has been performed based on the detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B. If it is detected that the current time setting selection operation has been performed, the second effect control CPU012IW120b controls the image display device 5 to start displaying the current time setting screen (step 012IWS824). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets the flag during the current time setting (step 012IWS825).

If the current time setting flag is set (Y in step 012IWS822), the waiting flag indicating that the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is waiting for recording the log information of the current time setting is set. It is confirmed whether or not (step 012IWS826). If the waiting flag is not set, the second effect control CPU012IW120b confirms whether or not the time signal has been received from the first effect control CPU012IW120a (step 012IWS827).

In this example, as described above, the detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B are first input to the first effect control CPU012IW120a, so that the player operates the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. When the current time setting information is input, a signal capable of specifying the input current time setting information is sequentially transmitted from the first effect control CPU012IW120a to the second effect control CPU012IW120b. In this case, in this example, the hour signal indicating the hour, the minute signal indicating the minute, the second signal indicating the second, the year signal indicating the year, the month signal indicating the month, the day signal indicating the day, and the day of the week are used. It is transmitted in the order of the indicated day of the week signals. Further, in this example, as described above, the first effect control CPU012IW120a generates a timer interrupt every 10 ms, and these signals are transmitted every 10 ms.

If the time signal is received (Y in step 012IWS827), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets the time information of the real-time clock 012IW126 when it is indicated by the received time signal (step 012IWS828). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets a value corresponding to 500 ms in the waiting timer for measuring the waiting period until the log information of the current time setting is recorded (step 012IWS829). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets the standby flag (step 012IWS830).

If the waiting flag is set (Y in step 012IWS826), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the waiting timer has timed out (step 012IWS831). If the standby timer has not timed out, has the second effect control CPU012IW120b received any of the minute signal, the second signal, the year signal, the month signal, the day signal, and the day of the week signal from the first effect control CPU012IW120a? It is confirmed whether or not (step 012IWS832).

If any signal is received (Y in step 012IWS832), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets the information of the real-time clock 012IW126 to the information indicated by the received signal (step 012IWS833). For example, when a minute signal is received, the minute information of the real-time clock 012IW126 is set to the minute indicated by the received minute signal. Further, for example, when a second signal is received, the second information of the real-time clock 012IW126 is set to the seconds indicated by the received second signal. Further, for example, when the year signal is received, the year information of the real-time clock 012IW126 is set to the year indicated by the received year signal. Further, for example, when a moon signal is received, the month information of the real-time clock 012IW126 is set to the month indicated by the received moon signal. Further, for example, when the day signal is received, the day information of the real-time clock 012IW126 is set to the day indicated by the received day signal. Further, for example, when the day of the week signal is received, the day of the week information of the real-time clock 012IW126 is set to the day of the week indicated by the received day of the week signal.

If the standby timer has timed out (Y in step 012IWS831), that is, if 500 ms has elapsed since the first time signal was received, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b will perform the hour, minute, and hour from the real-time clock 012IW126. Read the date and time information for seconds, year, month, day, and day of the week (step 012IWS834). Then, the second effect control CPU012IW120b stores the read date and time information as the time setting date and time in the log area provided in the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14 (step 012IWS835). Further, the second effect control CPU012IW120b resets the current time setting flag and the standby flag (step 012IWS836).

FIG. 8-40 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the setting timing of the current time. When the player operates the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B to set the current time, the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B is first input to the first effect control CPU012IW120a. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-40, the hour signal, the minute signal, the second signal, the year signal, the month signal, the day signal, and the day of the week signal are used for the first effect control every 10 ms according to the setting operation by the player. The signals are sequentially transmitted from the CPU012IW120a to the second effect control CPU012IW120b.

Upon receiving these signals, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b immediately sets the information of the real-time clock 012IW126 based on the received signals, as shown in FIG. 8-40. As shown in FIG. 8-40, when the time signal is received, the time information of the real-time clock 012IW126 is immediately set based on the received time signal. Further, when the minute signal is received 10 ms later, the minute information of the real-time clock 012IW126 is immediately set based on the received minute signal. When the second signal is received 10 ms later, the second information of the real-time clock 012IW126 is immediately set based on the received second signal. When the year signal is received 10 ms later, the year information of the real-time clock 012IW126 is immediately set based on the received year signal. When the moon signal is received 10 ms later, the month information of the real-time clock 012IW126 is immediately set based on the received moon signal. When the day signal is received 10 ms later, the day information of the real-time clock 012IW126 is immediately set based on the received day signal. Further, when the day of the week signal is received 10 ms later, the day of the week information of the real-time clock 012IW126 is immediately set based on the received day of the week signal.

On the other hand, the log information of the time setting date and time is not recorded immediately, the waiting timer is set when the first hour signal is received, the waiting timer times out, and as shown in FIG. 8-40, the hour After waiting for 500 ms to elapse after receiving the signal, the date and time information from the real-time clock 012IW126 is read and recorded in the log information as the time setting date and time.

If the player further sets the current time before 500 ms has elapsed after receiving the hour signal, another hour signal, minute signal, second signal, or the like may occur before 500 ms has elapsed. The information of the real-time clock 012IW126 may be set by receiving the year signal, the month signal, the day signal, and the day signal, but in this example, the information of the real-time clock 012IW126 is set at any time for each reception of these signals. Therefore, the log information of the time setting date and time is recorded based on the date and time information of the real-time clock 012IW126 set based on the last received signal.

If you record as log information each time you receive an hour signal, minute signal, second signal, year signal, month signal, day signal, and day signal that are transmitted individually, the log information for the current time setting becomes more redundant than necessary. However, in this example, as shown in FIG. 8-40, it is configured to wait until all the signals related to the time setting are received before recording the log information of the time setting date and time. It prevents it from becoming redundant.

In this example, in addition to the second effect control CPU012IW120b, a first effect control CPU012IW120a to which the detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B are temporarily input is provided. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, an input circuit for inputting detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and push sensor 35B is provided, and hour signals, minute signals, second signals, year signals, month signals, day signals, and day signals are sequentially output from the input circuits. It may be configured to be transmitted to the second effect control CPU 012IW120b. Any signal may be configured so as to be sequentially transmitted to the second effect control CPU012IW120b in some form such as a signal corresponding to the operation.

Further, in this example, the case where the real-time clock 012IW126 is mounted on the second effect control board 012IW12b side is shown, but the real-time clock is mounted on the first effect control board 012IW12a side so as to be operated by the player. Correspondingly, the first effect control CPU012IW120a may be configured to update the date and time information of the real-time clock at any time. Then, the first effect control CPU012IW120a transmits the updated real-time clock date and time information to the second effect control CPU012IW120b, and the second effect control CPU012IW120b updates the counter and the like based on the received date and time information. May be configured to manage.

(Electricity interruption date and time recording processing)
FIG. 8-41 is a flowchart showing the power interruption date and time recording process (step 012IWS214). In the power interruption date / time recording process, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b first confirms whether or not the temporary storage enable flag indicating that the temporary storage of the date / time information from the real-time clock 012IW126 is permitted is set (step 012IWS841). ). If the temporary storage enable flag is set, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the temporary storage timer for measuring the time for temporarily storing the date and time information from the real-time clock 012IW126 has timed out ( Step 012IWS842). If the temporary storage timer has timed out, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b reads the date and time information from the real-time clock 012IW126, and stores the read date and time information in the temporary area provided in the RAM012IW122b (step 012IWS843). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets a value corresponding to 100 ms in the temporary storage timer (step 012IWS844).

The date and time information is stored in the temporary area of RAM012IW122b every 100 ms, but when the previous date and time information is stored in the temporary area, new date and time information is temporarily overwritten every 100 ms. It shall be stored in the area.

If the temporary storage flag is not set (N in step 012IWS841), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not it has received the initialization designation command or the recovery command (step 012IWS845). If the initialization specification command or the recovery command is received, the second effect control CPU012IW120b will be in the log area provided in the backup data memory 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14 with the log information of the previous power-on date and time. Is memorized (step 012IWS846). If the log information of the previous power-on date and time is not stored (N in step 012IWS846), the process proceeds to step 012IWS849. If the log information of the previous power-on date and time is stored (Y in step 012IWS846), the second effect control CPU012IW120b reads the date and time information stored in the temporary area of the RAM012IW122b, and cuts off the read date and time information. Log information is stored in the log area provided in the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14 as the date and time (step 012IWS847). Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS849.

If neither the initialization specification command nor the recovery command is received (N in step 012IWS845), the second effect control CPU012IW120b is powered on by other commands (however, the setting confirmation command and the setting change command are turned on). It is confirmed whether or not the command (excluding the command sometimes transmitted) has been received (step 012IWS848). If other commands are received, for example, if a fluctuation pattern command, a display result specification command, or the like is received, the process proceeds to step 012IWS849.

In step 012IWS849, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets the temporary storage enable flag (step 012IWS849). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets a value corresponding to 100 ms in the temporary storage timer (step 012IWS844).

When the temporary storage flag is set in step 012IWS849, the temporary storage flag is maintained until the power supply to the game machine is stopped or the system reset of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b occurs. Then, when the effect control main process shown in FIG. 8-18 is started due to the power-on of the game machine, the system reset, or the like, the process is reset by the initialization process of step 012IWS201.

FIG. 8-42 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the recording timing of the log information of the power failure date and time. As shown in FIG. 8-42, when the second effect control CPU012IW120b is running, the second effect control CPU012IW120b is determined to be Y in step 012IWS841 of the power interruption date / time recording process, and is determined to be Y in step 012IWS842-S844. By executing the above process, date and time information is temporarily stored in the temporary area of RAM012IW122b every 100 ms.

Next, when the power supply to the game machine is stopped or the system reset of the second effect control CPU012IW120b occurs, the initialization process (see step 012IWS201) is executed and the temporary storage enable flag is reset, the second effect control is performed. Even if the CPU 012IW120b for CPU 012IW120b returns to the activated state, it is determined to be N in step 012IWS841 of the power failure date / time recording process, the date / time information is not temporarily stored every 100 ms, and is finally stored in the temporary area of RAM012IW122b. Date and time information is maintained.

If the power supply to the game machine is stopped and then the power supply to the game machine is started, at least the initialization designation command or the recovery command should be received. Therefore, in this example, as shown in FIG. 8-42 (1), the date and time information maintained in the temporary area is read and the read date and time on condition that the initialization designation command or the recovery command is received. The log information is stored in the log area provided in the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14 with the information as the power failure date and time (see Y in step 012IWS845 and step 012IWS847). After that, the temporary storage enable flag is set, and the temporary storage of the date and time information every 100 ms is restarted (see steps 012 IWS849 and S850). However, in this example, the log information of the power-on date and time is also recorded (see step 012IWS203), but when the log information of the power-on date and time before the occurrence of the power failure is not recorded. Since there is a possibility that some kind of abnormality has occurred, in this case, the log information of the power failure date and time is not recorded (see N in step 012IWS846).

On the other hand, if the system reset of the second effect control CPU012IW120b occurs, the power supply of the game machine itself is not stopped, and the initialization designation command, the recovery command, etc. from the game control microcomputer 100, etc. No power-on command is sent. Therefore, in this example, as shown in FIG. 8-42 (2), if the initialization specification command or the recovery command is not received, it is determined that the power failure of the game machine itself has not occurred. Then, the date and time information maintained in the temporary area is controlled as the power failure date and time so that the log information is not recorded. In this case, as shown in FIG. 8-42 (2), for example, based on the reception of other commands (excluding commands transmitted when the power is turned on, such as a setting confirmation command and a setting change command), for example. The temporary storage enable flag is set based on the reception of the variation pattern command, the display result specification command, and the like, and the temporary storage of the date and time information every 100 ms is restarted (see steps 012IWS849 and S850).

If the log information of the power failure date and time is recorded only based on the detection of the stop on the second effect control CPU012IW120b side, a system reset of the second effect control CPU012IW120b occurs (second effect control CPU012IW120b). (When the power supply of the second effect control CPU012IW120b is temporarily stopped due to a system reset of the effect control CPU012IW120b), the log information of the power failure date and time is also recorded, and the game There is a possibility that the log information of the power failure date and time will be recorded even though the power failure of the machine itself has not occurred. Therefore, in this example, as shown in FIG. 8-42, the date and time when the second effect control CPU012IW120b is stopped is temporarily stored as a temporary power failure date and time, and an initialization specification command, a recovery command, etc. It is configured to officially record the log information of the power failure date and time on the condition that the command at the time of power-on is received, so that such a situation does not occur.

In this example, on the condition that the initialization specification command or the recovery command is received, it is determined that the game machine itself has been disconnected, and the date and time of the interruption is recorded in the log information. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, it may be configured to record the power failure date and time in the log information based on the reception of another command transmitted when the power is turned on, such as a setting confirmation command or a setting change command. Further, in the process of step 099IWS001 of the effect control main process, it may be determined that the power failure of the game machine itself has occurred based on the power supply disconnection signal input from the power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127.

Next, a specific example of the display screen in the maintenance mode will be described. 8-45 to 8-48 are explanatory views for explaining a specific example of the display screen in the maintenance mode. In addition, in FIG. 8-45 to FIG. 8-48, the display screens are changed in the order of (A), (B), (C) ....

First, a specific example of the display screen when the maintenance history selection operation is performed during the maintenance mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-45 and 8-46. When the setting confirmation command is received when the power supply to the game machine is started, a character display such as "setting is being confirmed" is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 8-45 (A). , The setting confirmation display is started (see steps 012IWS453 to S455). Further, as shown in FIG. 8-45 (A), when the setting confirmation display is being displayed, a character display such as "press the push button to shift to the maintenance mode" is displayed on the image display device 5. Is displayed, and a display prompting the operation to shift to the maintenance mode is displayed.

Next, when the player presses the push button 31B, the maintenance mode menu screen is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 8-45 (B), and the mode shifts to the maintenance mode (see steps 012IWS456 to S458). As shown in FIG. 8-45 (B), the maintenance mode menu screen displays the options of "maintenance history", "setting change / confirmation history", and "current time setting", and the current time is displayed. It is displayed.

When the option 012IW106 of the “maintenance history” is selected, the image display device 5 switches to the display of the maintenance history screen as shown in FIG. 8-45 (C). As shown in FIG. 8-45 (C), on the maintenance history screen, the date and time and the log contents are displayed in association with each other, and the latest log information is displayed in order so as to be higher. In the example shown in FIG. 8-45 (C), an illegal winning error indicating that an illegal winning is detected in a winning opening such as the first major winning opening or the second major winning opening, the first count switch 012IW023a or the second count Log information of a switch abnormality error indicating that an abnormality of various switches such as the switch 012IW023b has been detected, a prize ball error indicating that an abnormality of a prize ball has been detected, and a magnet error indicating that an abnormal magnetism has been detected is displayed. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 8-45 (C), log information indicating that the probability change failure has been detected is also displayed (see steps 012IWS958 to S960).

Further, when there are a plurality of pages of the maintenance history screen, when the selection operation of the next page is performed, the process shifts to the second page of the maintenance history screen as shown in FIG. 8-45 (D). In the example shown in FIG. 8-45 (D), log information of the start of setting change and the end of setting change (see step 012IWS802, S811), and log information of power failure date and time and power on date and time are displayed (step). 012IWS203, S847). Further, in the example shown in FIG. 8-45 (D), the log information of the left-handed notification and the full tank notification is also displayed (see steps 012IWS117 and S145).

If there is another page, selecting the next page will move to the third page of the maintenance history screen, as shown in FIG. 8-46 (E), and then the next page will be displayed. When the selection operation is performed, the process shifts to the fourth page of the maintenance history screen as shown in FIG. 8-46 (F). In the example shown in FIG. 8-46 (E), the log information of the start of the setting confirmation and the end of the setting confirmation is displayed (see steps 012IWS805 and S815), and the current time is set during the maintenance mode during the setting confirmation. Log information to that effect is also displayed (see step 012IWS835).

In this example, when the current time is set, the date and time information after the setting is read and the log information is recorded. Therefore, the date and time may be inconsistent before and after the current time is set. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 8-46 (E), the setting confirmation was started at 09:36:28 on Wednesday, March 21, 2018, whereas the current time was set. It is set to 09:36:16 on Wednesday, March 21, 2018, which is earlier than the start of setting confirmation. As described above, in this example, even if the date and time do not match before and after the current time setting, the log information is recorded in the log area in the order in which the log information is generated, as shown in FIGS. 8-46 (E). The log information is displayed in the order in which the log information was generated.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 8-46 (F), log information of an RWM abnormality error (see steps 012IWS017 to S020) indicating that some RAM abnormality has occurred when the power is turned on to the game machine is displayed. Then, since the RWM abnormality error occurred, the game clerk once stopped the power supply of the game machine, then turned on the power again while turning on the clear switch, and as shown in FIG. 8-46 (E), the initial stage. Log information indicating that the conversion process has been executed is also displayed (see step IWS809).

Next, a specific example of the display screen when the setting change / confirmation history selection operation is performed during the maintenance mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-47. While the setting confirmation display shown in FIG. 8-47 (A) is being displayed, the player presses the push button 31B to display the maintenance mode menu screen shown in FIG. 8-47 (B), and the maintenance mode menu screen is displayed. It is assumed that the option 012IW107 of "setting change / confirmation history" is selected and operated during the display.

When the option 012IW107 of the "setting change / confirmation history" is selected, the image display device 5 switches to the display of the setting change / confirmation history screen as shown in FIG. 8-47 (C). As shown in FIG. 8-47 (C), on the setting change / confirmation history screen, the date and time, whether the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed, and the changed setting value or the confirmed setting value are displayed in association with each other. And the latest log information is displayed in order so that it is ranked higher.

Next, a specific example of the display screen when the selection operation of the current time setting is performed during the maintenance mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-48. While the setting confirmation display shown in FIG. 8-48 (A) is being displayed, the player presses the push button 31B to display the maintenance mode menu screen shown in FIG. 8-48 (B), and the maintenance mode menu screen is displayed. It is assumed that the option 012IW108 of the "current time setting" is selected and operated during the display.

When the option 012IW108 of the “current time setting” is selected, the image display device 5 switches to the display of the current time setting screen as shown in FIG. 8-48 (C). As shown in FIGS. 8-48 (C) and 8-48 (D), the year, month, day, day of the week, hour, minute, or second item is selected by tilting the stick controller 31A to the left or right, and the stick is selected. A number for each item is selected by tilting the controller 31A back and forth. For example, in the state shown in FIG. 8-48 (C), when it is desired to change the time from 16 to 15, the stick controller 31A is tilted four times to the right to move to the time item, and the stick controller 31A is moved. It suffices to change from "16" to "15" by tilting once in the forward direction (toward the player). Then, as shown in FIG. 8-48 (D), when the player presses the push button 31B, the current date and time is set to the date and time currently displayed.

In the feature unit 099IW, the accessory effect and the light guide plate effect are executed in such a manner that it is difficult to recognize the suggestion effect during the big hit. For example, an error displayed on the image display device 9 when an error occurs. The display is also executed in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the suggestion effect during the big hit. That is, the error display is displayed with priority over the jackpot suggestion effect (or pre-game suggestion effect or in-game suggestion effect). With such a configuration, the occurrence of an error can be appropriately notified. Further, when a predetermined effect (for example, a fanfare effect having a specific effect mode) that can be executed at the same time as the jackpot suggestion effect is provided, and the predetermined effect is a mode in which it is difficult to recognize the jackpot suggestion effect. May give priority to the suggestion effect during the big hit. Specifically, when the image displayed on the image display device 5 by the predetermined effect is in a mode in which it is difficult to recognize the image displayed by the jackpot suggestion effect, it is displayed by the jackpot suggestion effect. The image may be displayed preferentially. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize the suggestion effect during the big hit.

Further, in the feature unit 099IW, the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, but the decorative symbol is variably displayed by driving a drum-shaped movable body having the decorative symbol arranged on the surface. It may be applied (that is, it may be applied to a so-called drum type game machine). Alternatively, the decorative design may be variably displayed by driving a belt-shaped movable body having a decorative design arranged on the surface (that is, it may be applied to a so-called belt reel type game machine). In such a drum-type or belt-reel-type game machine, at the start of the first fluctuation after changing the setting, the drum-shaped or belt-shaped movable body performs a characteristic operation (or characteristic) different from the normal operation. Operation may occur). Therefore, in the initial fluctuation after the setting change, the light guide plate effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize the movable body at the start of the fluctuation may be executed (or the rate of execution may be increased). With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the setting has been changed.

Further, in this feature unit 099IW, the accessory effect and the light guide plate effect are configured so as to reduce the visibility of the suggestion effect during the big hit, but instead of or in addition to such a configuration, For example, the visibility of the initial appearance effect, the pre-game suggestion effect, and the in-game suggestion effect may be reduced by executing the accessory effect or the light guide plate effect. Further, in this case as well, the visibility may be reduced at a high rate when an undesired suggestion is given to the player. For example, when an even initial number is displayed, when the pre-game suggestion effect of the first effect mode is executed, or when the in-game suggestion effect of the first effect mode is executed, the visibility of these is reduced. It is also possible to increase the ratio of executing the even-numbered effect in which the movable member operates and the light guide plate effect in which characters and pictures are displayed by the light guide plate. Further, the effect is not limited to the accessory effect and the light guide plate effect, and includes a control for outputting a predetermined sound, a control for vibrating a movable member and a stick controller 31A, and a control for emitting a decorative light emitting body such as a decorative LED in a predetermined mode. By performing the above, the player's attention may be directed to others to reduce (or make it difficult to notice) the visibility of the initial roll effect, the pre-game suggestion effect, and the in-game suggestion effect.

Further, in addition to the setting suggestion effect of the feature unit 099IW, a simultaneous effect executed based on the measurement result (measurement result using the measurement timer set at the time of turning on the power and the real-time clock 012IW126) is executed in a specific mode. This may suggest a setting.

In addition, a setting suggestion effect (for example, a predetermined image) suggesting a setting according to the number of times that the variable display is continuously executed without the hold memory becoming 0 or the number of times a start prize that exceeds the upper limit hold memory number occurs. Display control, output control of a predetermined sound, light emission control of a predetermined lamp, etc.) may be executed.

Further, based on the detection of the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B in the predetermined operation valid period, the setting suggestion effect suggesting the setting (for example, the display control of the predetermined image, the output control of the predetermined sound, the predetermined sound). (Controlling the light emission of the lamp, etc.) may be executed.

Although the feature portion 099IW has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to that shown in this example, and the present invention may be changed or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. included.

(Modification example 1)
For example, the feature unit 099IW illustrates a form in which the security cover 012IW500A is fixed to the outer frame 012IW001a, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the security cover is provided on the game machine frame 012IW003 side. May be good. Specifically, as a modification 1, as shown in FIGS. 8-49 (A) and 8-49 (B), a security cover 012IW500B composed of a short piece 012IW500Ba and a long piece 012IW500Bb is attached to, for example, a substrate case 012IW201. The right end of the long piece 012IW500Bb is provided so as to be slidable in the left-right direction between the covering position covering the right end of the substrate case 012IW201 including the setting key 012IW051 and the uncovering position on the right side of the covering position.

On the other hand, when the game machine frame 012IW003 is opened, the security cover 012IW500B is slid to the right side with respect to the board case 012IW201, and is set via the through hole 012IW500Bc formed on the left side of the long piece 012IW500Bb. The key 012IW051 may be operable. That is, in the present modification 1, when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed, the security cover 012IW500B (long piece 012IW500Bb) is covered with the setting key 012IW051 and the sliding movement in the left-right direction with respect to the substrate case 012IW201 is performed. By being regulated, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is maintained in the regulated state. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is open, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is released by sliding the security cover 012IW500B to the right with respect to the board case 012IW201 to release the state in which the setting key 012IW051 is covered. It can be released from the regulated state (it can be changed to the allowable state).

More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-49 (A) and 8-49 (B), when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed, the protruding dimension of the security cover 012IW500B from the board case 012IW201 is length L1. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is opened, the protruding dimension of the security cover 012IW500B from the board case 012IW201 is extended to the length L2 by sliding the security cover 012IW500B with respect to the board case 012IW201. (L2> L1).

That is, as shown in FIG. 8-50 (A), when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is rotated around a predetermined rotation axis and opened, the security cover 012IW500B has a protruding dimension from the substrate case 012IW201. By sliding the board case 012IW201 to the length L2 (making the pachinko game machine 1 an allowable state), a clerk at the game hall or the like operates the setting key 012IW051 to set the pachinko game machine 1. Can be changed. On the other hand, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in an allowable state, as shown in FIG. 8-50 (B), the security cover 012IW500B is attached to the board case 012IW201 until the protruding dimension from the board case 012IW201 becomes the length L1. On the other hand, if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not slid to move (unless the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed to the regulated state), the security cover 012IW500B comes into contact with the front end of the outer frame 012IW001a, making it impossible to close the gaming machine frame 012IW003. It has become.

Therefore, in the present modification 1, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine frame 012IW003 from being closed while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the allowable state. Therefore, the security cover 012IW500B covers the setting key 012IW051. It is possible to prevent forgetting to do so, that is, closing the gaming machine frame 012IW003 without restricting the operation of the operation unit, and improving security.

In the state where the game machine frame 012IW003 is closed, the front end portion of the short piece 012IW500Ba is arranged between the outer frame 012IW001a and the game machine frame 012IW003, so that the movement from the covering position to the left-right direction is restricted. However, the security cover 012IW500B may be moved in the left-right direction within a range in which the state of covering the setting key 012IW051 is maintained by the security cover 012IW500B.

(Modification 2)
Further, as a form in which the security cover is provided on the game machine frame 012IW003 side, as shown in FIGS. 8-51 (A) and 8-51 (B) as a modification 2, the left end portion of the security cover 012IW500C is provided on the game machine. Between the covering position that covers the right side of the substrate case 012IW201 including the setting key 012IW051 and the uncovering position that is rotated from the covering position, centering on the vertical axis 012IW500Cd provided on the back side of the frame 012IW003. It may be rotatably supported by. In such a case, when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed, the front end portion of the short piece 012IW500Ca is locked to the locking portion 012IW500Cc provided on the right side of the outer frame 012IW001a, and the long piece 012IW500Cb sets the setting key 012IW051 on the back side. The rotation from the covered state to the back side may be restricted.

Then, when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is opened, the state in which the setting key 012IW051 is covered is released by rotating the security cover 012IW500C with respect to the substrate case 012IW201 around the pivot 012IW500Cd (counterclockwise in a plan view). It should be possible to operate it. That is, in the present modification 2, when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed, the pachinko gaming machine is restricted from rotating while the security cover 012IW500C (long piece 012IW500Cb) covers the setting key 012IW051. 1 is maintained in the regulated state. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is open, the security cover 012IW500C is rotated around the pivot 012IW500Cd (counterclockwise in a plan view) with respect to the board case 012IW201 to release the state of covering the setting key 012IW051. By doing so, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be brought into a state in which it can be released from the regulated state (it can be changed to the allowable state).

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-52 (A), the security cover 012IW500C in the second modification is rotated around the pivot 012IW500Cd (the pachinko gaming machine 1 is allowed), so that the pachinko game machine 1 is in an allowable state. The set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by a clerk or the like operating the setting key 012IW051. On the other hand, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the allowable state, as shown in FIG. 8-52 (B), the security cover 012IW500C is rotated clockwise in a plan view and the setting key is set by the security cover 012IW500C. If the 012IW051 is not covered (unless the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed to the regulated state), the security cover 012IW500C will come into contact with the front end of the outer frame 012IW001a, making it impossible to close the gaming machine frame 012IW003. It has become.

Therefore, in the present modification 2, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine frame 012IW003 from being closed while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the allowable state. Therefore, the security cover 012IW500C covers the setting key 012IW051. It is possible to prevent forgetting to do so, that is, closing the gaming machine frame 012IW003 without restricting the operation of the operation unit, and improving security.

(Modification 3)
Further, in the feature unit 099IW, a mode in which the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by opening the gaming machine frame 012IW003 has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the glass door frame is not limited thereto. The set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be changed by opening 012IW003a. When the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by opening the glass door frame 012IW003a in this way, it is shown in FIGS. 8-53 (A) to 8-53 (C) as a modification 3. As described above, the through-hole 012IW003b may be formed in the lower part of the gaming machine frame 012IW003 so that the setting key 012IW051 can be operated through the through-hole 012IW003b. In this case, the mounting surface of the IC or the like on the main board 11 is arranged toward the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the setting key 012IW051 is arranged on the surface of the main board 11 opposite to the mounting surface. ..

When the setting key 012IW051 can be operated via the through port 012IW003b in this way, a door body 012IW003c capable of opening and closing the through port 012IW003b is provided, and when the door body 012IW003c is closed, the setting key 012IW051 is used. The operation may be regulated. As shown in FIGS. 8-53 (B) and 8-53 (C), when the door body 012IW003c is provided on the front side of the gaming machine frame 012IW003, the door body is closed by closing the glass door frame 012IW003a. Since the 012IW003c is sandwiched between the glass door frame 012IW003a and the game machine frame 012IW003 so that it can be opened and closed, it is possible to strongly prevent the setting key 012IW051 from being illegally operated when the glass door frame 012IW003a is closed. Can be done and security can be improved.

(Modification example 4)
Further, the information that can be recorded as the log information is not limited to the information shown by the feature unit 099IW, and various log information can be recorded. FIG. 8-54 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the maintenance history screen in the modified example 4. In the fourth modification, a case is shown in which information indicating unsuccessful setting suggestion or “unsuccessful point grant” is recorded as log information and configured to be displayable on the maintenance history screen. The log information 012IW109a of "setting suggestion failure" is a reason such as the player does not perform an operation or the operation means fails even though the execution condition of the setting value suggestion effect suggesting the current setting value is satisfied. This is log information indicating that the set value suggestion effect is not executed or the set value suggestion effect with low suggestion accuracy is executed. Further, the log information 012IW109b of "point grant failure" is not operated by the player even though the condition for granting points necessary for customizing the display screen of the image display device 5 and acquiring the image content is satisfied. This is log information indicating that points have not been awarded due to reasons such as a failure of the operating means. In this way, it may be configured so that the profit related to the production or the profit related to the content can be given in some form and the log information thereof is recorded.

(Modification 5)
Further, the information that can be recorded as the log information is not limited to the information shown by the feature unit 099IW, and various log information can be recorded. FIG. 8-55 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the maintenance history screen in the modified example 5. In the fifth modification, the log information 099IW109 indicating that the system reset of the second effect control CPU012IW120b has occurred is configured to be displayable on the maintenance history screen. In the configuration of the feature unit 099IW, the log information indicating that the system reset of the second effect control CPU012IW120b has occurred is stored only in the second log area, and is not displayed as the history information on the maintenance history screen. , This log information is stored in both the first log area and the second log area, and in addition to the log information recorded in the first log area, the log information recorded in the second log area. This can be realized by configuring a part of (for example, log information including the system reset date and time) to be displayed as history information on the maintenance history screen in the maintenance mode.

Further, for example, in a game machine provided with a distribution device for alternately distributing game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, five) is continuously connected to one of the starting winning openings. ), Based on the detection, it may be detected as a start port unit abnormality error, recorded in the log information, and displayed on the maintenance history screen. Further, for example, a vibration error indicating that an abnormal vibration in a game machine has been detected or a radio wave error indicating that an abnormal radio wave has been detected may be recorded as log information and displayed on the maintenance history screen. Often, various forms of log information are conceivable.

As described above, according to the feature unit 099IW, it is mounted on a power supply means (for example, a power supply board) and a first control means (for example, a main board 11) that receives power from the power supply means for control. The game control microcomputer 100) and the second control means (for example, the second effect control board 012IW12b mounted on the second effect control board 012IW12b) that receives power from the power supply means and performs control based on the instruction information from the first control means. The effect control CPU012IW120b) and the monitoring means (for example, the power supply supplied to the second effect control board 012IW12b) that monitors the power supply to the second control means and notifies the second control means, and the power supply voltage is increased. When the value is less than a predetermined value (for example, + 8V), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is provided with a power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127) that outputs a power supply cutoff signal, and the second control means is a monitoring means at the start of control. (For example, when a power cutoff signal is input from the power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127 at the start of control, the start of control is waited until the input of the power cutoff signal is stopped. The part where the second effect control CPU012IW120b executes the processing of steps 099IWS001 and 099IWS002. On the other hand, when the power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127 does not input the power supply disconnection signal at the start of control, the control start is waited for. The log information including the acquired date and time information as the system reset date and time of the second effect control board 012IW12b is stored in the log area. The part where the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes the processes of steps 099IWS001 and 099IWS003). With such a configuration, optimum processing can be executed depending on the situation.

Further, according to the feature unit 099IW, a power supply means (for example, a power supply board) and a first control means (for example, for game control mounted on the main board 11) that receives power from the power supply means and performs the first control. The microcomputer 100), the second control means (for example, the second effect control CPU012IW120b mounted on the second effect control board 012IW12b) and the second control means that receive power from the power source means to perform the second control. When the monitoring means (for example, the power supplied to the second effect control board 012IW12b) that monitors the supplied power and notifies the second control means is monitored and the power supply voltage is less than a predetermined value (for example, + 8V). , The power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127) that outputs a power supply cutoff signal to the second effect control CPU 012IW120b, and the first control means can specify that the power is supplied and the first control is started (instruction information ( For example, a setting change command, a setting confirmation command, an initialization specification command, and other power-on commands) are notified to the second control means, and the second control means determines the power supply voltage of the power supply to be supplied at the start of control. When the monitoring means notifies that the value has changed from less than the value to more than the predetermined value, it is specified that at least the first control means and the second control means have been restarted, and based on the instruction information from the first control means. The second control is started (for example, when the power supply cutoff signal is input from the power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127 at the time of starting the control, the setting change command is issued after waiting for the start of the control until the input of the power supply cutoff signal is stopped. , Setting confirmation command, initialization specification command, and other processing at power-on. The second effect control CPU012IW120b executes processing such as steps 099IWS001, 099IWS002, 099IWS204, 012IWS802, 012IWS805, and 012IWS809. ), When the monitoring means notifies that the power supply voltage of the supplied power supply is equal to or higher than a predetermined value at the start of control, it is specified that only the second control means has been restarted, and the second control is started (). For example, when the power supply cutoff signal is not input from the power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127 at the start of control, the log information including the acquired date and time information as the system reset date and time of the second effect control board 012IW12b without waiting for the start of control. Is stored in the log area. The second effect control CPU012IW120b processes the steps 099IWS001 and 099IWS003. The part that executes the reason). With such a configuration, optimum processing can be executed depending on the situation.

Further, according to the feature unit 099IW, a power supply means (for example, a power supply board) and a first control means (for example, a game control microcomputer mounted on the main board 11) that receives power from the power supply means for control. 100) and the second control means (for example, the second effect control CPU012IW120b mounted on the second effect control board 012IW12b) that receives power from the power source means and controls based on the instruction information from the first control means). And the monitoring means (for example, the power supply supplied to the second effect control board 012IW12b) that monitors the power supply supplied to the second control means and notifies the second control means, and the power supply voltage is set to a predetermined value (for example, When it is less than + 8V), it is provided with a power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127) that outputs a power supply cutoff signal to the second effect control CPU012IW120b, and the second control means responds to a notification from the monitoring means at the start of control. It has an output means that outputs information that can identify the activation history of the second control means (for example, when it is determined that a system reset of the second effect control CPU012IW120b has occurred, and a power failure of the game machine itself has occurred. By displaying different initial images from time to time, the startup history can be recognized. Further, the log information 099IW109 indicating that the system reset of the second effect control CPU012IW120b has occurred is displayed on the maintenance history screen. (See FIG. 8-55). For the log information recorded in the second log area, an inspection device is connected to the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the inspection device and the second effect control board 012IW12b are controlled by the second effect. (Read by inputting / outputting an inspection signal to / from the CPU 012IW120b). With such a configuration, the situation at the time of turning on the power can be confirmed, and the optimum processing can be executed according to the situation.

The above-mentioned "first control means" and "second control means" are the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 and the second effect control CPU012IW120b mounted on the second effect control board 012IW12b. This feature unit is not limited to the combination with the second effect control board 012IW12b, but also the combination of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b mounted on the second effect control board 012IW12b and the first effect control CPU012IW120a mounted on the first effect control board 012IW12a. The configuration of 099IW is applicable. In this case, the power supply supplied to the first effect control board 012IW12a is monitored, and when the power supply voltage is less than a predetermined value (for example, + 8V), a power cutoff signal is output to the first effect control board 012IW12a. A power supply monitoring circuit may be provided. With such a configuration, it is possible to start the process after the power is stably supplied to the first effect control board 012IW12a, and it is possible to specify the occurrence of a system reset on the first effect control board 012IW12a when the power is turned on. , Optimal processing can be executed according to the situation.

In this feature unit 099IW, as shown in FIG. 8-2, the first effect control board 012IW12a and the second effect control board 012IW12b are mounted instead of the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2. The configuration of the feature unit 099IW can also be applied to a game machine on which the main board 11 and the effect control board 12 shown in the above are mounted. In this case, a power supply monitoring circuit that monitors the power supply supplied to the effect control board 12 and outputs a power cutoff signal to the effect control board 12 when the power supply voltage is less than a predetermined value (for example, + 8V). It suffices if it is provided. With such a configuration, it is possible to start the process after the power is stably supplied to the first effect control board 12, and it is possible to identify the occurrence of a system reset on the effect control board 12 when the power is turned on. Optimal processing can be executed according to the above.

Further, according to the feature unit 099IW, the second control means is until the monitoring means notifies that the power supply voltage of the supplied power supply is equal to or higher than a predetermined value (for example, + 8V) (for example, the power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127). The control is not started (for example, the portion where the second effect control CPU012IW120b executes the processing of steps 099IWS001 and 099IWS002) until the input of the power cutoff signal is stopped. With such a configuration, optimum processing can be executed depending on the situation.

Further, according to the feature unit 099IW, a second control means is provided with a storage means (for example, backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14) capable of holding the stored contents even when the power supply to the game machine is stopped. When the monitoring means notifies that the power supply voltage of the supplied power supply has changed from less than a predetermined value to more than or equal to the predetermined value at the start of control (for example, a power supply cutoff signal is sent from the power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127 at the start of control. When the data has been input and then the input of the power off signal is stopped), predetermined information regarding startup (for example, power-on date / time, setting change start date / time, setting confirmation start date / time) based on instruction information from the first control means , RAM clear date and time, etc.) is stored in the storage means (for example, a portion where the second effect control CPU012IW120b executes processes such as step 099IWS205, step 012IWS802, step 012IWS805, and step 012IWS809), and is supplied at the start of control. When the monitoring means notifies that the power supply voltage of the power supply is equal to or higher than a predetermined value, the predetermined image is displayed on the display means and the predetermined information is not stored in the storage means (for example, the system of the second effect control board 012IW12b). When a reset or the like occurs, the initial image is displayed on the image display device 5, but the process of step 099IWS204 is not executed, and a setting change command, a setting confirmation command, an initialization specification command, and other power-on commands are issued. It does not remember log information about them because it never receives them). With such a configuration, optimum processing can be executed depending on the situation.

Further, according to the feature unit 099IW, the storage means includes a first storage means (for example, a first log area for recording log information for a game store) and a second storage means (for example, log information for a game machine maker). When the monitoring means notifies that the power supply voltage of the supplied power supply has changed from less than a predetermined value to more than the predetermined value at the start of control, the second control means includes the second log area). Stores predetermined information regarding activation in the first storage means based on the instruction information from the first control means (for example, the second effect control CPU012IW120b has step 099IWS204, step 012IWS802, step 012IWS805, step 012IWS809, etc. When the monitoring means notifies that the power supply voltage of the supplied power supply is equal to or higher than a predetermined value at the start of control, it is possible to identify that only the second control means has restarted. Information (for example, log information including the system reset date and time) is stored in the second storage means (for example, the portion where the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes the processing of N in step 099IWS001 and step 099IWS003). With such a configuration, optimum processing can be executed depending on the situation.

Further, according to the feature unit 099IW, the second control means has a first backup process for storing information related to control in the first storage means (for example, a backup process for storing log information in the first log area) and control. It is possible to execute a second backup process (for example, a backup process for storing log information in a second log area) for storing information related to the second storage means, and the first backup process stores one information in one memory. It is stored in an area, and in the second backup process, one piece of information is stored in a plurality of storage areas (see, for example, FIG. 8-19). With such a configuration, optimum processing can be executed depending on the situation.

Further, according to the feature unit 099IW, it is possible to set one of a plurality of set values (for example, set value "1" to set value "3") having different advantages for the player. Further, a storage area (for example, RAM 102) capable of storing information generated during the game is provided, and abnormal history information (for example, log information) related to the game can be identifiable and displayed, and the stored contents of the storage area can be displayed. Initialization processing for initialization (for example, RAM clear 1) can be executed, and when the initialization processing is executed, setting change processing for changing the setting value (for example, setting change processing) is executed. It is possible. Further, when the initialization process is executed and the setting change process is not executed, it is possible to identify and display that the initialization process has been executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-46 (E)). , RAM clear log information is displayed), When the initialization process and the setting change process are executed, the setting change process is executed without displaying that the initialization process was executed. This can be specified and displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-45 (D), only the log information indicating the completion of the setting change is displayed). Therefore, since unnecessary information is not displayed, it is possible to prevent the history information from becoming difficult to confirm. That is, in this example, when the setting change process is executed, it is assumed that the initialization process is executed, but if the log information of the setting change is displayed, the initialization process is executed. Since it is self-evident, it is redundant to record and display the log information of the initialization process. Therefore, by preventing the log information of unnecessary initialization processing from being recorded and displayed, it is possible to prevent the recording of unnecessary log information and to prevent the history information from becoming difficult to confirm.

Further, according to the feature unit 099IW, it is possible to execute a setting confirmation process (for example, a setting confirmation process) for confirming a set value, and the player's movement is detected during the execution of the setting confirmation process. Based on this, the history information can be displayed in a identifiable manner (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-45 to 8-48, based on the fact that the push button 31B is pressed during the display of the setting confirmation display. The maintenance mode menu screen is displayed). Therefore, it is possible to preferably confirm the history information.

Further, according to the feature unit 099IW, the game control means for controlling the game (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)) and the effect control based on the information from the game control means. (For example, a second effect control CPU012IW120b) is provided. In addition, the game control means can output initialization information (for example, an initialization designation command) indicating that the initialization process has been executed, and setting change information (for example,) indicating that the setting change process is executed. , Setting change command) can be output. Further, the effect control means can display different history information identifiable depending on whether or not the initialization information and the setting change information are output (for example, the second effect control CPU012IW120b is an initialization designation command. And, based on the reception of the setting change command, the log information of the setting change completion is recorded and displayed on the maintenance history screen as shown in FIG. 8-45 (D)). Therefore, it is possible to preferably confirm the history information.

Further, according to the feature unit 099IW, a history storage means (for example, backup data memory 099IW210A to 210D) capable of detecting a predetermined abnormality (for example, a left-handed notification state) and storing history information (for example, backup memory board 099IW14). The log area provided in the RAM 012IW122b) is provided. In addition, a first abnormal state (for example, a first left-handed notification state) indicating that the predetermined abnormality has a predetermined importance, and a first indicating that the predetermined abnormality has a higher importance than the first abnormal state. Two abnormal states (for example, a second left-handed notification state) can be detected, and information indicating that the first abnormal state has been detected is not stored as history information, but information indicating that the second abnormal state has been detected. Can be stored as history information (for example, log information is recorded only when the second left-handed notification state occurs). Therefore, the history information can be preferably stored.

Further, according to the feature unit 099IW, the first abnormality (for example, the first left-handed notification state) and the second abnormality (for example, the second left-handed notification state) having a higher importance than the first abnormality are detected. It is detectable. Further, it is provided with a history storage means (for example, a log area provided in the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14 and a log area of the RAM012IW122b) capable of storing abnormal history information related to the game, and the history storage means stores the memory. It is possible to display the history information to be specified (for example, the maintenance history screen is displayed as shown in FIGS. 8-45 and 8-46). Further, when the second abnormality is detected, the information indicating that the second abnormality is detected is stored as history information, and when the first abnormality is detected by the abnormality detecting means, the first abnormality is detected. The information indicating that the information has been sent is not stored as history information (for example, the log information is recorded only when the second left-handed notification state occurs, and the log information is not recorded even when the first left-handed notification state occurs). Therefore, the history information can be preferably stored and displayed. That is, since the storage capacity of log information is also limited, if it is recorded as log information before the first abnormality, which is less important, the history of necessary abnormalities may disappear at an early stage. In, since only the second or higher importance is recorded, the history information can be suitably stored and displayed.

Further, according to the feature unit 099IW, the second abnormality is detected according to the detection result of the first abnormality per unit period (for example, based on the fact that the execution condition of the first left-handed notification for two is satisfied. The execution condition of the second left-handed notification is satisfied). Therefore, the history information can be preferably stored and displayed.

In this example, the case where the execution condition of the second left-handed notification is satisfied according to the number of times the execution condition of the first left-handed notification is satisfied is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, based on the fact that the execution condition of the first left-handed notification continues for a predetermined period, it is determined that the execution condition of the second left-handed notification is satisfied, and the second left-handed notification is executed. May be good.

Further, according to the feature unit 099IW, it is possible to notify that the first abnormality has been detected and that the second abnormality has been detected (for example, the first left-handed notification and the second left-handed notification are executed). ). In this case, the detection of the first abnormality can be notified by a predetermined mode, and the detection of the second abnormality can be notified by a mode different from the predetermined mode (for example, in the first left-handed notification). Only the left-handed notification display is displayed, and in the second left-handed notification, in addition to the left-handed notification display, all the lights of the game effect lamp 9 and the sound of the notification sound are output). Therefore, it is possible to preferably notify the abnormality.

Further, according to the feature unit 099IW, a plurality of types of first abnormality and second abnormality can be detected (for example, in addition to the first left-handed notification state and the second left-handed notification state, the first full tank notification is possible. Detects the status and the second full tank notification status). Further, the first abnormality and the second abnormality are detected according to the detection conditions different for each type of the first abnormality and the second abnormality (for example, the first left-handed notification state and the second left-handed notification state are sent to the passing gate 012IW041. In the first full tank notification state and the second full tank notification state, the full tank state of the hit ball supply plate (lower plate) is 10 while the judgment is made by detecting the passage of the game ball 5 or 10 times. Determined by whether it lasts for seconds or 30 seconds). Therefore, the history information can be preferably stored and displayed.

In this example, the case where the full tank notification is executed in addition to the left-handed notification is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, it is configured to execute abnormal winning notification, magnet error notification, ball clogging error notification, etc., and there are a first notification with low importance and a second notification with high importance, and the second notification is performed. It may be configured to record the log information only when it is executed and display it on the maintenance history screen.

Further, according to the feature unit 099IW, a predetermined control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)) and a specific control means (for example, a specific control means) that controls based on information from the predetermined control means. The second effect control CPU012IW120b) is provided. Further, the specific control means can temporarily store the date and time when the power supply to the specific control means is stopped (for example, the date and time information is stored in the temporary area of the RAM012IW 122b every 100 ms). When the power supply to the specific control means is started, the information that can identify that the power supply output by the predetermined control means is started (for example, the initialization designation command, the recovery command) is provided. Based on the input, the temporarily stored date and time can be stored as the power failure date and time (for example, the log information is stored in the log area as the power failure date and time). Therefore, the power failure date and time can be preferably stored. That is, both when the power failure of the game machine itself occurs and when the system reset of the second effect control CPU012IW120b occurs, it is possible to prevent the situation where the power failure date and time are recorded as the power failure date and time. It can be preferably stored.

Further, according to the feature unit 099IW, when the power supply to the specific control means is started and the information that can identify that the power supply is started cannot be input, the temporarily stored date and time is set as the power failure date and time. Do not store (for example, if the initialization specification command or recovery command is not received, the log information is not stored in the log area as the power failure date and time). Therefore, the power failure date and time can be suitably stored.

Further, according to the feature unit 099IW, the date and time can be temporarily stored at predetermined timings (for example, 100 ms) (for example, the date and time information is stored in the temporary area of the RAM 012IW 122b). Therefore, the power failure date and time can be suitably stored.

In this example, the case where the date and time information is temporarily stored every 100 ms is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the current date and time information may be temporarily stored and stored as a temporary power failure date and time only when the stop of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is detected.

Further, according to the feature unit 099IW, the temporary storage of the date and time at each predetermined timing is stopped based on the stop of the power supply to the specific control means (for example, the temporary storage enable flag is reset and the date and time are every 100 ms. The temporary storage of information will not be executed). Then, based on the input of the predetermined information (for example, the initialization designation command, the recovery command, and other commands) output by the predetermined control means, the temporary storage of the date and time at each predetermined timing is restarted (for example). , Temporary storage enable flag is set, and temporary storage of date and time information is resumed every 100 ms). Therefore, the power failure date and time can be suitably stored.

Further, according to the feature unit 099IW, the specific control means can store the date and time when the power supply to the specific control means is started (for example, the power-on date and time is recorded as log information). In addition, when the date and time when the power supply is started is not stored, the temporarily stored date and time is not stored as the power-on date and time (for example, when the log information of the power-on date and time before the power-off occurs is not recorded). Does not record the log information of the power failure date and time). Therefore, it is possible to prevent an abnormal storage state. That is, since there is no record that the power of the game machine is turned on, it is possible to prevent an abnormal state in which the power failure date and time is recorded.

Further, according to the feature unit 099IW, the first control means (for example, the first effect control CPU012IW120a) and the second control means (for example, the second effect control) that controls based on the information from the first control means. CPU 012IW120b) is provided. Further, the first control means sequentially outputs a plurality of information regarding the change of the date and time to the second control means over a predetermined period based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the passage of 10 ms) (for example, an hour signal and a minute signal). , Second signal, year signal, month signal, day signal, and day of the week signal in order). Further, the second control means stores the date and time change history after a specific period of time equal to or longer than a predetermined period has elapsed since the input of a part of the information regarding the date and time change (for example, FIG. 8-Fig. 8-). As shown in 40, wait until 500 ms elapses after receiving the time signal, and then record it in the log information as the time setting date and time). Therefore, the date and time change history can be suitably stored.

Further, according to the feature unit 099IW, the second control means changes the internal date and time information each time the information regarding the date and time change is input (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-40, the second control means receives the information. Immediately set the information of the real-time clock 012IW126 based on the hour signal, minute signal, second signal, year signal, month signal, day signal, or day signal). Therefore, the date and time change history can be suitably stored.

Further, according to the feature unit 099IW, when the second control means inputs the information regarding the change of the date and time multiple times before the lapse of the specific period, the second control means sets the date and time based on the information regarding the change of the date and time last input. The change history is stored (for example, if an hour signal, a minute signal, a second signal, a year signal, a month signal, a day signal, or a day signal is further received before 500 ms elapses, the change history is stored based on the last received signal. The log information of the time setting date and time is recorded based on the date and time information of the set real-time clock 012IW126). Therefore, the date and time change history can be suitably stored.

Further, according to the feature unit 099IW, the second control means can display the date and time change history (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-46 (E), the current time is set on the maintenance history screen. Display log information to the effect that it was lost). Further, the date and time change history is stored and displayed according to the changed date and time (for example, the date and time information is read from the set real-time clock 012IW126 and the log information is recorded as the time set date and time). Therefore, the date and time change history can be suitably stored.

Further, according to the feature unit 099IW, the second control means stores the history information in the order in which the abnormalities related to the game occur regardless of the change of the date and time (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-46 (E)). , Even if the date and time do not match before and after the current time setting, the log information is recorded in the log area in the order in which the log information was generated, and the log information is displayed in the order in which the log information was generated). Therefore, it is possible to preferably store the history information of the abnormality.

Further, according to the feature unit 099IW, it is possible to give a profit to the player based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied (for example, the game ball wins in the V winning area in the second special variable winning device 012IW007b). (For example, control to a probabilistic state after the end of the big hit game). In addition, the specific condition can be satisfied at least based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the probability variation jackpot is achieved). Then, when the specific condition is not satisfied even though the predetermined condition is satisfied, the specific information (for example, the log information of the probability change failure date and time) that can identify that the specific condition is not satisfied can be stored. .. Therefore, information can be suitably stored. That is, troubles other than errors can be recorded, and information can be suitably stored.

Further, according to the feature unit 099IW, it is possible to give a profit related to the production or a profit related to the content (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-54, the log information 012IW109a of "setting suggestion failure" and "point grant failure". ”Log information 012IW109b is recorded). Therefore, information can be suitably stored.

In this example, in the case of profit, log information is recorded and displayed on the maintenance history screen when V prize is not established and probability change is not established, when setting suggestion is unsuccessful, or when points are not awarded. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, in a game machine configured to perform a character game that shifts to a big hit game based on a game ball winning in a specific area (V winning area) in the character, the game ball wins in the V prize area. If not, the log information may be recorded and displayed on the maintenance history screen. Further, for example, when the setting value suggestion effect is executed but a low setting value is suggested, the log information may be recorded and displayed on the maintenance history screen. Further, for example, the log information may be recorded and displayed on the maintenance history screen when the display of an image having a low appearance frequency or the output of audio is expected to be displayed or not output. Further, for example, when applied to a slot machine, log information may be recorded and displayed on the maintenance history screen when the push order is mistaken while the push order navigation is being executed. As such, various aspects of "profit" can be considered.

Further, according to the feature unit 099IW, specific information can be displayed so as to be recognizable (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-45 (C), information on a probable change / failure is displayed on the maintenance history screen. , As shown in FIG. 8-54, the log information 012IW109a of "setting suggestion failure" and the log information 012IW109b of "point grant failure" are displayed on the maintenance history screen). Therefore, the information can be preferably displayed.

In this example, the case where the log information of the probability change failure date and time, the setting suggestion failure, and the point grant failure is displayed on the maintenance history screen is shown, but it may be configured not to be displayed on the maintenance history screen. Further, these log information may be stored in the second log area for recording the log information for the game machine maker, instead of the first log area for recording the log information for the game store. Then, the game machine maker may confirm what kind of trouble has occurred and configure it so that it can be used for the development of the game machine.

Further, according to the feature unit 099IW, information including specific information can be output as a two-dimensional code (for example, a two-dimensional code including log information of a probability change failure date and time is generated and displayed). Therefore, the information can be output suitably.

In this example, the case where the log information is recorded in association with the date and time information including both the date and the time is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the log information may be recorded in association with the date information including only the year, month, and day, or the log information may be recorded in association with the time information including only the hour, minute, and second. May be good. As such, various modes can be considered as a method of recording log information. Similarly, in the feature unit 099IW, the "date and time" is not necessarily limited to the case where both the date information and the time information are included, but also includes the case where only the date information is included, and also includes only the time information. It is a concept that includes cases.

In addition, the feature unit 099IW includes the second invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. .. Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 describes that the setting change process is executed when the power switch is operated to the ON side while the front frame is opened and the setting key switch is operated to the ON side. .. Further, it is described that the setting change process clears the RAM area other than the set value storage means. However, in the game machines described in JP-A-2010-201002, the game machines configured so that they can be set to any one of a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player are not necessarily appropriate. Processing may not be possible. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the second invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine that can be set to any of a plurality of set values (for example, set value "1" to set value "3") having different advantages for the player.
An operating means (for example, a clear switch) provided so that the initialization process (for example, RAM clear 1 process, RAM clear 2 process) can be executed based on the operation when the power supply to the game machine is started. When,
Specific information storage means (for example, RAM012IW122b) capable of storing specific information (for example, RAM clear flag) indicating that the operation means was operated when the power supply to the game machine is started, and
When executing a plurality of processes including the set value change process for changing the set value, the process execution means (for example, step 012IWS025 in the game control microcomputer 100) executes the process by using the specific information a plurality of times. A game machine characterized by having (a part for executing S034 and S048) is described, and according to this feature, one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player can be set. Processing can be preferably performed in a game machine configured to be settable. In particular, in the process of changing the set value, which takes a certain amount of processing time, specific information (RAM clear flag in this example) is stored, the RAM clear flag is confirmed, and the process is executed. It can be performed.

In this example, as a process to be executed "using specific information multiple times", a setting confirmation command or a setting change command is transmitted in steps 012IWS026 and S207 depending on whether or not the RAM clear flag is set in step 012IWS025. Control whether or not to execute the process of changing the set value of steps 012IWS035 to S042 depending on whether or not the RAM clear flag is set in step 012IWS034, or clear the RAM in step 012IWS048. The case where the recovery process of step 012IWS049 and S051 or the RAM clear 1 process is executed depending on whether or not the flag is set is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, it may be controlled whether or not the operation switch is enabled immediately before the operation of changing the set value according to whether or not the specific information (RAM clear flag) is set.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the second invention,
The process execution means changes the set value based on the operation of the operation means in the set value change process (for example, the part that executes steps 012IWS039 to S042 in the game control microcomputer 100).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, since the operation means can also be used, an increase in cost can be suppressed. That is, in this example, since the clear switch can be used in combination as the operation means for performing the operation for initializing the RAM 102 and the operation means for performing the operation for changing the set value, it is possible to suppress the increase in cost. it can.

In this example, since it is necessary to check the state of the clear switch multiple times when the power is turned on to the game machine by using the clear switch in combination, the clear switch must be turned on first when the power is turned on to the game machine. The RAM clear flag is set when it is detected, and after that, whether or not the clear switch for initializing the RAM 102 has been operated is checked to see if the RAM clear flag is set, and the set value is set. The operation of the clear switch for the change operation can be appropriately performed by checking the state of the clear switch itself.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the second invention,
The normal initialization process (for example, RAM clear 1 process) is executed based on the operation of the operating means when the power supply to the game machine is started, while the power supply to the game machine is started. A portion for executing steps 012IWS015, S051 in the game control microcomputer 100, which executes initialization processing (for example, RAM clear 2 processing) at the time of abnormality based on the detection of an abnormality. )When,
A first storage area (for example, the clear storage area 1 of the RAM 102) whose storage contents are cleared in the normal initialization process, and
It is provided with a second storage area (for example, the clear storage area 2 of the RAM 102) whose stored contents are cleared in the initialization process at the time of abnormality.
The specific information storage means can store specific information in the second storage area (for example, the RAM clear flag is set in the clear storage area 2 of the RAM 102).
It is described that such a configuration may be performed, and according to such a configuration, it is suitable for a gaming machine configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player. Processing can be performed.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 4 of the second invention,
A determination means (for example, a portion for executing step 012IWS041 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of determining that the operation means has been operated based on the state of the operation means being switched from the off state to the on state is provided.
The process execution means can change the set value based on the determination that the operation means has been operated by the determination means in the set value change process (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 has the game control microcomputer 100 in step 012IWS041). When Y, step 012IWS042 is executed),
The determination means determines whether or not the operation means has been operated by setting the state of the operation means for the first time when the power supply to the game machine is started to the ON state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100). Executes step 012IWS037 when N in step 012IWS030)
It is described that such a configuration may be performed, and according to such a configuration, it is suitable for a gaming machine configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player. Processing can be performed.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 5 of the second invention,
A timer interrupt processing execution means (for example, a portion for executing steps S21 to S27 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing a timer interrupt processing each time a predetermined timer interrupt occurs is provided.
The process execution means executes the process by using the specific information a plurality of times from the start of the power supply to the game machine to the execution of the timer interrupt process (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 has a game control microcomputer 100. Step 012 IWS025, S034, S048)
It is described that such a configuration may be performed, and according to such a configuration, it is suitable for a gaming machine configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player. Processing can be performed.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 6 of the second invention,
An information output means (for example, a part for executing steps 012IWS047 and S178 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of outputting set value information (for example, a set value command) that can specify which set value is set. Prepare,
Suggestion production execution means
Based on the set value information input from the information output means, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect, a game-in-game suggestion effect, a jackpot suggestion effect) (for example, a second effect control CPU012IW120b). Step 012 IWS509-S515, S704-S709, S901-S906),
The suggestion effect execution means
As the suggestion effect, the first suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect and the in-game suggestion effect by the third effect mode, the jackpot suggestion effect by the fourth effect mode) and the second suggestion effect (for example, the game by the first effect mode). It is possible to perform pre-suggestion effects, in-game suggestion effects, and jackpot suggestion effects).
When the set value information is not input normally, the first suggestion effect is not executed as the suggestion effect, and the second suggestion effect can be executed as the suggestion effect (for example, the second effect control CPU012IW120b). Does not execute the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the jackpot suggestion effect according to the fourth effect mode by executing steps 012IWS514, S709, and S906).
According to such a configuration, in a gaming machine configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, the game can be set. It is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

Further, the feature unit 099IW includes the third invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine configured to be set to any one of a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player, for example, there is one described in JP-A-2017-60546. .. Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-60546 describes that if the RAM clear switch is operated and the setting key switch is in the ON state, the initial setting 2 is executed and the lottery probability is changed. Further, it is described that the setting key switch is used to enable the setting switch, and the winning lottery probability of the special figure corresponding to the settings 1 to 3 indicated by the setting switch is set. However, in the game machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-60546, the game machine configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player is not necessarily appropriate. Processing may not be possible. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the third invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine that can be set to any of a plurality of set values (for example, set value "1" to set value "3") having different advantages for the player.
Operating means (for example, clear switch) and
A processing execution means (for example, a game control microcomputer) capable of executing a setting value change process for changing a set value based on the operation of the operation means when the power supply to the game machine is started. Steps 012IWS039 to S042 in 100) and
Based on the fact that the state of the operating means is switched from the off state to the on state, the determining means that can determine that the operating means has been operated (for example, the portion that executes step 012IWS041 in the game control microcomputer 100) Prepare,
The process execution means can change the set value based on the determination that the operation means has been operated by the determination means in the set value change process (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 has a step. When it is Y in 012IWS041, step 012IWS042 is executed),
The determination means determines whether or not the operation means has been operated by turning on the state of the operation means for the first time when the set value change process is started (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 , Step 012IWS037 is executed when N in step 012IWS036)
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is suitably processed in a game machine configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player. It can be performed. That is, even though the operating means (clear switch in this example) is continuously pressed, it is possible to prevent the setting value from being unintentionally changed, and the processing is preferably performed. It can be carried out.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the third invention,
A specific information storage means (for example, RAM012IW122b) capable of storing specific information (for example, a RAM clear flag) indicating that the operation means was operated when the power supply to the game machine is started is provided.
When executing a plurality of processes including the set value change process, the process execution means executes the process by using the specific information a plurality of times (for example, steps 012IWS025, S034, S048 in the game control microcomputer 100). Part to do)
It is described that such a configuration may be performed, and according to such a configuration, it is suitable for a gaming machine configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player. Processing can be performed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the third invention,
The normal initialization process (for example, RAM clear 1 process) is executed based on the operation of the operating means when the power supply to the game machine is started, while the power supply to the game machine is started. A portion for executing steps 012IWS015, S051 in the game control microcomputer 100, which executes initialization processing (for example, RAM clear 2 processing) at the time of abnormality based on the detection of an abnormality. )When,
A first storage area (for example, the clear storage area 1 of the RAM 102) whose storage contents are cleared in the normal initialization process, and
It is provided with a second storage area (for example, the clear storage area 2 of the RAM 102) whose stored contents are cleared in the initialization process at the time of abnormality.
The specific information storage means can store specific information in the second storage area (for example, the RAM clear flag is set in the clear storage area 2 of the RAM 102).
It is described that such a configuration may be performed, and according to such a configuration, it is suitable for a gaming machine configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player. Processing can be performed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the third invention,
A first state storage means (for example, the previous clear switch buffer) that stores the state of the previous operation means,
A second state storage means (for example, a clear switch buffer) for storing the state of the operation means this time is provided.
The determination means can determine that the operation means has been operated based on the fact that the storage content of the first state storage means is in the off state and the storage content of the second state storage means is in the on state (). For example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 012IWS041).
The first state storage means stores an on state as the state of the operation means for the first time when the set value change process is started (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 012IWS037).
It is described that such a configuration may be performed, and according to such a configuration, it is suitable for a gaming machine configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player. Processing can be performed.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 5 of the third invention,
An information output means (for example, a part for executing steps 012IWS047 and S178 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of outputting set value information (for example, a set value command) that can specify which set value is set. Prepare,
Suggestion production execution means
Based on the set value information input from the information output means, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect, a game-in-game suggestion effect, a jackpot suggestion effect) (for example, a second effect control CPU012IW120b). Step 012 IWS509-S515, S704-S709, S901-S906),
The suggestion effect execution means
As the suggestion effect, the first suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect and the in-game suggestion effect by the third effect mode, the jackpot suggestion effect by the fourth effect mode) and the second suggestion effect (for example, the game by the first effect mode). It is possible to perform pre-suggestion effects, in-game suggestion effects, and jackpot suggestion effects).
When the set value information is not input normally, the first suggestion effect is not executed as the suggestion effect, and the second suggestion effect can be executed as the suggestion effect (for example, the second effect control CPU012IW120b). Does not execute the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the jackpot suggestion effect according to the fourth effect mode by executing steps 012IWS514, S709, and S906).
According to such a configuration, in a gaming machine configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, the game can be set. It is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

Further, the feature unit 099IW includes the fourth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, a pachinko machine is configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of stages of setting values based on a setting operation, and control of an advantageous state can be executed based on the set setting value. As a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. In Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, a fluctuation stop command (setting value designation command) corresponding to the setting value before and after the change is transmitted from the main control board to the effect control board, and the setting before and after the change obtained by the fluctuation stop command is transmitted. It is described that the display is performed by three types of production patterns corresponding to the three types of characters, giraffe, elephant, and lion, based on the value. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a possibility that an erroneous suggestion effect is executed when the set value information (set value designation command) is not normal, and the setting In a game machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set value, there is a risk that the interest in the game will be lowered. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the fourth invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, a step in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be set to any one of the setting values of a plurality of stages (for example, the setting value "1" to the setting value "3") based on the setting operation. The part that executes 012IWS042) and
A game control means (for example, a portion that executes steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value, and
With an information output means (for example, a part that executes steps 012IWS047 and S178 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can output set value information (for example, a set value command) that can specify which set value is set. ,
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, second effect) capable of executing suggestion effect (for example, pre-game suggestion effect, in-game suggestion effect, jackpot suggestion effect) based on the set value information output from the information output means. The control CPU 012IW120b includes steps 012IWS509 to S515, S704 to S709, and S901 to S906).
The suggestion effect executing means is set to a predetermined set value which is less advantageous to the player among the set values of the plurality of stages when the set value information output from the information output means is not normal. As such, the suggestion effect can be executed (for example, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is a portion that executes steps 012IWS512, S707, S904).
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, in a game machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set value, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. be able to.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the fourth invention,
The information output means can output set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a set value command at the time of turning on the power and at the start of fluctuation by executing steps 012IWS047 and S178. To do)
According to such a configuration, even if the set value information cannot be input normally at a certain timing, the set value information can be input normally at the next timing, so that the game can be played. It is possible to prevent a decline in interest in.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the fourth invention,
As the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect execution means is the first suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect by the third effect mode, the suggestion effect during the game, and the big hit by the fourth effect mode) in which the set value is highly specified. It is possible to execute a second suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect according to the first effect mode, a during-game suggestion effect, and a jackpot suggestion effect) in which the specified degree of the set value is low. It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 4 of the fourth invention,
Using a plurality of types of determination data for determining the execution mode of the suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect determination table, the in-game suggestion effect determination table, and the jackpot suggestion effect determination table), the execution mode of the suggestion effect can be determined. It is provided with suggestion effect determining means for determining (for example, a portion for executing steps 012IWS510, S512, S514, S705, S707, S709, S902, S904, S906 in the second effect control CPU 012IW120b).
The suggestion effect determining means
The execution mode of the suggestion effect is determined by using the determination data corresponding to the set value set among the plurality of types of determination data (for example, the second effect control CPU012IW120b is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM012IW122b. Step 012IWS510, S705, S902 is executed based on the stored setting value),
When the set value information is not input normally, the execution mode of the suggestion effect is determined using the determination data corresponding to the predetermined set value (for example, the set value "1") (for example, the second effect control). CPU012IW120b executes steps 012IWS512, S707, S904 based on the set value "1")
It is described that the data capacity may be increased, and according to such a configuration, an increase in the data capacity can be prevented.

In addition, in this feature part 099IW, "determining the execution mode of the suggestion effect" is a concept including determining whether or not to execute the suggestion effect and also determining the effect mode of the suggestion effect. is there.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 5 of the fourth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means has at least a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect) at a different ratio depending on the set value during the period from the change of the set value to the execution of the first variable display. It is stated that it may be possible to execute (initial roll effect, etc.), and according to such a configuration, the player is interested in the state of the game machine before the game starts, and the game is played from an early time. It is possible to give motivation to play and enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 6 of the fourth invention,
The suggestion effect executing means is set at least during the game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (from the setting change to the execution of the variation display 30 times)) elapses after the set value is changed. It is possible to execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set values (see, for example, FIGS. 8-9 (A), (B), 8-29 (A), (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game in a predetermined period, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 7 of the fourth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 8-29 (A), (B), etc.).
It is described that a notification means capable of notifying information regarding the executed suggestion effect (for example, a portion where the second effect control CPU012IW120b executes step S012IWS516) may be further provided, and such a configuration may be provided. According to this, it is possible to confirm the suggestive effects performed in the past, and it is possible to enhance the game interest.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 8 of the fourth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 8-31 (A), (B), etc.).
When executed in parallel with the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize. Depending on the effect mode, the predetermined effect (for example, when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize) Predetermined effect execution means that can execute light guide plate effect, error display, etc.
When the suggestion effect is executed, the limiting means for restricting the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the accessory effect is restricted. See FIG. 8-31 (D)). It is stated that the above may be further provided, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 9 of the fourth invention
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different ratios according to the set set value (see, for example, FIGS. 8-31 (A), (B), etc.).
Predetermined notification means capable of executing predetermined notification in a manner in which it becomes difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect is recognized. It is stated that it is possible to further provide an accessory effect, a light guide plate effect, an error display, etc., which are difficult to handle, and such a configuration can prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of the means 10 of the fourth invention,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, the fanfare period during the big hit game, the interval period, the ending period, etc.) differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 8-8).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 11 of the fourth invention,
The predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) related to the variable display differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 8-10).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 12 of the fourth invention,
It is provided with an opening / closing body that can be opened / closed and a regulating member (for example, a curity cover 012IW500A / security cover 012IW500B / security cover 012IW500C) that can regulate the operation of the operation unit.
When the opening / closing body is closed, the regulation member maintains the regulation state in which the operation of the operation unit is regulated, and when the opening / closing body is open, the regulation state can be released (for example, the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed). In this state, the security cover 012IW500A maintains the regulated state in which the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 012IW051 is restricted, while the security cover 012IW500A is in the state where the game machine frame 012IW003 is open. The restricted state is released, and the operation of the setting key 012IW051 is allowed. FIGS. 8-5, 8-6, 8-49 to 8-52).
It is described that the security may be improved, and the security is improved by such a configuration.

The feature 099IW also includes the fifth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, a pachinko machine is configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of stages of setting values based on a setting operation, and control of an advantageous state can be executed based on the set setting value. As a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. In Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, a fluctuation stop command (setting value designation command) corresponding to the setting value before and after the change is transmitted from the main control board to the effect control board, and the setting before and after the change obtained by the fluctuation stop command is transmitted. It is described that the display is performed by three types of production patterns corresponding to the three types of characters, giraffe, elephant, and lion, based on the value. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a possibility that an erroneous suggestion effect is executed when the set value information (set value designation command) is not normal, and the setting In a game machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set value, there is a risk that the interest in the game will be lowered. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the fifth invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, a step in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be set to any one of the setting values of a plurality of stages (for example, the setting value "1" to the setting value "3") based on the setting operation. The part that executes 012IWS042) and
A game control means (for example, a portion that executes steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value, and
With an information output means (for example, a part that executes steps 012IWS047 and S178 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can output set value information (for example, a set value command) that can specify which set value is set. ,
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, second effect) capable of executing suggestion effect (for example, pre-game suggestion effect, in-game suggestion effect, jackpot suggestion effect) based on the set value information output from the information output means. The control CPU 012IW120b includes steps 012IWS509 to S515, S704 to S709, and S901 to S906).
The suggestion effect execution means limits the execution of the suggestion effect when the set value information output from the information output means is not normal (for example, the second effect control CPU012IW120b is N, in step 012IWS513. When N in S708 and N in S905, the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the jackpot suggestion effect are not executed.)
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, in a game machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set value, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. be able to.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the fifth invention,
The information output means can output set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a set value command at the time of turning on the power and at the start of fluctuation by executing steps 012IWS047 and S178. To do)
According to such a configuration, even if the set value information cannot be input normally at a certain timing, the set value information can be input normally at the next timing, so that the game can be played. It is possible to prevent a decline in interest in.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the fifth invention,
As the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect execution means is the first suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect by the third effect mode, the suggestion effect during the game, and the big hit by the fourth effect mode) in which the set value is highly specified. It is possible to execute a second suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect according to the first effect mode, a during-game suggestion effect, and a jackpot suggestion effect) in which the specified degree of the set value is low. It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 4 of the fifth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means has at least a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect) at a different ratio depending on the set value during the period from the change of the set value to the execution of the first variable display. It is stated that it may be possible to execute (initial roll effect, etc.), and according to such a configuration, the player is interested in the state of the game machine before the game starts, and the game is played from an early time. It is possible to give motivation to play and enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 5 of the fifth invention,
The suggestion effect executing means is set at least during the game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (from the setting change to the execution of the variation display 30 times)) elapses after the set value is changed. It is possible to execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set values (see, for example, FIGS. 8-9 (A), (B), 8-29 (A), (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game in a predetermined period, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 6 of the fifth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 8-29 (A), (B), etc.).
It is described that a notification means capable of notifying information regarding the executed suggestion effect (for example, a portion where the second effect control CPU012IW120b executes step S012IWS516) may be further provided, and such a configuration may be provided. According to this, it is possible to confirm the suggestive effects performed in the past, and it is possible to enhance the game interest.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 7 of the fifth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 8-31 (A), (B), etc.).
When executed in parallel with the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize. Depending on the effect mode, the predetermined effect (for example, when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize) Predetermined effect execution means that can execute light guide plate effect, error display, etc.
When the suggestion effect is executed, the limiting means for restricting the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the accessory effect is restricted. See FIG. 8-31 (D)). It is stated that the above may be further provided, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 8 of the fifth invention,
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different ratios according to the set set value (see, for example, FIGS. 8-31 (A), (B), etc.).
Predetermined notification means capable of executing predetermined notification in a manner in which it becomes difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect is recognized. It is stated that it is possible to further provide an accessory effect, a light guide plate effect, an error display, etc., which are difficult to handle, and such a configuration can prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 9 of the fifth invention,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, the fanfare period during the big hit game, the interval period, the ending period, etc.) differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 8-8).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of the means 10 of the fifth invention,
The predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) related to the variable display differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 8-10).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 11 of the fifth invention,
It is provided with an opening / closing body that can be opened / closed and a regulating member (for example, a curity cover 012IW500A / security cover 012IW500B / security cover 012IW500C) that can regulate the operation of the operation unit.
When the opening / closing body is closed, the regulation member maintains the regulation state in which the operation of the operation unit is regulated, and when the opening / closing body is open, the regulation state can be released (for example, the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed). In this state, the security cover 012IW500A maintains the regulated state in which the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 012IW051 is restricted, while the security cover 012IW500A is in the state where the game machine frame 012IW003 is open. The restricted state is released, and the operation of the setting key 012IW051 is allowed. FIGS. 8-5, 8-6, 8-49 to 8-52).
It is described that the security may be improved, and the security is improved by such a configuration.

The feature unit 099IW also includes the sixth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, a pachinko machine is configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of stages of setting values based on a setting operation, and control of an advantageous state can be executed based on the set setting value. As a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. In Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, a fluctuation stop command (setting value designation command) corresponding to the setting value before and after the change is transmitted from the main control board to the effect control board, and the setting before and after the change obtained by the fluctuation stop command is transmitted. It is described that the display is performed by three types of production patterns corresponding to the three types of characters, giraffe, elephant, and lion, based on the value. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a possibility that an erroneous suggestion effect is executed when the set value information (set value designation command) is not normal, and the setting In a game machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set value, there is a risk that the interest in the game will be lowered. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the sixth invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, a step in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be set to any one of the setting values of a plurality of stages (for example, the setting value "1" to the setting value "3") based on the setting operation. The part that executes 012IWS042) and
A game control means (for example, a portion that executes steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value, and
With an information output means (for example, a part that executes steps 012IWS047 and S178 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can output set value information (for example, a set value command) that can specify which set value is set. ,
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, second effect) capable of executing suggestion effect (for example, pre-game suggestion effect, in-game suggestion effect, jackpot suggestion effect) based on the set value information output from the information output means. The control CPU 012IW120b includes steps 012IWS509 to S515, S704 to S709, and S901 to S906).
The suggestion effect execution means
As the suggestion effect, the first suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect and the in-game suggestion effect by the third effect mode, the jackpot suggestion effect by the fourth effect mode) and the second suggestion effect (for example, the game by the first effect mode). It is possible to perform pre-suggestion effects, in-game suggestion effects, and jackpot suggestion effects).
When the set value information output from the information output means is not normal, the first suggestion effect is not executed as the suggestion effect, and the second suggestion effect can be executed as the suggestion effect (for example,). By executing steps 012IWS514, S709, and S906, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b does not execute the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, or the jackpot suggestion effect according to the fourth effect mode.)
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, in a game machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set value, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. be able to.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the sixth invention,
The information output means can output set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a set value command at the time of turning on the power and at the start of fluctuation by executing steps 012IWS047 and S178. To do)
According to such a configuration, even if the set value information cannot be input normally at a certain timing, the set value information can be input normally at the next timing, so that the game can be played. It is possible to prevent a decline in interest in.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the sixth invention,
As the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect execution means is the first suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect by the third effect mode, the suggestion effect during the game, and the big hit by the fourth effect mode) in which the set value is highly specified. It is possible to execute a second suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect according to the first effect mode, a during-game suggestion effect, and a jackpot suggestion effect) in which the specified degree of the set value is low. It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 4 of the sixth invention,
Using a plurality of types of determination data for determining the execution mode of the suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect determination table, the in-game suggestion effect determination table, and the jackpot suggestion effect determination table), the execution mode of the suggestion effect can be determined. It is provided with suggestion effect determining means for determining (for example, a portion for executing steps 012IWS510, S512, S514, S705, S707, S709, S902, S904, S906 in the second effect control CPU 012IW120b).
The suggestion effect determining means
The execution mode of the suggestion effect is determined by using the determination data corresponding to the set value set among the plurality of types of determination data (for example, the second effect control CPU012IW120b is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM012IW122b. Step 012IWS510, S705, S902 is executed based on the stored setting value),
When the set value information is not input normally, the dedicated decision data (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C, the in-game suggestion effect determination table, and the jackpot suggestion effect determination table) is used. The execution mode of the suggested effect is determined (for example, the second effect control CPU012IW120b uses the pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C, the in-game suggestion effect determination table, and the jackpot suggestion effect determination table. Step 012 IWS514, S709, S906)
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 5 of the sixth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means has at least a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect) at a different ratio depending on the set value during the period from the change of the set value to the execution of the first variable display. It is stated that it may be possible to execute (initial roll effect, etc.), and according to such a configuration, the player is interested in the state of the game machine before the game starts, and the game is played from an early time. It is possible to give motivation to play and enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 6 of the sixth invention,
The suggestion effect executing means is set at least during the game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (from the setting change to the execution of the variation display 30 times)) elapses after the set value is changed. It is possible to execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set values (see, for example, FIGS. 8-9 (A), (B), 8-29 (A), (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game in a predetermined period, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 7 of the sixth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 8-29 (A), (B), etc.).
It is described that a notification means capable of notifying information regarding the executed suggestion effect (for example, a portion where the second effect control CPU012IW120b executes step S012IWS516) may be further provided, and such a configuration may be provided. According to this, it is possible to confirm the suggestive effects performed in the past, and it is possible to enhance the game interest.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 8 of the sixth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 8-31 (A), (B), etc.).
When executed in parallel with the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize. Depending on the effect mode, the predetermined effect (for example, when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize) Predetermined effect execution means that can execute light guide plate effect, error display, etc.
When the suggestion effect is executed, the limiting means for restricting the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the accessory effect is restricted. See FIG. 8-31 (D)). It is stated that the above may be further provided, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 9 of the sixth invention,
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different ratios according to the set set value (see, for example, FIGS. 8-31 (A), (B), etc.).
Predetermined notification means capable of executing predetermined notification in a manner in which it becomes difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect is recognized. It is stated that it is possible to further provide an accessory effect, a light guide plate effect, an error display, etc., which are difficult to handle, and such a configuration can prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of the means 10 of the sixth invention,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, the fanfare period during the big hit game, the interval period, the ending period, etc.) differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 8-8).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of the means 11 of the sixth invention,
The predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) related to the variable display differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 8-10).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of the means 12 of the sixth invention,
It is provided with an opening / closing body that can be opened / closed and a regulating member (for example, a curity cover 012IW500A / security cover 012IW500B / security cover 012IW500C) that can regulate the operation of the operation unit.
When the opening / closing body is closed, the regulation member maintains the regulation state in which the operation of the operation unit is regulated, and when the opening / closing body is open, the regulation state can be released (for example, the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed). In this state, the security cover 012IW500A maintains the regulated state in which the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 012IW051 is restricted, while the security cover 012IW500A is in the state where the game machine frame 012IW003 is open. The restricted state is released, and the operation of the setting key 012IW051 is allowed. FIGS. 8-5, 8-6, 8-49 to 8-52).
It is described that the security may be improved, and the security is improved by such a configuration.

It should be noted that the feature unit 099IW is configured so that it can be changed to three types of effect modes A to C, and when the effect mode A is controlled, if the set value information is not input normally, It is configured so that the suggestion effect can be executed as if it is set to a predetermined set value which is less advantageous for the player (the configuration of the fourth invention described above), and when it is controlled to the effect mode B, the set value. When the information is not input normally, it is configured to limit the execution of the suggestion effect (the configuration of the fifth invention described above), and when it is controlled to the effect mode C, the set value information is input normally. If this is not the case, the case where the first suggestive effect is not executed as the suggestive effect and the second suggestive effect is executably configured as the suggestive effect (the configuration of the sixth invention described above) is shown. Not limited. For example, it is possible to switch which of the control methods of the fourth invention to the sixth invention described above is used to execute the suggestion effect according to the gaming state. In this case, for example, when the game state is the normal state, if the set value information is not input normally, it is possible to execute the suggestion effect as if the set value is set to a predetermined set value which is less advantageous for the player. The configuration (the configuration of the above-mentioned fourth invention) is configured so that the execution of the suggestion effect is restricted when the set value information is not normally input when the gaming state is the time saving state (the above-mentioned fifth invention). (Structure) If the game state is a probabilistic state, if the set value information is not input normally, the first suggestion effect is not executed as the suggestion effect, and the second suggestion effect can be executed as the suggestion effect (configuration). The configuration of the sixth invention described above) may be performed.

Further, it is not necessary to make the suggestion effect executable by all the control methods of the fourth to sixth inventions shown above, and the suggestive effect is made executable by using only one of the control methods. May be good.

Further, in the present feature unit 099IW, when the set value command itself cannot be received due to reasons such as omission or garbled data, the execution of the suggestion effect is controlled by the control methods of the fourth to sixth inventions described above (suggestion). Although the case (restricting the production) is shown, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, if the set value command is received but the received set value command is inconsistent, the suggestion effect may be restricted. In this case, for example, each time a setting value command is received, the setting value indicated by the setting value command received by the effect control means side is stored, and then when a new setting value command is received, a new setting value command is received. If the set value indicated by the set value command received in is not the same as the set value stored in the previous time, it is determined that an inconsistency has occurred, and the suggestion effect is executed by the control methods of the fourth to sixth inventions described above. It may be controlled (restricting the suggestion effect).

Further, the method of differentiating the games in each set value "1" to "3" is not limited to the one shown in this example. For example, in the case of odd-numbered setting values such as the set values "1" and "3", consecutive villas (that big hits occur continuously during a probable change state) are likely to occur and consecutive villas occur. It is configured so that there is a large difference from when it is difficult, and in the case of an even number setting value such as the setting value "2", the setting value is configured so that the likelihood of occurrence of consecutive villas is relatively constant and does not change. A suggestion effect suggesting that the number is an odd number may be configured to be feasible. Then, in this case, when the set value command cannot be received normally, the execution of the suggestion effect suggesting that the set value is an odd number is controlled by the control methods of the fourth to sixth inventions described above. It may be configured to do (restrict the suggestion effect).

The feature 099IW also includes the seventh invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that the suggestion of the set value is performed only during the variable display, and the interest cannot be sufficiently enhanced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the seventh invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) and
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set set value, and
It is provided with a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value.
The suggestion effect execution means has a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect) at least in a period from when the set value is changed until the first variable display is executed, at a different ratio depending on the set value. A game machine that is characterized by being able to execute (such as or initial roll production) is described. According to this feature, the player is interested in the state of the game machine before the start of the game, and the game is played from an early time. It is possible to give a motivation to do the game and enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the seventh invention,
A game machine capable of variablely displaying identification information for production (for example, a decorative pattern).
In the suggestion effect executing means, different effect identification information is displayed according to the set set value in the period from the change of the set value to the execution of the first variable display (for example, the suggestion effect (for example). It is stated that the odd-numbered initial roll display) may be made feasible, and according to such a configuration, the game interest can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the seventh invention,
The suggestion effect executing means can execute the suggestion effect according to the set value when the power supply to the game machine is restored after the power supply to the game machine is stopped (for example, FIG. 8). -26 As shown in (A) and (B), a pre-game suggestion effect determination table with different determination values is used)
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 4 of the seventh invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute a specific suggestion effect (for example, a suggestion effect during a game or a suggestion effect during a big hit) that suggests a set value after the variable display is started.
It is described that the specific suggestion effect may have a higher reliability for the suggested set value than the suggestion effect, and according to such a configuration, the game entertainment can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 5 of the seventh invention,
A game machine capable of playing a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball).
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, general winning opening 50A to general winning opening 50D, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first major winning opening, second major winning opening 712). A game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12) and
It is provided with an information display means (for example, display monitor 012IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means.
The information display means can display a set value (for example, a portion capable of displaying a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base on the display monitor 012IW029).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

The feature unit 099IW also includes the eighth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 have a problem that they cannot effectively give motivation to play a game and cannot sufficiently enhance their interest. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the eighth invention to solve the problem,
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous for the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) and
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set set value, and
It is provided with a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value.
The suggestion effect executing means is set at least during the game until a predetermined period (for example, after the setting is changed until the variation display is executed 30 times) elapses after the set value is changed. It is possible to execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set values (see, for example, FIGS. 8-9 (A), (B), 8-29 (A), (B)).
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game in a predetermined period, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the eighth invention,
It is a gaming machine that can perform variable display and control it to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Variable display pattern determining means for determining the variable display pattern,
A variable display executing means for executing variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means is provided.
The variable display pattern determining means determines one of a plurality of variable display patterns at different ratios when the set value is changed and when the set value is not changed (for example, FIGS. 8-9 (A), B)),
It is described that the variable display executing means may execute variable display using a common background image when the set value is changed and when the set value is not changed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 3 of the eighth invention,
Variable display pattern determining means for determining the variable display pattern,
A variable display executing means for executing variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means is provided.
The variable display pattern determining means determines one of a plurality of variable display patterns at different ratios when the set value is set to the first set value and when the set value is set to the second set value by the setting means. (See, for example, FIGS. 8-9 (A), (B), etc.),
The variable display executing means can execute variable display using a common background image when the set value is set to the first set value and when the set value is set to the second set value by the setting means. However, according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 4 of the eighth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means is that a predetermined condition is satisfied within a predetermined period (for example, a big hit in a specific period, the number of times of execution of the reach effect or the pseudo continuous effect reaches the predetermined number, and a specific super reach effect. The suggestion effect can be executed based on the fact that the advance notice effect has been executed, etc. (for example, when a big hit occurs within a specific period, the suggestion effect during the big hit can be executed). See A) and (B))
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 5 of the eighth invention,
A game machine capable of playing a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball).
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, general winning opening 50A to general winning opening 50D, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first major winning opening, second major winning opening 712). A game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12) and
It is provided with an information display means (for example, display monitor 012IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means.
The information display means can display a set value (for example, a portion capable of displaying a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base on the display monitor 012IW029).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

The feature unit 099IW also includes the ninth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that the suggestive effect executed in the past cannot be confirmed and the interest cannot be sufficiently enhanced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the ninth invention to solve the problem,
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous for the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) and
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set set value, and
It is provided with a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value.
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 8-29 (A), (B), etc.).
A gaming machine is described that further includes a notification means (for example, a portion in which the second effect control CPU012IW120b executes step S012IWS516) capable of transmitting information regarding the executed suggestion effect. According to this, it is possible to confirm the suggestive effects performed in the past, and it is possible to enhance the game interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the ninth invention,
The notification means can notify the number of times the suggestion effect is executed (for example, a portion where the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes step S012IWS516).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the ninth invention,
The notification means can notify the content of the executed suggestion effect (for example, a portion where the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes step S012IWS516).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 4 of the ninth invention,
The notification means can notify information about the executed suggestion effect while waiting for a customer for whom the variable display is not executed (for example, a portion where the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes step S012IWS516).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 5 of the ninth invention,
An information generation means for generating information (for example, execution history information) regarding the executed suggestion effect, and
An image generation means for generating a specific image (for example, a two-dimensional code including execution history information) in which the information can be read by an imaging device,
It is described that the specific image may be provided with a display means (for example, an image display device 5) for displaying the specific image in a manner that can be captured by the image pickup device. According to such a configuration, the game is enjoyed. Can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 6 of the ninth invention,
A game machine capable of playing a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball).
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, general winning opening 50A to general winning opening 50D, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first major winning opening, second major winning opening 712). A game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12) and
It is provided with an information display means (for example, display monitor 012IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means.
The information display means can display a set value (for example, a portion capable of displaying a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base on the display monitor 012IW029).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

The feature unit 099IW also includes the tenth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that if the setting suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize due to other effects, the interest may be lowered. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the tenth invention to solve the problem,
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous for the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) and
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set set value, and
It is provided with a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value.
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 8-31 (A), (B), etc.).
When executed in parallel with the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize. Depending on the effect mode, the predetermined effect (for example, when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize) Predetermined effect execution means that can execute light guide plate effect, error display, etc.
When the suggestion effect is executed, the execution of the predetermined effect is further provided with a limiting means (for example, when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the accessory effect is restricted. (D)
A game machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the tenth invention,
When the execution timings of the suggestion effect and the predetermined effect overlap, the limiting means changes at least one of the execution timings of the suggestion effect and the predetermined effect (for example, one of them is executed during the fanfare period and the other is the ending). Change to run during the period)
It is stated that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 3 of the tenth invention,
The limiting means prohibits the execution of the predetermined effect when the suggestion effect is executed (for example, when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the character effect is prohibited. See FIG. 8-31 (D). )
It is stated that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 4 of the tenth invention,
When the suggestion effect is executed, the limiting means executes a predetermined effect in an effect mode in which the suggestion effect is not difficult to recognize (for example, the movable member 012IW101 is operated in an operation mode different from the usual one (for example, suggestion during a big hit). Control so that it does not stop at a position that overlaps with the dialogue image produced by the production))
It is stated that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 5 of the tenth invention,
Both the suggestive effect and the predetermined effect (for example, a fanfare effect for displaying a predetermined image on the image display device 5) include a display in one display means (for example, the image display device 5).
It is described that the above-mentioned one display means may display the display related to the suggestive effect with priority over the display related to the predetermined effect, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest. Can be done.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 6 of the tenth invention,
A game machine capable of playing a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball).
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, general winning opening 50A to general winning opening 50D, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first major winning opening, second major winning opening 712). A game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12) and
It is provided with an information display means (for example, display monitor 012IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means.
The information display means can display a set value (for example, a portion capable of displaying a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base on the display monitor 012IW029).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

The feature unit 099IW also includes the eleventh invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-2010902 has a problem that the execution of the setting suggestion effect, which is not preferable for the player, may reduce the interest. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the eleventh invention to solve the problem,
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous for the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) and
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set set value, and
It is provided with a setting suggestion execution means capable of executing a setting suggestion (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set setting value.
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different ratios according to the set set value (see, for example, FIGS. 8-31 (A), (B), etc.).
Predetermined notification means capable of executing predetermined notification in a manner in which it becomes difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect is recognized. A game machine that is characterized by having more difficult character effects, light guide plate effects, error displays, etc.) is described, and according to these features, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the eleventh invention,
It is described that the predetermined notification means may be capable of executing a predetermined notification (for example, an accessory effect) for operating the movable member (for example, the movable member 012IW101), and according to such a configuration. , The effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the eleventh invention,
A light guide plate having translucency capable of transmitting light (for example, a light guide plate 012IW103) and
It is provided with a light emitting body provided so that light can be incident from the end surface of the light guide plate.
The light guide plate is provided with a reflecting portion that reflects light incident on the inside of the light guide plate from the end surface of the light guide plate by the light emitting body and emits it to the front surface of the game machine.
The predetermined notification means is capable of executing a predetermined notification (for example, a light guide plate effect) that emits light from the reflection portion provided on the light guide plate to the front surface of the game machine by causing the light emitting body to emit light. It is described that it is also good, and according to such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 4 of the eleventh invention,
It is described that the predetermined notification means may be capable of executing the predetermined notification for displaying an error, and according to such a configuration, an error can be appropriately notified.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 5 of the eleventh invention,
The setting suggestion executing means includes the first setting suggestion (for example, the jackpot suggestion effect of the first effect mode. See FIGS. 8-31 (A) and (B)), which suggests that the setting is set to the first set value. , A second setting suggestion suggesting that the second set value, which is more advantageous to the player than the first set value, is set (for example, a jackpot suggestion effect of the third effect mode. FIG. 8-31 (Fig. 8-31). A) and (see (B)) can be executed,
When the first setting suggestion is executed, the predetermined notification means can execute the predetermined notification at a higher rate than when the second setting suggestion is executed (see, for example, FIG. 8-31 (E)).
It is stated that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 6 of the eleventh invention,
It is provided with a setting suggestion setting means that can set the execution ratio of the setting suggestion (for example, the setting screen is displayed after the power is turned on, and the operation means such as the push button 31B and the operation means (management) such as the switch provided inside the game machine. It is possible to change the settings related to the setting suggestion effect by operating)
It is stated that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 7 of the eleventh invention,
It is a game machine that displays variable identification information.
A variable display device capable of variably displaying the identification information by rotating a variable display member (for example, a drum-shaped or belt-shaped movable body) on which the identification information is arranged is provided.
The variable display device performs a specific operation in the first variable display of the identification information after the set value is changed.
It is described that the predetermined notification means may execute the predetermined notification at a high rate in the first variable display of the identification information after the set value is changed. According to such a configuration, the predetermined notification means may be executed. It is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 8 of the eleventh invention,
A game machine capable of playing a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball).
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, general winning opening 50A to general winning opening 50D, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first major winning opening, second major winning opening 712). A game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12) and
It is provided with an information display means (for example, display monitor 012IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means.
The information display means can display a set value (for example, a portion capable of displaying a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base on the display monitor 012IW029).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

The feature unit 099IW also includes the twelfth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the game machines described in JP-A-2010-2010902, there is a problem that the gambling property may become too high at a setting having a high advantage. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the twelfth invention to solve the problem,
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous for the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) and
It is provided with a game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set set value.
The predetermined control period (for example, fanfare period, interval period, ending period, etc. during the jackpot game) in the advantageous state differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 8-8).
A game machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the twelfth invention,
The fanfare control period in the advantageous state differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 8-8 (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 3 of the twelfth invention,
The interval control period in the advantageous state differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 8-8 (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 4 of the twelfth invention,
The ending control period in the advantageous state differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 8-8 (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 5 of the twelfth invention,
It is a game machine that can play games using the game value.
A game value giving means that gives a game value based on the establishment of specific conditions,
In the setting means, the first set value (for example, the set value 3) and the size of the game value given by the game value giving means are larger than the first set value as the size of the game value used in the game. It can be set to a second set value (for example, set value 1) that occupies a high proportion.
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state is longer when the second set value is set than when the first set value is set (for example, FIGS. 8-8 (A) and 8-8 (B)). reference)
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 6 of the twelfth invention,
It is described that a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a suggestion effect during a big hit) suggesting a set set value may be provided in a predetermined control period in an advantageous state. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the interest of a predetermined control period in an advantageous state.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 7 of the twelfth invention,
Equipped with a production execution means that can execute the production
The effect executing means makes it possible to execute a common effect (for example, a common fanfare effect, an interval effect, an ending effect, etc.) in a predetermined control period in an advantageous state regardless of a set value. It is described that the configuration may be performed, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the interest of a predetermined control period in an advantageous state.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 8 of the twelfth invention,
It is stated that the predetermined control period in the advantageous state may be set in advance according to the set value, and according to such a configuration, the gambling becomes too high. It is possible to prevent it from being stored.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 9 of the twelfth invention,
It is a game machine that can control multiple types of advantageous states.
The game control means can control any of the plurality of types of advantageous states (for example, jackpot types A to C) at different ratios based on the set value.
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state differs depending on the type of the advantageous state (see, for example, FIG. 8-8 (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of the means 10 of the twelfth invention,
A game machine capable of playing a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball).
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, general winning opening 50A to general winning opening 50D, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first major winning opening, second major winning opening 712). A game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12) and
It is provided with an information display means (for example, display monitor 012IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means.
The information display means can display a set value (for example, a portion capable of displaying a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base on the display monitor 012IW029).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

The feature unit 099IW also includes the thirteenth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the game machines described in JP-A-2010-2010902, there is a problem that the gambling property may become too high at a setting having a high advantage. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the thirteenth invention to solve the problem,
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous for the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) and
It is provided with a game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set set value.
The predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) related to the variable display differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 8-10).
A game machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the thirteenth invention,
The variable display period differs depending on the set value (see, for example, FIG. 8-10).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 3 of the thirteenth invention,
It is stated that the display result of the variable display may be displayed differently depending on the set value, and such a configuration makes the gambling too high. Can be prevented.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 4 of the thirteenth invention,
It is a game machine that can play games using the game value.
A game value giving means that gives a game value based on the establishment of specific conditions,
In the setting means, the first set value (for example, the set value 3) and the size of the game value given by the game value giving means are larger than the first set value as the size of the game value used in the game. It can be set to a second set value (for example, set value 1) that occupies a high proportion.
The predetermined control period for the variable display is longer when it is set to the second set value than when it is set to the first set value (see, for example, FIG. 8-10).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 5 of the thirteenth invention,
It is stated that the predetermined control period for the variable display may be set in advance according to the set value, and according to such a configuration, the gambling becomes too high. It is possible to prevent it from being stored.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 6 of the thirteenth invention,
Variable display pattern determining means for determining the variable display pattern,
A variable display executing means for executing variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means is provided.
The variable display pattern determining means determines one of a plurality of variable display patterns having different variable display periods at different ratios according to a set value (see, for example, FIG. 8-10).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 7 of the thirteenth invention,
A game machine capable of playing a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball).
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, general winning opening 50A to general winning opening 50D, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first major winning opening, second major winning opening 712). A game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12) and
It is provided with an information display means (for example, display monitor 012IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means.
The information display means can display a set value (for example, a portion capable of displaying a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base on the display monitor 012IW029).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

In this feature unit 099IW, the case where the set value can be set in three stages of the set value "1" to "3" is shown, but the setting is not limited to such a mode, and for example, four or more stages are set. It may be configured to be settable to a value, or may be configured to be configurable to a two-step setting value. In this case, for example, the setting value can be set in 6 steps, and when the setting value is "1", the expectation for the big hit (reliability) is the lowest, and when the setting value is "6", the expectation for the big hit (reliability) is the lowest. It may be configured to have the highest reliability).

The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiment examples described later.

Further, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification, and the configurations shown in the following embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiment and the following-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not considered to be restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display and is a power source. The means (for example, a power supply board), the first control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11) that receives power supply from the power supply means and controls, and the power supply from the power supply means. A second control means (for example, a second effect control CPU012IW120b mounted on the second effect control board 012IW12b) that controls based on instruction information from the first control means, and a power supply supplied to the second control means. Is monitored and the monitoring means (for example, the power supply supplied to the second effect control board 012IW12b) is monitored, and when the power supply voltage is less than a predetermined value (for example, + 8V), the second effect is produced. A power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127 that outputs a power supply cutoff signal to the control CPU 012IW120b) and a storage means that can retain the stored contents even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped (for example, the backup data memory 099IW210A of the backup memory board 099IW14). ~ 210D), and the second control means executes different start-up processes in response to a notification from the monitoring means at the start of control (for example, a power off signal is input from the power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127 at the start of control). If so, the start of control is waited until the input of the power cutoff signal is stopped. The portion where the second effect control CPU012IW120b executes the processing of steps 099IWS001 and 099IWS002. On the other hand, the power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127 at the start of control. When the power cutoff signal is not input from, the log information including the acquired date and time information as the system reset date and time of the second effect control board 012IW12b is stored in the log area without waiting for the start of control. When the effect control CPU 012IW120b executes the processing of steps 099IWS001 and 099IWS003), when the monitoring means notifies that the power supply voltage of the supplied power supply has changed from less than a predetermined value to more than the predetermined value (for example, When the power supply cutoff signal is input from the power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127 at the start of control, and then the input of the power supply cutoff signal is stopped), predetermined information regarding activation (for example, power on) based on the instruction information from the first control means. Date and time, setting change start date and time, setting confirmation start date and time, RAM clear date (Time, etc.) is stored in the storage means (for example, the part where the second effect control CPU012IW120b executes processing such as step 099IWS205, step 012IWS802, step 012IWS805, step 012IWS809), and further, the movement of the player can be detected. Detection means (for example, stick controller 31A, controller sensor unit 35A, etc.) and specific display means capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to variable display (for example, active display area 87AKA1, first hold display area 87AKAB1, second hold display area). Based on the detection result of 87AKB2, etc.), the promotion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes step 87AKS051 of the effect processing during variable display) that can execute the promotion effect that promotes the movement of the player, and the detection means. An operation effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes step 87AKS053 of the effect processing during variable display) and a predetermined effect executing means (for example, a predetermined effect executing means that can execute a predetermined effect during execution of the variable display). The specific display means includes a plurality of display modes (for example, a display image using the display image 87AKC4) including a specific mode (for example, a red display using the display image 87AKC4) and the effect control CPU 120 for executing the effect processing step 87AKS049 during variable display. A specific display can be displayed by any one of 87AKC1 to 87AKC4 (display color, etc.), and the promotion effect executing means includes a plurality of effects including a special mode (for example, a large V-con display using the display image 87AKF3). The promotion effect can be executed by any one of the modes (for example, the size of the V-con display according to the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3), and the predetermined effect execution means is the “extreme heat” using the predetermined mode (for example, the display image 87AKE3). !! !! The predetermined effect can be executed by any one of a plurality of effect modes (for example, a message corresponding to the display images 87AKE1 to 87AKE3) including the message of the specific display, and the predetermined effect is determined at different ratios according to the display mode of the specific display. A predetermined effect is executed depending on the mode (see, for example, 87AK41, a determination example of the cut-in effect in FIG. 10-12), and a promotion effect is executed at a different ratio according to the effect mode of the predetermined effect (for example, FIG. 10-). (Refer to 87AK51, an example of determining the promotion effect according to the cut-in effect in 13), the promotion is controlled in an advantageous state at different ratios according to the effect mode of the promotion effect (for example, promotion according to the variable display result in FIG. 10-13). (Refer to 87AK51, a determination example of the production) A game machine can be mentioned.

According to such a configuration, the optimum processing can be executed depending on the situation. In addition, it is possible to appropriately raise the expectation of the player by directing and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, a detection means that can detect the movement of the player, a specific display means that can display a specific display corresponding to the variable display, a promotion effect execution means that can execute a promotion effect that promotes the movement of the player, and a detection. A second operation effect executing means capable of executing an operation effect based on the detection result of the means and a predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect during execution of the variable display are second based on instruction information from the first control means. When the control is performed by the control means, the time until the initialization process is executed in response to the notification from the monitoring means or the log area at the start of the control of the second control means that controls each effect executing means or the like. Since the stored contents (contents that can distinguish whether the control start of the second control means is due to the system reset of the second control means or the power-on or power-on recovery) are changed, until the control start. It is possible to optimally process the storage of time and control history.

Further, as an example of a form of a gaming machine that can execute the optimum processing according to the situation and can appropriately raise the expectation of the player by directing and improve the game entertainment, variable display is performed. , A game machine (for example, pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous for the player, and a detection means (for example, stick controller 31A, controller) that can detect the movement of the player. Sensor unit 35A, etc.), specific display means capable of displaying specific display corresponding to variable display (for example, active display area 87AKA1, first hold display area 87AKAB1, second hold display area 87AKB2, etc.), and the player's operation. A promotion effect executing means (for example, a production control CPU 120 that executes step 87AKS051 of the effect processing during variable display) that can execute the promotion effect and an operation effect that can execute the operation effect based on the detection result of the detection means. Execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes step 87AKS053 of the variable display effect process) and predetermined effect execution means (for example, step 87AKS049 of the variable display effect process) that can execute a predetermined effect while the variable display is being executed. The specific display means includes a CPU 120 for effect control to be executed), and the specific display means has a display color corresponding to a plurality of display modes (for example, display images 87AKC1 to 87AKC4) including a specific mode (for example, a red display using the display image 87AKC4). The specific display can be displayed by any one of the above-mentioned specific displays, and the promotion effect executing means has a plurality of effect modes (for example, display image 87AKF1) including a special mode (for example, a large V-con display using the display image 87AKF3). The promotion effect can be executed by any one of (the size of the V-con display according to 87AKF3, etc.), and the predetermined effect execution means is a predetermined mode (for example, “super heat !!” using the display image 87AKE3). The predetermined effect can be executed by any one of a plurality of effect modes (for example, a message corresponding to the display images 87AKE1 to 87AKE3) including a message, etc., and the predetermined effect can be executed at different rates depending on the display mode of the specific display. The predetermined effect is executed according to the predetermined mode (see, for example, 87AK41 of the determination example of the cut-in effect in FIG. 10-12), and the promotion effect is executed at a different ratio according to the effect mode of the predetermined effect. (For example, a promotion effect corresponding to the cut-in effect in FIG. 10-13. (Refer to the determination example 87AK51), the advantageous state is controlled at different ratios according to the effect mode of the promotion effect (see, for example, the determination example 87AK51 of the promotion effect according to the variable display result in FIG. 10-13). A game machine can be mentioned. Hereinafter, an example of a form example of these game machines will be described as another form example.

(Explanation of features related to set values)
Hereinafter, the feature portion related to the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

Although not shown, the main board 11 of the pachinko game machine 1 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 in a state of being housed in a board case configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. ing. Further, although not shown, the main board 11 has a lock switch for switching the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a changeable set value change state, and a jackpot which will be described later in the set value change state. A setting changeover switch that functions as a setting switch for changing a set value such as a winning probability (ball output rate) and an open sensor that detects the opening of a gaming machine frame are provided. The set value change state in the present embodiment is also a state in which the staff of the game hall or the like can confirm the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (set value confirmation state).

Operation units such as these lock switches and setting changeover switches that can be operated by the staff of the amusement park and the like are provided in the setting changeover main body unit and are housed in the board case together with the main board 11. The lock switch and the setting changeover switch are exposed to the back side through an opening formed in the back surface of the board case so that the lock switch and the setting changeover switch can be operated without opening the board case.

A board case containing a lock switch and a setting changeover switch is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, the lock switch and the setting changeover switch are extremely difficult or impossible to operate when the game machine frame is closed, and can be operated by opening the game machine frame using a predetermined door key. .. Further, since the lock switch requires the operation of the setting key possessed by the staff of the game hall or the like, only the administrator who possesses the setting key can operate the lock switch. The lock switch is also a switch capable of performing an ON / OFF switching operation by a setting key. In the present embodiment, the mode in which the door key and the setting key are separate keys is illustrated, but these may be shared by one key.

A display monitor capable of displaying set values and base values is arranged on the board case. The display monitor is connected to the main board 11 and is arranged on the upper part of the board case. That is, the display monitor is arranged in front of the main board 11 in the board case when visually recognizing it. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the gaming machine frame is not opened, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized is the back surface side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame is opened. This is the front of the pachinko machine 1 and is different from the front of the pachinko machine 1. As described above, the display monitor is arranged in front of the game board 2 when the back side of the game board 2 is visually recognized when the frame for the game machine is open. However, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

The display monitor includes a first display unit, a second display unit, a third display unit, and a fourth display unit. The first display unit to the fourth display unit of the display monitor are each composed of seven segments composed of seven segments drawing the character "8" and dots arranged at the lower right side of the seven segments. .. The first display unit to the fourth display unit of the display monitor can be lit or blinked in various colors such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white. It is also possible to display these colors in different colors or so-called rainbows while changing them in a very short cycle.

A game information display unit may be provided as a predetermined position of the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1, for example, at a lower left position of the game area. A round display, a right-handed lamp, a probability change lamp, and a time saving lamp are collectively arranged in the game information display unit. The round display can display the number of rounds and the type of big hit in the big hit game during the big hit game. The right-handed lamp lights up in a game state in which the game ball is launched toward the right game area, such as a low-accuracy high-base state as a time-saving state or a big hit game state. The probabilistic lamp lights up when it is in the probabilistic state. The time saving lamp lights up when the time saving state is reached. The round display is composed of 5 segments (LEDs).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured such that the winning probability (ball output rate) of a big hit changes according to a set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is changed by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. The set value is composed of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is. Further, as for the set value, 6 which is the largest value is the most disadvantageous value for the game field side, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is the more advantageous value for the game field side. If the ball output rate changes according to the set value, for example, the jackpot probability may change depending on the set value, and although the jackpot probability is constant, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state changes depending on the set value. May be good. As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured so that any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player can be set. The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the side of the main board 11 to the side of the effect control board 12.

9-1 (A) and 9-1 (B) are explanatory views showing a display result determination table. Of these, FIG. 9-1 (A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special figure used when the variable special figure is the first special figure, and FIG. 9-2 (A) shows the variable special figure. A configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used when the figure is the second special figure is shown. The display result judgment table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit judgment value compared with the random number value MR1 for each set value is set as a variable display result (special figure display result) of a special symbol. Is. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. The hit determination value in the display result determination table is also assigned to the special figure display result in the range of 0 to 65535. The display result judgment table is not limited to the one using individual display result judgment tables for the first special figure and the second special figure, and the display result judgment common to the first special figure and the second special figure. A table may be used.

Among the cases where the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Among the cases where the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the display result is 1020 to 1346. Is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Among the cases where the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Among the cases where the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1346. Are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses".

Among the cases where the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result when the game state is the probabilistic state in the case where the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, 1020 to Up to 1383 is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Among the cases where the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Among the cases where the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020-1383. Are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses".

Among the cases where the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020-1272 is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Among the cases where the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1429. Is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Among the cases where the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020-1272 is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Among the cases where the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1429. Are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses".

Among the cases where the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Among the cases where the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1487. Is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Among the cases where the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Among the cases where the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1487. Are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses".

Among the cases where the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Among the cases where the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1556. Is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Among the cases where the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Among the cases where the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1556. Is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss".

Among the cases where the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Among the cases where the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1674. Is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Among the cases where the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Among the cases where the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1674. Is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss".

In each display result judgment table, when the game state is in the probability change state (high probability state), more judgment values than in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state) are the special figures of "big hit". It is assigned to the display result. As a result, in the probability change state (high probability state) in which the probability change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is set as a "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Then, the probability of being determined (for example, 1/300 when the set value is 1, 1/280 when the set value is 2, 1/260 when the set value is 3, and 1 / when the set value is 4). Compared to 240, 1/220 when the set value is 5, and 1/200 when the set value is 6, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled as a "big hit" and controlled to the big hit gaming state is higher. (For example, 1/200 when the set value is 1, 1/180 when the set value is 2, 1/160 when the set value is 3, 1/140 when the set value is 4, and the set value is When it is 5, it is 1/120, and when the set value is 6, it is 1/100). Each display so that the probability of being determined to control the jackpot gaming state is higher when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probability changing state (high probability state) than in the normal state or the time saving state. In the result determination table, the determination value is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state.

The magnification of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state is different according to each set value (for example, if the setting value is 1, the magnification of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state). Is 1.5 times, and if the set value is 2, the ratio of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is about 1.56 times, and if the setting value is 3, the normal state or the time saving state The magnification of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in is not limited to 1.625 times), and the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state at each set value. The multiples of the jackpot probability in the above may be set to be constant (for example, 5 times).

In each first special figure display result determination table, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment value is assigned. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-1 (A), in the display result determination table for the first special figure, the special figure display result is set as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or the set value. The probability of being determined to control the gaming state is set to 1/200. On the other hand, in each display result determination table for the second special figure, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the first special regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment values are assigned so that the values are the same as those in the display result judgment table for figures. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-1 (B), in the display result determination table for the second special figure, the special figure display result is set as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or the set value. The probability of being determined to control the game state is set to 1/100.

Regardless of the set value, the special figure display result is not limited to the form in which the probability determined to control the small hit game state as "small hit" is the same probability, and the special figure display result is displayed according to the set value. The probability of being determined to control the small hit gaming state as a "small hit" may be different. It is not limited to the form in which the probability of being determined to control the small hit gaming state by setting the special figure display result as "small hit" according to the variable special map is different, and the special figure display result is " The probability of being determined to control the small hit gaming state as "small hit" may be the same probability.

9-2 to 9-5 show a numerical range of hit determination values assigned to "big hit" and "small hit" in each display result determination table. Of these, FIG. 9-2 shows a numerical range of hit determination values corresponding to the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. FIG. 9-3 shows the numerical range of the hit determination value corresponding to the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the probability change state. FIG. 9-4 shows a numerical range of hit determination values corresponding to the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. FIG. 9-5 shows the numerical range of the hit determination value corresponding to the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is the probability change state.

As shown in FIG. 9-2, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 102 to 1237 of the hit judgment values is a big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judging. When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 to set. In the case of the value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively. As described above, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, when the set value is 1 among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, While only the numbers in the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", when the set value is 2 or more, the numerical value in the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range is " It is assigned to "big hit". The non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases. Therefore, the jackpot probability becomes higher as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value (big hit reference value) of the jackpot judgment value. I will go.

Further, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, in this case, 102 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, while the small hit judgment value is the case where the set value is 6. In a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value (1020 to 1346), 32767 is set as a reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit determination value in the range of 32767 to 33094. As a result, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

As shown in FIG. 9-3, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, the range of the hit determination values from 1020 to 1346 determines the big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for. When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020-1346 is assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 to set. In the case of the value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the set value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the set value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for the set value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively. In this way, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the probabilistic state, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, when the set value is 1, the common numerical range While only the numerical values in (1020 to 1346) are assigned to "big hit", when the set value is 2 or more, the numerical value in the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range becomes "big hit". Assigned. The non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1347 as the value of the set value increases. Therefore, the jackpot probability becomes higher as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value (big hit reference value) of the jackpot judgment value. I will go.

Further, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit determination value is the same as in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of these, the range from 32767 to 33094 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, in this case, 102 to 1674 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, while the small hit judgment value is the case where the set value is 6. In a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value (1020 to 1674), 32767 is set as a reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit determination value in the range of 32767 to 33094. As a result, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

As shown in FIG. 9-4, in the display result judgment table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 102 to 1237 of the hit judgment values is a big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judging. When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 to set. In the case of the value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively. In this way, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, when the set value is 1 among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, While only the numbers in the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", when the set value is 2 or more, the numerical value in the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range is " It is assigned to "big hit". The non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases. Therefore, the jackpot probability becomes higher as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value (big hit reference value) of the jackpot judgment value. I will go.

Further, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, in this case, 102 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, while the small hit judgment value is the big hit when the set value is 6. In a numerical range different from the range of determination values (1020 to 1346), 32767 is set as a reference value (small hit reference value) for small hit determination values in the range of 32767 to 33421. As a result, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

As shown in FIG. 9-5, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, the range of the hit determination values from 1020 to 1346 determines the big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for. When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020-1346 is assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 to set. In the case of the value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the set value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the set value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for the set value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively. As described above, in the display result determination table for FIG. 2 when the game state is the probabilistic state, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, when the set value is 1, the common numerical range ( While only the numerical values in 1020 to 1346) are assigned to "big hit", when the set value is 2 or more, the numerical value in the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range is assigned to "big hit". Has been done. The non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1347 as the value of the set value increases. Therefore, the jackpot probability becomes higher as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value (big hit reference value) of the jackpot judgment value. I will go.

Further, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit determination value is the same as the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of these, the range from 32767 to 33421 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, in this case, 102 to 1674 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, while the small hit judgment value is the big hit when the set value is 6. In a numerical range different from the range of determination values (1020 to 1674), 32767 is set as a reference value (small hit reference value) for small hit determination values in the range of 32767 to 33421. As a result, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In each display result judgment table, regardless of the game state and the set value, the judgment included in the continuous numerical range of 1 consisting of the common numerical range or the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range with the hit judgment value 1020 as a reference. The value is set as the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and the judgment value included in the continuous numerical range of 1 (common numerical range) based on the hit judgment value of 32767 is used as the small hit judgment regardless of the game state and the set value. The variable display result is judged as the numerical range of the value.

In each display result judgment table, when the fluctuation special figure is the same, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same regardless of the game state (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same). is there. In addition, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value differs depending on whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure (small in the display result judgment table for the first special figure). While the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the hit judgment value is 328, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the display result judgment table for the second special figure is about 655. On the other hand, the numerical range of the small hit determination value itself is set to 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value).

In each gaming state, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the probability that it is determined that the special figure display result is controlled to the jackpot gaming state as "big hit" is the lowest, and the value of the set value is Judgment values are assigned so that the larger the value, the higher the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "big hit" and controlled to the big hit gaming state (big hit probability: setting value 6> setting value 5> setting value 4> setting). Value 3> Set value 2> Set value 1). The CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and when the value of the random number value MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the jackpot, the CPU 103 hits the jackpot (big hit) with respect to the special symbol. It is decided to be A to jackpot C). Further, when the random number value MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. In this way, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is decided with the probability according to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIG. 9-1 indicates the probability of a big hit (ratio) and the probability of a small hit (ratio). Further, determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control the big hit game state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control the small hit game state, but the stop in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It also means deciding whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

The setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are not limited to a total of 6 setting values 1 to 6, and the setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are 5 or less. It may be 7 or more. The larger the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player (the probability of big hits increases, the specific big hit type can be easily determined, etc.), and the pachinko game is not limited to the form. The smaller the set value set in the machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be.

While the jackpot probability changes according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game playability itself is not limited to a form that does not change, and the game is played according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The sex may change. For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is 65%, which is the game property (so-called probability variation loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is set in the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a probabilistic state based on passing through, the game property (so-called V) in which the ratio of the game ball passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game is different according to the fluctuation special figure. Probability variation type), and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time reduction control). It may be a game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) in which the ball is controlled to a big hit gaming state based on passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the game playability is the same, but the jackpot probability and the small hit are higher than when these set values are any of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small while the probability is high (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). When the playability is changed according to the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, the predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as the effect switch (to execute the predetermined effect each time the game ball passes through the predetermined area. When the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is used as a game switch (for controlling the game state to the probability change state or the jackpot game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch). It may be used as a switch).

Next, the processing in the game control main processing in the feature unit related to the set value will be described. FIG. 9-6 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing performed in the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103. The processing in the game control main processing is, for example, in the game control main processing shown in FIG. 3, after the interrupt is set to prohibit, the stack pointer is set, the built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output port, etc. ), The setting for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like may be executed after the initial setting is performed.

When the processing in the game control main processing is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko game machine 1 is activated while the clear switch is being operated. (Step S1A). Before the process of step S1A, a process of clearing the RAM clear flag indicating that the RAM clear process has been executed according to a predetermined condition may be performed.

When the clear switch is ON (step S1A; Yes), the RAM clear flag is set (step S2A) and the process proceeds to step S3A. When the clear switch is OFF (step S1A; No), step S2A The process proceeds to step S3A without executing the process of.

In step S3A, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch is ON (step S3A). When the lock switch is ON (step S3A; Yes), it is further determined whether or not the release sensor is ON (step S4A). When the release sensor is ON, that is, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with the lock switch ON and the game machine frame open (step S4A; Yes), is the RAM clear flag set? Whether or not it is determined (step S5A).

When the RAM clear flag is set (step S5A), the set value change process (step S6A) for changing the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed to proceed to the process of step S8A. When the RAM clear flag is not set (step A5A; No), the set value confirmation process (step S7A) for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed to perform the process of step S8A. move on. If the lock switch is OFF (step S3A; No) or the release sensor is OFF (step S4A; No), the process proceeds to step S8A as it is.

The setting value change process is performed by turning on the lock switch and the clear switch while the gaming machine frame is open when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is once turned off (power cut) and then restarted. This is the process to be performed. In the set value change process, a process of transmitting a set value change start notification command to the effect control board 12, a process of updating the content of the address F001 in the RAM 102 as a temporary set value based on the operation of the setting changeover switch, A process of updating and storing a temporary set value as an actual set value at the address F000 in the RAM 102 and a process of transmitting a set value change end notification command to the effect control board 12 are performed according to the state of the lock switch.

In the set value confirmation process, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is once turned off (power cut) and then restarted, the lock switch 207SG051 is turned on (the clear switch is off) with the gaming machine frame open. It is a process performed by doing. In the set value confirmation process, a process of transmitting a set value confirmation start notification command to the effect control board 12, a display of the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 is started on the display monitor, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided. The process of outputting a security signal to a management device such as a management computer of a game hall via a terminal board (not shown), the display or the like is terminated according to the state of the lock switch, and the setting is set for the effect control board 12. The process of sending the value confirmation end notification command is performed.

In the set value change process and the set value confirmation process, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the round display are turned on from the start of each process, and the first hold display 25A, By starting the second hold display 25B and the blinking of the right-handed lamp, the player, the staff of the game hall, etc. are changing or setting the set value of the pachinko game machine 1 from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1. It suffices if it is possible to recognize that the value is being confirmed. Further, the lighting pattern of the segment constituting the round display may be any mode as long as it does not correspond to any of the plurality of jackpot types. Further, the segments constituting the round display may be lit in different modes at the start of the set value change process and the start of the set value confirmation process.

In step S8A, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether or not the RAM 102 is cleared (whether or not the RAM clear process (step S9A) is executed) when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started this time. (Step S8A). If the RAM clear flag is set (step S8A; Yes), the RAM clear process (step S9A) is executed and then the process proceeds to step S10A. If the RAM clear flag is not set (step S8A; No), the RAM is cleared. The process proceeds to step S10A without executing the process (step S9A). Then, as another process, for example, depending on whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, the CPU 103 recovers whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start or in a state before the power failure (starts by a hot start). ), Performs processing according to each (step S10A), and ends the processing in the game control main processing.

In the RAM clear processing, data other than the set value and the RAM clear flag is cleared by storing "00H" in an address other than the first address (F000) in which the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stored. Processing is done. In the RAM clear processing, instead of clearing the data other than the set value, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, the predetermined address of the RAM 102 (the address F000 in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment). It may be possible to clear only the game information stored in (F003 or later of ~ FXXX).

The process of step S10A includes a process of blinking all the segments constituting the display monitor for a period (for example, 5 seconds) of the cold start notification timer at the time of calling and starting the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, only a part of the segments may be blinked, or at least a part of all the segments constituting the display monitor may be turned on. Further, in the processing in the game control main processing, for example, based on the fact that an abnormal setting value is stored in the RAM 102 (setting value abnormality error), the recovery from the power failure during the setting change, and the like. A process of transmitting an error designation command according to an abnormality of the set value to the effect control board 12 may be included. Further, as a notification (error notification) of the occurrence of an abnormal setting value error or recovery from a power failure during setting change, the first display unit, the second display unit, the third display unit, and the fourth display that constitute the display monitor are displayed. A process of displaying "E." may be performed in each of the parts. Further, the CPU 103 blinks all the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and manages the game hall via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a computer, and thereafter, the CPU 103 displays until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off (until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off by the operation of a clerk at the game hall). The occurrence notification of an error may be executed by the monitor, the first special symbol display device 4A, and the second special symbol display device 4B.

In the process in the game control main process, when the lock switch is determined to be ON in step S3A and then the release sensor is determined to be OFF in step S4A, the opening of the game machine frame is detected. Since the operation of the lock switch is detected without this, an error designation command may be transmitted to the effect control board 12 and an error notification may be performed by a display monitor or the like. The process of step S10A may include a process of transmitting a set value notification command to the effect control board 12. The set value notification command may be transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by the process of step S10A regardless of whether or not the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. As a result, on the side of the effect control board 12, when the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on, the set value can be identifiable and stored regardless of whether or not the set value of the pachinko game machine 1 is changed. it can.

When an abnormal set value is set or when the power failure during the change of the set value is restored, the display monitor, the first special symbol display device 4A, and the second special symbol display device 4B notify the occurrence of an error. By executing the above, the staff of the game hall can recognize that the pachinko game machine 1 has recovered from the occurrence of an error or the power failure during the change of the set value from both the front side and the back side. .. In addition, the security of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be improved by making it possible for the management device of the game hall to recognize the occurrence of an error in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the recovery from the power failure while changing the set value. Will be.

As described above, the display result determination table included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is, as shown in FIG. 9-1, up to 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values regardless of the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The range of is set as a common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 2 to 6 (when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 1), the value corresponding to each set value is set from 1238. The range up to is set as a non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 2 to 6, the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value are continuous with the hit judgment value 1020 as the big hit reference value. Since it is set to be in a numerical range, when determining whether or not it is controlled to the jackpot gaming state, the value of the random number MR1 is from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to each set value. It may be determined whether or not it is within the numerical range up to. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls in an advantageous state.

Since the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value within the range of 0 to 65535 is set at one place with 1020 as the reference value, it is disturbed as compared with the case where a plurality of numerical ranges of the advantageous state judgment value are provided. It is not necessary to determine whether or not the numerical value MR1 is within the numerical range of the jackpot determination value (whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state) multiple times. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls in an advantageous state.

As shown in FIG. 9-1, in the display result determination table, the jackpot determination is performed using the hit determination value of 1020 as the jackpot reference value regardless of whether the game state is the normal state, the time saving state, or the probability variation state. Since the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the values are set to be continuous numerical ranges, when determining whether or not the jackpot game state is controlled, the value of the random number MR1 is Whether it is within the numerical range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to the normal state or the time saving state, and whether it is within the range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to the probabilistic state. It may be judged whether or not. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls the jackpot gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 9-1, in the display result judgment table, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value depending on whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. (While the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the first special figure display result judgment table is 328, the small hit judgment value in the second special figure display result judgment table The number of judgment values included in the numerical range of is 655, which is about twice.) On the other hand, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value itself is set to 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value). Therefore, when determining whether or not the small hit game state is controlled, the value of the random number MR1 is within the numerical range from 32767 to the maximum value of the small hit determination value according to the fluctuation special chart. It suffices to judge whether or not it is. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls the small hit game state.

As shown in FIG. 9-1, the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the display result determination table is the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is set to a numerical range (32767 to 33094 or 32767 to 33421) different from the numerical range of the judgment value of the jackpot in the case of 6. Therefore, when determining whether or not the game is controlled by the jackpot game state, it is determined whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the numerical range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range corresponding to each set value. When determining whether or not the small hit game state is controlled, the random number value MR1 is within the range from 32767 to the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the fluctuation special chart. It may be determined whether or not. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls the big hit game state and the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls the small hit game state.

(Explanation of feature parts 87AK to 89AK)
FIG. 10-1 shows a configuration example 87AKP0 of the screen display in the image display device 5 with respect to the feature units 87AK to 89AK. In the configuration example 87AKP0, an active display area 87AKA1, a first hold display area 87AKB1, and a second hold display area 87AKB2 are provided on the screen of the image display device 5. In the active display area 87AKA1, active display is performed by displaying an effect image corresponding to the variable display during execution. In the first hold display area 87AKB1, the hold display is performed by displaying the effect image corresponding to the variable display in which the execution is held according to the first hold storage number. In the second hold display area 87AKB2, the hold display is performed by displaying the effect image corresponding to the variable display in which the execution is held according to the second hold storage number. As described above, in the active display area 87AKA1, the first hold display area 87AKAB1, and the second hold display area 87AKAB2, active display and hold display which are specific displays based on the information related to the variable display are possible. The hold display in the first hold display area 87AKB1 is also referred to as a "first hold display", and the hold display in the second hold display area 87AKB2 is also referred to as a "second hold display".

The display area of the first hold display area 87AKB1 may be configured so that, for example, the first hold display is right-justified. In the first hold display area 87AKB1, four display parts corresponding to the upper limit of the first hold storage number "4" are provided, and the hold numbers "1", "2", and "3" are provided in order from the right end. , "4" may be associated with it. Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first start winning opening, the number of first reserved memories corresponding to the first special figure game is increased. At this time, if there is no other first hold display in the first hold display area 87AKB1, the increased first hold is made at the rightmost display portion corresponding to the hold number "1" in the first hold display area 87AKB1. As a hold display corresponding to the number of memories, a display of an effect image showing a new first hold display is added. If there is another 1st hold display in the 1st hold display area 87AKB1, the display is hidden on the left side of the display part where the other 1st hold display is performed in the 1st hold display area 87AKB1. In the part (display part corresponding to any of the hold numbers "2" to "4"), the effect image showing a new first hold display as the hold display corresponding to the increased first hold storage number. Add a display. When there is one or more first hold displays in the first hold display area 87AKB1 and a new first special figure game is started, the hold number corresponds to "1" in the first hold display area 87AKB1. At the rightmost display part, the first hold display is erased (digested). At this time, if there is a first hold display in the display part corresponding to the other hold numbers "2" to "4", those first hold displays are moved to the right side in the direction of the erased display part ( Shift). As described above, in the first hold display area 87AKB1, the first hold display corresponding to the first special figure game whose execution is held without being started is possible according to the number of first hold storages. Further, in the first hold display area 87AKB1, by displaying the effect image to be the hold display image, the first hold display included in the hold display corresponding to the variable display that has not been started is displayed as the corresponding display related to the variable display. It can be carried out.

The second hold display area 87AKB2 may be configured as a display area so that, for example, the second hold display is left-justified. In the second hold display area 87AKB2, four display parts corresponding to the upper limit of the second hold storage number "4" are provided, and the hold numbers "1", "2", and "3" are provided in order from the left end. , "4" may be associated with it. Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second start winning opening, the number of second reserved memories corresponding to the second special figure game increases. At this time, if there is no other second hold display in the second hold display area 87AKB2, the increased second hold is displayed at the leftmost display portion corresponding to the hold number "1" in the second hold display area 87AKB2. As a hold display corresponding to the number of stored items, a display of an effect image showing a new second hold display is added. If there is another second hold display in the second hold display area 87AKB2, the display is hidden to the right of the display part where the other second hold display is performed in the second hold display area 87AKB2. A production image showing a new second hold display as a hold display corresponding to the increased second hold storage number at the part (display part corresponding to any of the hold numbers "2" to "4"). Add a display. When there is one or more second hold displays in the second hold display area 87AKB2 and a new second special figure game is started, the hold number corresponds to "1" in the second hold display area 87AKB2. The second hold display is erased (digested) at the leftmost display site. At this time, if there is a second hold display in the display part corresponding to the other hold numbers "2" to "4", those second hold displays are moved to the left side in the direction of the erased display part ( Shift). As described above, in the second hold display area 87AKB2, the second hold display corresponding to the second special figure game whose execution is held without being started is possible according to the second hold storage number. Further, in the second hold display area 87AKB2, by displaying the effect image to be the hold display image, the second hold display included in the hold display corresponding to the variable display that has not been started is displayed as the corresponding display related to the variable display. It can be carried out.

In the active display area 87AKA1, the active display corresponding to the first hold display deleted (digested) in the first hold display area 87AKAB1 is started in response to the start of the first special figure game. Further, in the active display area 87AKA1, in response to the start of the second special figure game, the active display corresponding to the second hold display erased (digested) in the second hold display area 87AKAB2 is started. In the active display area 87AKA1, by displaying the effect image that becomes the active display image, the active display corresponding to the variable display being executed can be performed as the corresponding display related to the variable display. The first hold display, the second hold display, and the active display may have the same color and pattern. For example, the active display is displayed larger than the first hold display and the second hold display. There may be. The display mode of the active display may change to a display mode different from that of the first hold display or the second hold display by executing the active display change effect.

On the screen of the image display device 5 in the configuration example 87AKP0, an active display area 87AKA1 is arranged between the first reserved display area 87AKB1 and the second reserved display area 87AKB2. On the other hand, the active display area 87AKA1, the first hold display area 87AKAB1, and the second hold display area 87AKAB2 may be arranged at arbitrary positions on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the arrangement of the active display area 87AKA1 may not be changed, and the first reserved display area 87AKAB1 and the second reserved display area 87AKA2 may be interchanged and arranged.

In the feature units 87AK to 89AK, the advance notice effect of "active display change" is executed as an example of the advance notice effect. The notice effect of the "active display change" changes the display mode of the active display in the active display area 87AKA1 in response to the variable display whose execution has started, and the execution starts at a rate according to the display mode after the change. It is announced that the display result of the variable display will be "big hit" and will be controlled to the big hit game state. In the notice effect of "active display change", the display color of the active display corresponding to the variable display during execution is a specific color (for example, blue, green, or red) different from the predetermined color (for example, white) in the normal state. ). It suffices to suggest that the jackpot game state is controlled at a predetermined ratio by changing the display mode that the player can recognize, such as the display color of the active display. In the case of active display using an effect image showing a display pattern, a message, a character, or the like, any display mode may be changed to a display mode different from the normal display mode. The notice effect of "active display change" is also referred to as change notice or change effect.

The suggestion effect is executed before the advance notice effect of the "active display change" which is the change effect is executed. The suggestion effect suggests that the display mode of the active display changes. After the suggestion effect is executed, the change effect may be executed, or the change effect may not be executed. As described above, after the suggestion effect is executed, the display mode of the active display may change, or the display mode of the active display may not change. The suggestion effect includes a Gase suggestion effect. Since the change effect is not executed after the Gase suggestion effect is executed, the display mode of the active display does not change. The suggestion effect may be executed in a common effect mode regardless of whether the change effect is executed or not executed and the suggestion effect is not executed. As a result, the player may not be able to determine whether or not the display mode of the active display changes until the suggestion effect is completed. The suggestion effect and the change effect are separate effects in that the suggestion effect is executed before the change effect, but the change effect is not executed after the suggestion effect is executed. There is. The suggestion effect may be executed in an effect mode that temporarily changes the display mode of the active display, such as displaying an effect image of the character in the active display area 87AKA1. However, the display mode of the active display changed by the suggestion effect is different from the display mode of the active display changed by the change effect, and the change of the display mode is uncertain. Therefore, for example, whether to return to the white display in the normal state. , It may be impossible or difficult to determine during the execution of the suggestion effect whether the change to the specific color display different from the white display is confirmed.

FIG. 10-2 shows a configuration example of a variation pattern relating to the feature portions 87AK to 89AK. These fluctuation patterns may be prepared in advance so as to be usable in place of a part or all of the fluctuation patterns in the above-described embodiment or together with a part or all of the fluctuation patterns in the above-mentioned embodiment. The plurality of fluctuation patterns differ in the special figure fluctuation time and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol. The special figure fluctuation time is the time required from the start of variable display of the special symbol to the stop display of the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game such as the first special figure game and the second special figure game. The plurality of fluctuation patterns relating to the feature portions 87AK to 89AK include fluctuation patterns corresponding to any of non-reach (loss), reach (loss), and jackpot. Non-reach (loss) is a case where the fixed decorative symbol of the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is "non-reach loss". Reach (loss) is a case where the fixed decorative symbol of the reach combination that is not the jackpot combination is stopped and displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is "reach loss". The jackpot is a case where the fixed decorative symbol of the jackpot combination is stopped and displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is "big hit". The fluctuation pattern corresponding to non-reach (loss) is a non-reach fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to reach (loss) is a reach fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to a jackpot is a jackpot fluctuation pattern. The non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are also collectively referred to as a loss fluctuation pattern. The reach fluctuation pattern and the jackpot fluctuation pattern include a "normal" fluctuation pattern in which the display result of the variable display is stopped and displayed after the reach effect that becomes the normal reach is executed, and a super reach after the reach effect that becomes the normal reach is executed. It includes a variation pattern of "super" in which the display result of the variable display is stopped and displayed after the reach effect that develops into the reach effect and becomes the super reach is executed. The reach production that becomes the super reach includes the reach production of Super A and Super B, which have different production modes.

FIG. 10-3 shows an example of determining the fluctuation pattern. Examples of determining the variation pattern are the jackpot variation pattern determination example 87AK01 shown in FIG. 10-3 (A), the loss variation pattern determination example (normal time) 87AK02 shown in FIG. 10-3 (B1), and FIG. The loss fluctuation pattern determination example (during a short time) 87AK03 shown in B2) is included. The jackpot fluctuation pattern determination example 87AK01 corresponds to the case where the display result of the variable display is “big hit”. Loss fluctuation pattern determination example (normal time) 87AK02 corresponds to the case where the display result of the variable display becomes “loss” in the normal state where the time reduction control is not performed. Loss fluctuation pattern determination example (during time reduction) 87AK03 corresponds to a case where the display result of the variable display becomes "loss" in the time reduction state in which the time reduction control is performed. In the variation pattern setting process executed in step S111 of the special symbol process process, when the display result of the variable display becomes a "big hit" or when the time reduction control is not performed and the time reduction control becomes "missing", the time reduction control is performed. The fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit or loss is determined by using the selected fluctuation pattern determination table depending on the case where “loss” occurs during the time reduction performed. When determining the variation pattern, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the variation pattern is read from the variation random number buffer. The random number buffer for variation can store the extracted random number value when the start winning determination process is executed in step S101 of the special symbol process process. The effect control CPU 120 compares the random number value for determining the variation pattern read from the random number buffer for variation with the determination value preset in the selected variation pattern determination table. Then, among the range of the determination values assigned for each variation pattern, the variation pattern to be used is determined according to the determination result of which range includes the random number value for determining the variation pattern. It should be noted that, by a process separate from the determination of the fluctuation pattern, it may be determined whether or not the reach mode is adopted in the case of “loss”.

In the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination example 87AK01, the number of determination values assigned to the “super” fluctuation patterns such as fluctuation patterns PA3-2 and PA3-3 is the “normal” fluctuation pattern such as fluctuation pattern PA3-1. Decision values are assigned to each variation pattern so that the number of decision values is greater than the number of decision values assigned to. On the other hand, in the loss fluctuation pattern determination example (normal time) 87AK02 and the loss fluctuation pattern determination example (time reduction medium) 87AK03, the number of determination values assigned to the “normal” fluctuation pattern such as the fluctuation pattern PA2-1. Is assigned a determination value to each variation pattern so as to be larger than the number of determination values assigned to the variation patterns of "super" such as variation patterns PA2-2 and PA2-3. As a result, when the display result of the variable display is stopped and displayed after the reach effect that becomes the super reach is executed, the reach effect that becomes the super reach is not executed even if the reach effect that becomes the normal reach is executed, and the variable display is displayed. The jackpot expectation (big hit reliability) is higher than when the display result is stopped and displayed.

Loss fluctuation pattern determination example (normal time) In 87AK02, the number of assigned determination values differs depending on which value the first reserved storage number is 0, 1, or 2 or more. May be set to include. With such a setting, it is sufficient that the average variable display time (special symbol fluctuation time) of the special symbol or the decorative symbol can be made different according to the first reserved storage number. When the first reserved storage number is equal to or more than a predetermined value (for example, "2"), the average variable display time can be shortened as compared with the case where the first reserved storage number is less than the predetermined value. A determined value may be assigned to the fluctuation pattern. Loss variation pattern determination example (during time reduction) In 87AK03, the number of assigned determination values differs depending on which value is 0, 1, or 2 or more in the second reserved storage number. May be set to include. With such a setting, it is sufficient that the average variable display time (special symbol variation time) of the special symbol or the decorative symbol can be made different according to the second reserved storage number. When the second reserved storage number is equal to or more than a predetermined value (for example, "2"), the average variable display time can be shortened as compared with the case where the second reserved storage number is less than the predetermined value. A determined value may be assigned to the fluctuation pattern. In the loss fluctuation pattern determination example (medium time reduction) 87AK03, the determination assigned to the variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is shorter than the variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is long as compared with the loss variation pattern determination example (normal time) 87AK02. A determined value may be assigned to each fluctuation pattern so that the number of values increases. As a result, it is sufficient that the average variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol can be shortened when the time reduction control is performed during the time reduction, as compared with the normal time when the time reduction control is not performed.

In the normal time when the time reduction control is not performed, it is difficult for the game ball to pass (enter) through the second start winning opening, and the frequency of executing the special figure game using the second special figure is low. Therefore, when the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is started in the normal time and the display result of the variable display becomes "missing", the first reserved storage number is set regardless of the second reserved storage number. The fluctuation pattern may be determined with reference to the same table data as when the value is a predetermined value (for example, “0”). Alternatively, if the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is started at normal times and the display result of the variable display becomes "missing", the special figure game is started regardless of the second reserved storage number. The fluctuation pattern may be determined with reference to the table data according to the first reserved storage number at the time point. Alternatively, in response to the fact that the special figure game using the second special figure is executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure, the loss fluctuation pattern determination example regardless of the second reserved storage number. The fluctuation pattern may be determined by referring to the table data in which the allocation of the determination value is different from that of 87AK02 (normal time). Alternatively, if the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is started in the normal time and the display result of the variable display becomes "miss", the "first hold" in the loss fluctuation pattern determination example (normal time) 87AK02. The fluctuation pattern may be determined by replacing "the number of stored items" with "the number of stored items on hold" and referring to the table data corresponding to the number of stored items on hold.

During the time reduction when the time reduction control is performed, the game ball easily passes (enters) through the second start winning opening, and the special figure game using the second special figure is frequently executed. When the special figure game using the second special figure is executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure, the special figure game using the second special figure is repeated if the time is shortened. There is a high possibility that it will be executed, and the frequency of executing the special figure game using the first special figure is low. Then, when the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is started during the time saving, the second reserved storage number is 0. Therefore, if the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is started during the time saving and the display result of the variable display becomes "missing", the second reserved storage number is irrespective of the first reserved storage number. The fluctuation pattern may be determined with reference to the same table data as when is a predetermined value (for example, “0”). Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined by referring to the table data in which the allocation of the determination value is different from that of the loss variation pattern determination example (in the time saving) 87AK03 regardless of the number of first reserved storages. Alternatively, if the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is started during the time reduction and the display result of the variable display becomes "loss", the "second" in the loss fluctuation pattern determination example (time reduction) 87AK03. The fluctuation pattern may be determined by replacing "the number of reserved storages" with "the first number of reserved storages" and referring to the table data corresponding to the first number of reserved storages.

10-4 (A1) to (A4) show an example of active display relating to the feature portions 87AK to 89AK. The active display can be displayed in different display modes such as display colors. In this active display example, four display images 87AKC1 to 87AKC4 are prepared in advance as a plurality of effect images that can be used for active display. The number of display images that can be used for active display is not limited to four, and may be a plurality of images based on an arbitrary design. The display image 87AKC1 is an effect image when the character indicating the coin is displayed in white. The display image 87AKC2 is an effect image when the character indicating the coin is displayed in blue. The display image 87AKC3 is an effect image when the character indicating the coin is displayed in green. The display image 87AKC4 is an effect image when the character indicating the coin is displayed in red. In the active display, as a normal display mode, a white display of a character indicating a coin is performed by the display image 87AKC1. The change effect includes a case where the display color of the active display is blue, green, or red. Of these, when the display color is red, the jackpot expectation is higher than when the display color is blue or green. When the display color is green, the jackpot expectation is higher than when the display color is blue. As described above, the active display can be displayed by any one of a plurality of display modes such as white display, blue display, green display, and red display. Further, the active display can be displayed in a specific mode such as a red display using the display image 87AKC4. The active display may be displayed in a different display mode together with the display color or in place of the display color depending on the type, size, shape, pattern, and other display modes of any effect image.

10-4 (B1) to (B3) show examples of suggestive effects relating to the feature portions 87AK to 89AK. The suggestion effect can be executed with different effect modes including the display mode, such as a character. In this suggestion effect example, three display images 87AKD1 to 87AKD3 are prepared in advance as a plurality of effect images that can be used for the suggestion effect. The number of display images that can be used for the suggestion effect is not limited to three, and may be a plurality of images based on an arbitrary design. The display image 87AKD1 is an effect image in the case where the character showing the coin explodes in the active display. The display image 87AKD2 is an effect image in the case where the character indicating the coin emits light in the active display. The display image 87AKD3 is an effect image in the case where the character indicating the coin is rotated in the active display. In the suggestion effect, the ratio of whether or not the display mode of the active display is changed by executing the change effect differs depending on the execution timing and the effect mode. In addition, the ratio of which of the plurality of display modes the active display display mode changes after the execution of the change effect differs depending on the effect mode of the suggestion effect. As described above, the suggestion effect can be executed by any one of a plurality of effect modes, such as an effect mode in which any of the displayed images 87 AKD 1 to 87 AKD 3 is displayed.

10-5 (A1) to (A3) show an example of a cut-in effect relating to the feature portions 87AK to 89AK. The cut-in effect can be executed at a predetermined timing during execution of the reach effect that becomes the super reach after the reach is established in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is the reach mode. In the cut-in effect, for example, an effect image of a character that notifies a message is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. The cut-in effect is a ratio according to whether or not it was executed along with the reach effect that becomes super reach, and a ratio according to the effect mode when it is executed, and the display result of the variable display becomes "big hit" and the big hit game state. Foretell that it will be controlled by. The cut-in effect is the content of the message by the character, the type of character, size, shape, pattern, color, type of frame to be the outer frame, size, shape, pattern, color, type of effect display, size, shape, pattern, It suffices if it can be executed in a different production mode depending on the color and other display modes of any production image.

In the cut-in effect example of FIGS. 10-5 (A1) to (A3), three display images 87AKE1 to 87AKE3 are prepared in advance as a plurality of effect images that can be used for the cut-in effect. The number of display images that can be used for the cut-in effect is not limited to three, and may be a plurality of images based on an arbitrary design. The display image 87AKE1 is an effect image when displaying a character for notifying the message of "???". The display image 87AKE2 is an effect image when displaying a character that notifies the message of "chance !!". The display image 87AKE3 is an effect image when displaying a character that notifies the message of "super heat !!". The ratio of whether or not to execute the cut-in effect and the ratio of notifying the message of "extreme heat !!" differ depending on the display mode of the active display. As described above, the cut-in effect can be executed by any one of a plurality of effect modes, such as a message effect mode in which the display image 87AKE1 to 87AKE3 is displayed to notify the user. Further, the cut-in effect can be executed by a predetermined mode such as an effect mode for notifying the message of "super heat !!" using the display image 87AKE3.

10-5 (B1) to (B3) show examples of promotion effects related to the feature portions 87AK to 89AK. The promotion effect can be executed at the final stage of the reach effect, which is the super reach. By executing the promotion effect, the player's movements such as the movement of tilting the operation stick of the stick controller 31A, which is the V controller, are promoted. The tilting operation for tilting the operation stick of the stick controller 31A may include a pulling operation for tilting the operation stick toward the front side. In the promotion effect, for example, an effect image that is a V-con image imitating the stick controller 31A is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. Along with the V-con image, a meter image notifying the remaining period for effectively detecting the movement of the player may be displayed. Along with the V-con image, a character image for notifying the message "Close !!" may be displayed. By displaying such a V-con image, a meter image, a character image, or an effect image including a part or all of these, the operation of the player who is the pulling operation of the V controller may be promoted. In the promotion effect, the ratio of which of the plurality of effect modes is different depends on whether or not the display result of the variable display becomes a "big hit" and is controlled to the big hit game state. The promotion effect may be executed in a different effect mode depending on the size, shape, pattern, color, and other display modes of the arbitrary effect image for the V-con image, meter image, and character image.

In the promotion effect example of FIGS. 10-5 (B1) to (B3), three display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 are prepared in advance as a plurality of effect images that can be used for the promotion effect. The number of effect images that can be used for the promotion effect is not limited to three, and may be a plurality of images based on an arbitrary design. The display image 87AKF1 is an effect image in the case of a small V-con display that displays a small-sized V-con image together with a meter image and a character image. The display image 87AKF2 is an effect image in the case of a medium V-con display for displaying a medium-sized V-con image together with a meter image and a character image. The display image 87AKF3 is an effect image in the case of a large V-con display that displays a large-sized V-con image together with a meter image and a character image. For the promotion effect, the ratio of the large V-con display may be different depending on the presence / absence of the cut-in effect and the effect mode, or the ratio of the large V-con display may be different depending on the presence / absence of the change effect and the execution timing. Alternatively, the ratio of the large V-con display may be different depending on the presence or absence of the suggestion effect and the effect mode. In the reach effect that is the super reach, when the movement of the player that is the pulling operation of the V controller is detected in response to the promotion effect, the final notification effect that is the operation effect is executed. As described above, the promotion effect can be executed by any one of a plurality of effect modes, such as an effect mode according to the size of the V-con display displaying any of the displayed images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3. Further, the promotion effect can be executed by a special mode such as a large V-con display effect mode using the display image 87AKF3.

FIG. 10-6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S171 of the effect control process process as the variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process, the final stop symbol and the like are determined (step 87AKS021). The effect control CPU 120 determines the final stop symbol based on the variable display contents such as the variable pattern indicated by the variable pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 and the variable display result indicated by the variable display result notification command. You just have to decide. The variation pattern specification command and the display result notification command are mainly generated by setting the command transmission at the start of variation of the special symbol when the variation pattern setting process is executed in step S111 of the special symbol process process. It is transmitted from the board 11 to the effect control board 12. The variation pattern specification command is an effect control command that specifies a variation pattern determined as a usage pattern. The variable display result notification command is an effect control command that specifies a variable display result determined by using a random number value for determining a special figure display result. As an example, the variable display contents according to the combination of fluctuation patterns and variable display results include "non-reach (loss)", "reach (loss)", "non-probability (big hit)", and "probability (big hit)". All you need is.

When the variable display content is "non-reach (loss)", the variable display of the decorative symbol does not become the reach mode, the fixed decorative symbol of the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the variable display is ". It becomes "missing". When the variable display content is "reach (loss)", after the variable display of the decorative symbol is in the reach mode, the final decorative symbol of the reach loss combination is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the variable display is "loss". Become. When the variable display content is "non-probability change (big hit)", the display result of the variable display becomes "big hit", and the game state after the end of the big hit game state becomes the time saving state. When the variable display content is "probability change (big hit)", the display result of the variable display becomes "big hit", and the game state after the end of the big hit game state becomes the probability change state.

When the variable display content is "non-reach (loss)", the effect control CPU 120 finally stops the different (mismatched) decorative symbols in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. To decide. The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the left confirmed symbol updated by the random number circuit 124, the random counter for effect, or the like, and uses a left confirmed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared. By referring to or the like, among the fixed decorative symbols, the left fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L on the screen of the image display device 5 is determined. Next, the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the right-determined symbol, which is updated by the random number circuit 124 or the random counter for effect, is extracted, and the right-determined symbol determination table stored in advance in ROM 121 is referred to. Among the fixed decorative symbols, the right fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R on the screen of the image display device 5 is determined. At this time, it is preferable that the symbol number of the right fixed decorative symbol is determined so as to be different from the symbol number of the left fixed decorative symbol by the setting in the right confirmed symbol determination table or the like. Subsequently, the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the medium-determined symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the random counter for effect is extracted, and the medium-determined symbol determination table previously stored and prepared in the ROM 121 is referred to. Among the fixed decorative symbols, the medium fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C on the screen of the image display device 5 is determined.

When the variable display content is "reach (loss)", the effect control CPU 120 finally stops the same (matching) decorative symbol in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. To decide. The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the left / right confirmed symbol updated by the random number circuit 124, the random counter for effect, or the like, and uses a left / right confirmed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121. By referring to or the like, among the fixed decorative symbols, the decorative symbols having the same stop-displayed symbol numbers in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R on the screen of the image display device 5 are displayed. decide. Further, the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the medium-determined symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the random counter for effect is extracted, and the medium-determined symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 is referred to. As a result, among the fixed decorative symbols, the medium fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C on the screen of the image display device 5 is determined. Here, for example, when the symbol number of the medium-fixed decorative symbol is the same as the symbol number of the left-fixed decorative symbol and the right-fixed decorative symbol, and the fixed decorative symbol is a jackpot combination, an arbitrary value is used. By adding or subtracting (for example, "1") to the symbol number of the medium fixed decorative symbol, the fixed decorative symbol may be a reach combination instead of a jackpot combination. Alternatively, when determining the medium-fixed decorative symbol, the difference (design difference) between the left-fixed decorative symbol and the right-fixed decorative symbol may be determined, and the medium-fixed decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol difference may be set. ..

When the variable display content is "non-probability (big hit)" or "probability (big hit)", the effect control CPU 120 has "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The same (matching) decorative symbol is determined as the final stop symbol. The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a jackpot confirmed symbol, which is updated by the random number circuit 124, the effect random counter, or the like. Subsequently, by referring to the jackpot confirmation symbol determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L on the screen of the image display device 5 Determines decorative symbols with the same symbol number that is stopped and displayed along with 5C and 5R. At this time, depending on whether the variable display content is "non-probability (big hit)" or "probability (big hit)", and whether or not the promotion effect during big hit is executed, a normal symbol (for example, an even number) is displayed. It suffices to determine which of the indicated decorative symbol) and the probabilistic pattern (for example, the decorative symbol indicating an odd number) is to be the final decorative symbol. In the jackpot promotion effect, the combination of decorative symbols (non-probability variation jackpot combination) that reminds the jackpot but does not recall the probability variation state is temporarily stopped and displayed in the image display device 5, and then during the jackpot game state or the jackpot gaming state. It is a production that notifies whether or not a probability change state is reached at the end of.

As a specific example, when the variable display content is "non-probability (big hit)", a fixed decorative symbol is determined from a plurality of types of normal symbols. In addition, when it is determined that the variable display content is "probability change (big hit)" and the promotion effect during the big hit is not executed, the definite decoration symbol is determined from among a plurality of types of probabilistic symbols. On the other hand, when it is decided to execute the promotion effect during the big hit even if the variable display content is "probability change (big hit)", the fixed decorative symbol is decided from among a plurality of types of normal symbols. As a result, even though the probabilistic symbols are aligned and displayed as the final decorative symbols, it is possible to prevent the promotion effect during the big hit from being executed so as not to give the player a sense of distrust.

When the variable display content is "non-probability (big hit)" or "probability (big hit)", in step 126AKS011, it is decided whether or not to execute the probabilistic promotion effect such as the re-lottery effect or the big hit medium promotion effect. You may be broken. In the re-lottery effect, once the decorative symbol of the non-probable variable jackpot combination consisting of the same normal symbol is displayed during the variable display of the decorative symbol, it is once difficult or unrecognizable to be controlled to the probabilistic state. The player can recognizablely notify that the decorative symbol is controlled to the probabilistic state by displaying (re-variating) the decorative symbol again and stopping and displaying the decorative symbol of the probabilistic jackpot combination consisting of the same probabilistic symbol. In addition, after the decorative symbol is re-variated by the re-lottery effect, the decorative symbol of the non-probability change jackpot combination may be stopped and displayed, so that it may not be notified that the decorative symbol is controlled to the probabilistic state. When it is determined in step 126AKS011 that the re-lottery effect is to be executed, a combination of decorative symbols to be temporarily stopped and displayed may be determined before the re-lottery effect is executed.

After the final stop symbol and the like are determined in step 87AKS021, the effect determination process is executed (step 87AKS022). In the effect determination process, it is sufficient that the final display image, which is the final display mode of the active display, the change pattern used for the change effect, the suggestion effect, the cut-in effect, the promotion effect, and the like can be determined. Subsequently, the effect control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of prepared patterns (step 87AKS023). For example, the effect control CPU 120 selects one of a plurality of prepared effect control patterns (special figure variation effect control pattern) in response to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command, and uses it as a usage pattern. set. Further, the effect control CPU 120 may select one of a plurality of prepared effect control patterns and set them as usage patterns in response to the execution settings of various effects by the effect determination process in step 87AKS022. For a plurality of effect control patterns, a change effect control pattern for executing a change effect, a suggestion effect control pattern for executing a suggestion effect, a cut-in effect control pattern for executing a cut-in effect, and a promotion effect are executed. The promotion effect control pattern for the purpose may be included. As the effect control pattern corresponding to the variable display of the decorative pattern and various effects, a plurality of effect control patterns may be individually determined, or a single effect control pattern corresponding to the combination of the variable display of the decorative pattern and the execution settings of various effects. The effect control pattern may be determined all at once.

When the effect control pattern is determined by step 87AKS023, for example, the initial effect control process timer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 (effect control timer setting unit, etc.) corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command. Set the value (step 87AKS024). Then, a setting is made on the screen of the image display device 5 to start the fluctuation of the decorative pattern or the like (step 87AKS025). At this time, for example, the display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern (effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates) determined in step 87AKS023 is transmitted to the VDP of the display control unit 123. The variation of the decorative symbols may be started in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the screen of the image display device 5.

After setting the variable start in step 87AKS025, the hold display such as the first hold display in the first hold display area 87AKB1 and the second hold display in the second hold display area 87AKB2 corresponds to the start of the variable display. And so on (step 87AKS026). For example, when the first special figure game is executed (started), in the first hold display area 87AKB1, the display part (display part at the right end) corresponding to the hold number "1" is erased (digested). , The first hold display in the display portion corresponding to the other hold numbers "2" to "4" is moved (shifted) one by one to the right. On the other hand, when the second special figure game is executed (started), in the second hold display area 87AKB2, the display part (display part at the left end) corresponding to the hold number "1" is erased (digested). , The second hold display in the display portion corresponding to the other hold numbers "2" to "4" is moved (shifted) one by one to the left. As a result, the hold display is shifted. The stored contents of the hold display data storage unit may be shifted in accordance with the shift of the hold display. In addition, settings for updating the active display in the active display area 87AKA1 are made in response to the deleted hold display. As a result, with the start of the variable display, it is possible to start the display of the effect image that becomes the active display in the active display area 87AKA1.

If both the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number are "0" and the variable display is immediately started based on the occurrence of the first start winning prize or the second starting winning prize, the first is The setting for updating the active display in the active display area 87AKA1 may be made without updating the 1 hold display or the second hold display. In this case, the effect control CPU 120 may start the active display, which is a round plain and white display, in the active display area 87AKA1 as a normal display mode in the active display. After updating the hold display or the like in step 87AKS026, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", which is a value corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (step 87AKS027), and then the variable display start setting process ends. ..

FIG. 10-7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 87AKS022 of the variable display start setting process as the effect determination process. In the effect determination process, the final display image of the active display is determined (step 87AKS101). The final display image of the active display is an effect image that is finally displayed as the active display. In step 87AKS101, it is possible to determine one of the display images 87AKC1 to 87AKC4 in accordance with the case where the display mode of the active display is not changed or is changed. After that, the change pattern of the active display is determined (step 87AKS102). The change pattern of the active display is used for a change effect that changes the display mode of the active display. The change pattern of the active display is an effect pattern in which the effect mode of the change effect can be specified, and a plurality of patterns may be prepared in advance by being stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 121. In step 87AKS102, in order to determine the change pattern of the active display, it is determined whether or not there is a change effect. Whether or not there is a change effect is either "with change" or "no change" in which the change effect is executed, depending on the comparison result between the pre-change image, which is the display mode when the active display is started, and the final display image. Is decided on. For example, the pre-change image and the final display image are compared, and if they are different display images, it is determined that there is a change effect to execute the change effect. When the variable display is started without the pre-change image and the final display image matching, the display of the active display effect image is changed directly or stepwise to the final display image by executing the change effect. Just do it. When the pre-change image and the final display image are the same display image, it may be determined as "no change" in which the change effect is not executed. When it is determined that there is no change in which the change effect is not executed, it may be determined without the change pattern of the active display. When it is determined that there is a change to execute the change effect, it is possible to determine a single or a plurality of change patterns corresponding to a plurality of timings at which the change effect can be executed.

Following step 87AKS102, the suggestion effect is determined (step 87AKS103). In step 87AKS103, it is possible to determine one of the display images 87AKD1 to 87AKD3 according to the timing at which the change effect is executed. Further, even at the timing when the change effect is not executed, if the Gase suggestion effect is executed, it can be determined to be one of the display images 87AKD1 to 87AKD3. Next, as a reach effect corresponding to the fluctuation pattern, it is determined whether or not there is a super that executes the reach effect in the super reach (step 87AKS104). At this time, if the reach effect in the super reach is not executed and it is determined that there is no super (step 87AKS104; No), the effect determination process is terminated. If it is determined that there is a supermarket (step 87AKS104; Yes), the cut-in effect is determined (step 87AKS105), the promotion effect is determined (step 87AKS106), and then the effect determination process is terminated.

FIG. 10-8 shows a determination example of the final display image. In step 87AKS101 of the effect determination process, a random number value for determining the final display image is extracted, and the final display image is determined by referring to the final display image determination table according to the variable display content based on the random number value. Just do it. As a determination example of the final display image, there may be a case where the determination example 87AK11 is determined by the determination ratio according to the variable display content as shown in FIG. 10-8. The determination example 87AK11 includes the cases of "non-reach (loss)", "normal (loss)", "super (loss)", and "big hit" as the variable display contents for determining the final display image. When the variable display content is "non-reach (loss)", it corresponds to the case where the reach effect is not executed due to the non-reach fluctuation pattern among the cases where the display result of the variable display is "loss". When the variable display content is "normal (loss)", it corresponds to the case where the display result of the variable display is "loss" and the reach effect that becomes normal reach is executed by the fluctuation pattern of "normal". There is. When the variable display content is "super (loss)", it corresponds to the case where the display result of the variable display is "loss" and the reach effect that becomes super reach is executed by the fluctuation pattern of "super". ing. When the variable display content is "big hit", it corresponds to the case where the display result of the variable display is "big hit".

In the determination example 87AK11 shown in FIG. 10-8, the determination ratios of the display images 87AKC1 to 87AKC4, which are the final display images, differ depending on whether or not the variable display content is "big hit" and is controlled to the big hit gaming state. For example, the display image 87AKC1 is determined at the highest ratio when the variable display content is "non-reach (loss)" or "normal (loss)", and the variable display content is "super (loss)" or "big hit". If, the decision rate is low. On the other hand, in the display image 87AKC4, when the variable display content is "non-reach (loss)" or "normal (loss)", the determination ratio cannot be determined at 0/100 (= 0%), and the variable display is variable. When the content is "big hit", the decision rate is the highest. Due to the difference in the determination ratio according to the variable display content, when the final display image is the display image 87AKC4, the expectation of being controlled to the jackpot game state is the highest. When the final display image is the display image 87AKC3, the expectation degree controlled by the jackpot gaming state is lower than that of the display image 87AKC4, but higher than that of the display images 87AKC2 and 87AKC1. When the final display image is the display image 87AKC2, the expectation degree controlled by the jackpot gaming state is lower than that of the display images 87AKC4 and 87AKC3, but higher than that of the display image 87AKC1. When the final display image is the display image 87AKC1, the expectation that the jackpot game state is controlled is the lowest. As described above, it may be possible to suggest that the active display is controlled to the jackpot gaming state at different ratios depending on the display mode such as the display color.

FIG. 10-9 shows a configuration example of the change pattern used for the change effect and the executable timing of the change effect. In the configuration example of the change pattern shown in FIG. 10-9 (A), change patterns 87AKP1-1 to 87AKP1-6 are prepared in advance as a plurality of change patterns that can be used for the change effect. The plurality of change patterns correspond to the combination of the active display display image (pre-change image) before the change effect is executed and the active display display image (post-change image) after the change effect is executed. For example, the change pattern 87AKP1-1 is used when the pre-change image is the display image 87AKC1 and the post-change image is the display image 87AKC2 due to the change effect. The change pattern 87AKP1-2 is used when the pre-change image is the display image 87AKC1 and the post-change image is the display image 87AKC3 due to the change effect. The change pattern 87AKP1-3 is used when the pre-change image is the display image 87AKC1 and the post-change image is the display image 87AKC4 due to the change effect. The change pattern 87AKP1-4 is used when the pre-change image is the display image 87AKC2 and the post-change image is the display image 87AKC3 due to the change effect. The change pattern 87AKP1-5 is used when the pre-change image is the display image 87AKC2 and the post-change image is the display image 87AKC4 due to the change effect. The change pattern 87AKP1-6 is used when the pre-change image is the display image 87AKC3 and the post-change image is the display image 87AKC4 due to the change effect. The change effect can be executed at a single timing or at a plurality of timings while the variable display of the decorative symbol is being executed according to the fluctuation pattern.

FIG. 10-9 (B1) shows the timing at which the change effect can be executed in the case of non-reach (loss) corresponding to the non-reach fluctuation pattern. In the case of non-reach (loss), the change effect can be executed at the timing before the reach is established, which is the first timing. As described above, when the variable display of the decorative symbol is not in the reach mode, it is possible to execute the change effect at a single timing while the variable display of the decorative symbol is being executed.

FIG. 10-9 (B2) shows the timing at which the change effect can be executed when the reach effect that becomes the normal reach is executed corresponding to the “normal” fluctuation pattern. When the reach effect that is the normal reach is executed, the change effect can be executed before the reach is established, which is the first timing, or after the reach is established. In this way, when the variable display of the decorative symbol is in the reach mode and the reach effect of the normal reach is executed, the change effect can be executed at the timing of two times while the variable display of the decorative symbol is being executed.

FIG. 10-9 (B3) shows the timing at which the change effect can be executed when the reach effect that becomes the super reach is executed corresponding to the variation pattern of the “super”. When the reach effect that becomes the super reach is executed, the change effect can be executed at the timing of the first timing before the reach is established, after the reach is established, at the time of super development, and at the timing of the second timing of the cut-in effect. Is. In this way, when the variable display of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode and the reach effect that becomes the super reach is executed, the change effect can be executed at four timings while the variable display of the decorative symbol is being executed. The first timing and the second timing may be any timing as long as the relationship that the second timing is later than the first timing is maintained. Further, the present invention is not limited to these timings, and it is sufficient that the change effect can be executed at a single or a plurality of timings while the variable display of the decorative symbol is being executed. In the active display area 87AKA1, the display of the effect image to be the active display is started in response to the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern. After the active display is started in this way, the cut-in effect can be executed before the operation effect is executed in the reach effect that becomes the super reach.

FIG. 10-10 shows an example of determining the change pattern. In step 87AKS102 of the effect determination process, a single or a plurality of random values for determining the change pattern are extracted, and based on the random values, the change pattern determination table is referred to according to the final display image in the active display. The change pattern corresponding to the timing may be determined. The change pattern determination examples include a "no super" determination example corresponding to a fluctuation pattern other than the "super" fluctuation pattern and a "super presence" determination example corresponding to a "super" fluctuation pattern. It suffices if the determination example is included.

FIG. 10-10 (A) shows 87AK21, which is a determination example of the change pattern corresponding to the first timing before the reach is established, as a determination example of “no supermarket”. In the determination example 87AK21, the presence / absence and type of the change pattern corresponding to the first timing are determined according to the final display image in the active display. If it is determined without a change pattern, the change effect is not executed. For example, when the final display image is the display image 87AKC1, the white display, which is the normal mode as the display mode of the active display, does not change, so 100/100 (= 100%) corresponding to the fact that the change effect is not executed. Determined at the rate of no change pattern. When the final display image is the display image 87AKC2, the change pattern at a ratio of 100/100 (= 100%) corresponds to changing the white display, which is a normal mode, to the blue display as the display mode of the active display. It is decided to be 87AKP1-1. When the final display image is the display image 87AKC3, the change pattern is at a ratio of 100/100 (= 100%) corresponding to changing the white display, which is the normal mode, to the green display as the display mode of the active display. It is decided to be 87AKP1-2. When the final display image is the display image 87AKC4, the change pattern is at a ratio of 100/100 (= 100%) corresponding to changing the white display, which is the normal mode, to the red display as the display mode of the active display. Determined to be 87AKP1-3.

FIG. 10-10 (B) shows a determination example 87AK22 of a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the first timing before the reach is established and the second timing during the cut-in effect as a determination example of “with supermarket”. There is. In the determination example 87AK22, the presence / absence and type of the change pattern corresponding to the first timing and the second timing are determined according to the final display image in the active display. For example, when the final display image is the display image 87AKC1, the white display, which is the normal mode as the display mode of the active display, does not change, so 100/100 (= 100%) corresponding to the fact that the change effect is not executed. The ratio is determined without the change pattern of the first timing and the second timing. When the final display image is the display image 87AKC4, the white display, which is the normal mode, is changed to the red display as the display mode of the active display. In this case, the combination of the first timing change pattern 87AKP1-1 and the second timing change pattern 87AKP1-5 is determined at a ratio of 30/100 (= 30%), and is 30/100 (= 30%). The combination of the change pattern 87AKP1-2 of the first timing and the change pattern 87AKP1-6 of the second timing is determined at the ratio of 30/100 (= 30%), and there is no change pattern of the first timing and the second. The combination with the timing change pattern 87AKP1-3 is determined, and the combination of the first timing change pattern 87AKP1-3 with no second timing change pattern is determined at a ratio of 10/100 (= 10%). In this way, the presence / absence of the change effect and the change pattern corresponding to the timing are determined at different ratios depending on the display mode of the active display. Further, it is sufficient that it is possible to suggest the final display mode of the active display at a different ratio depending on the presence / absence of the change effect and the change pattern in response to a single or a plurality of timings during the execution of the variable display.

In the determination example 87AK21, the determination ratio of the change pattern 87AKP1-1 of the second timing is 0/100 (= 0%). As a result, at the second timing, the active display does not change from the white display in the normal mode to the blue display. Since the second timing is the cut-in effect during the reach effect that becomes the super reach, the expectation that the player is controlled by the jackpot game state is increasing. If the display changes to blue with low expectation at such a timing, it suggests that it is unlikely to be controlled by the jackpot game state, and there is a risk that the player will be awakened by giving discomfort. There is. Therefore, at the second timing, it is set not to execute the change effect in which the active display changes from the white display to the blue display. As a result, at the timing when the expectation for the big hit game state is increasing, it is possible to prevent the gaming interest from being lowered due to the discomfort of the change effect suggesting that the expectation is low.

In the determination ratio of the determination example 87AK21, when the first timing is determined by the change pattern PA1-3, the second timing is determined without the change pattern, so that the change effect is not executed at the second timing. Since the change pattern PA1-3 changes the active display from the white display of the display image 87AKC1 to the red display of the display image 87AKC4, the display mode of the active display cannot be further changed. In this way, before the cut-in effect that is the second timing, the change effect is not executed at the second timing in response to the case where the display mode of the active display is the red display that is the specific mode. The display mode of the display is not changed. Further, when the change effect is executed at the first timing before the second timing, the display mode of the active display can be changed to the red display, so that the degree of freedom of the change pattern in the change effect is increased. , Various productions can be performed. Even if the display mode of the active display changes to a specific mode such as red display at the first timing, if a special effect such as a promotion effect is executed as a cut-in effect, the active display is displayed at the second timing. The display mode of the active display may be further changed at the second timing, such as changing the display mode of the above to a gold display.

FIG. 10-11 shows a determination example of the suggestion effect including the Gase suggestion effect. In step 87AKS103 of the effect determination process, if it is determined whether or not to execute the Gase suggestion effect, which is whether or not to execute the Gase suggestion effect, in response to the timing when the change effect is not executed among the first timing and the second timing. Good. At this time, for example, a random number value for determining the execution of the Gase suggestion effect is extracted, and based on the random value, the Gase suggestion effect is executed by referring to the Gase suggestion effect execution decision table according to the timing when the change effect is not executed. The presence or absence may be determined. As an example of determining the execution of the Gase suggestion effect, there may be a case where the determination example 87AK31 is based on the determination ratio according to the first timing and the second timing as shown in FIG. 10-11 (A). Further, in step 87AKS103 of the effect determination process, a random number value for determining the suggestion effect is extracted, and based on the random number value, the suggestion effect determination table is referred to according to the change pattern used in the change effect. Alternatively, the effect image to be used for the suggestion effect corresponding to a plurality of timings may be determined. As a determination example of the suggestion effect, there may be a case where the determination example 87AK32 is determined by the determination ratio according to the change pattern as shown in FIG. 10-11 (B).

In the determination example 87AK31 shown in FIG. 10-11 (A), it is determined as either “with execution” or “without execution” to execute the Gase suggestion effect corresponding to the first timing and the second timing. .. However, in the case of "no super", the variable display ends before the cut-in effect, which is the second timing, is reached, so it is sufficient to determine whether or not to execute the Gase suggestion effect corresponding to the first timing. In the determination example 87AK31, the determination ratio of whether or not to execute the Gase suggestion effect differs depending on whether it is the first timing or the second timing. For example, in the first timing, it is determined as "executed" at a rate of 10/100 (= 10%) and "without execution" at a rate of 90/100 (= 90%). In the second timing, the ratio of 0/100 (= 0%) is determined to be "executed", and the ratio of 100/100 (= 100%) is determined to be "not executed". As a result, there is a limitation as a limit that the Gase suggestion effect is executed at a predetermined ratio in the range of the first timing, but the Gase suggestion effect is not executed in the range of the second timing after the first timing. It should be noted that the second timing is not limited to the restriction that the Gase suggestion effect is not executed, and the second timing may be limited to the execution ratio of the Gase suggestion effect being lower than that of the first timing. By providing these restrictions, in the second timing in which the expectation of being controlled by the jackpot game state is increasing, the event that the change effect is not executed even if the suggestion effect is executed is stopped or reduced. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the game interest due to the discomfort of the Gase suggestion effect at the timing when the expectation for the big hit game state is increasing.

The determination example 87AK32 shown in FIG. 10-11 (B) includes a case where the determination ratios of the display images 87AKD1 to 87AKD3 used for the suggestion effect differ depending on the change pattern used in the change effect. For example, when there is no change pattern corresponding to the Gase suggestion effect, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKD1 is 80/100 (= 80%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKD2 is 20/100 (= 20%). Yes, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKD3 is 0/100 (= 0%). In this case, the display image 87 AKD3 is not determined. Therefore, when the suggestion effect using the display image 87AKD3 is executed, the display mode of the active display can be changed by always executing the change effect without executing the Gase suggestion effect. In the case of any of the change patterns 87AKP1-3, 87AKP1-5, and 87AKP1-6, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKD1 is 10/100 (= 10%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKD2 is 30/100. (= 30%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKD3 is 60/100 (= 60%). In the change patterns 87AKP1-3, 87AKP1-5, and 87AKP1-6, the changed image is the display image 87AKC4, and the display mode of the active display is changed to the red display. Due to the difference in the determination ratio according to the change pattern, when the suggestion effect using the display image 87AKD3 is executed, the expectation that the display mode of the active display changes to the red display due to the change effect is the highest. When the suggestion effect using the display image 87AKD2 is executed, the expectation that the display mode of the active display changes to the red display due to the change effect is lower than that of the display image 87AKD3, but higher than that of the display image 87AKD1. It gets higher. When the suggestion effect using the display image 87AKD1 is executed, the degree of expectation that the display mode of the active display changes to the red display due to the change effect is the lowest. As described above, the suggestion effect may suggest that the display mode of the active display changes to a specific mode at a different rate depending on the effect mode by displaying the effect image or the like. Further, the suggestion effect may be able to suggest whether or not the display mode of the active display changes at a different rate depending on the effect mode by displaying the effect image.

FIG. 10-12 shows a determination example of the cut-in effect. In step 87AKS105 of the effect determination process, a random value for determining the cut-in effect is extracted, and based on the random value, the cut-in effect determination table is referred to according to the final display image in the active display, thereby performing the cut-in effect. It suffices to decide whether or not to execute the cut-in effect and whether or not to execute the effect image to be used. As a determination example of the cut-in effect, there may be a case where the determination example 87AK41 is determined by the determination ratio according to the final display image in the active display as shown in FIG. 10-12. In the determination example 87AK41, the presence / absence and type of the display image used for the cut-in effect are determined according to the final display image in the active display. If it is determined that there is no display image used for the cut-in effect, the cut-in effect is not executed. For example, when the final display image is the display image 87AKC1, the display image 87AKE1 is determined at a ratio of 80/100 (= 80%) without the display image and at a ratio of 20/100 (= 20%). In this case, the determination ratio of the display images 87AKE2 and 87AKE3 is 0/100 (= 0%), and the cut-in effect using these display images is not executed. When the final display image is the display image 87AKC2, it is determined at a ratio of 20/100 (= 20%) without the display image, and at a ratio of 40/100 (= 40%), it is determined to be the display image 87AKE1. The display image 87AKE2 is determined at a ratio of / 100 (= 30%), and the display image 87AKE3 is determined at a ratio of 10/100 (= 10%). When the final display image is the display image 87AKC3, it is determined at a ratio of 10/100 (= 10%) without the display image, and at a ratio of 30/100 (= 30%), it is determined to be the display image 87AKE1. The display image 87AKE2 is determined at a ratio of / 100 (= 40%), and the display image 87AKE3 is determined at a ratio of 20/100 (= 20%).

In the determination example 87AK41, when the final display image is the display image 87AKC4, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKE1 without the display image is 0/100 (= 0%), and the ratio of 20/100 (= 20%). The display image 87AKE2 is determined by, and the display image 87AKE3 is determined at a ratio of 80/100 (= 80%). In this case, the cut-in effect is always executed, and either the display image 87AKE2 or 87AKE3 is used. As described above, the presence / absence of the cut-in effect and the display image used for the cut-in effect are determined at different ratios depending on the display mode of the active display. Further, in the cut-in effect, the ratio of the final display mode in the active display differs depending on the effect mode by displaying the effect image. Therefore, for example, when the change effect is executed at the time of the cut-in effect which is the second timing, it is possible to suggest the final display mode of the active display at a different ratio depending on the effect mode of the cut-in effect. In addition, when the change effect is not executed at the time of the cut-in effect which is the second timing, it is possible to suggest the effect mode of the cut-in effect at a different ratio depending on the display mode of the active display.

In the determination ratio of the determination example 87AK41, the display image 87AKE3 of the cut-in effect is not determined because the determination ratio is 0/100 (= 0%) when the final display image of the active display is the display image 87AKC1 and is displayed. It can be determined when any of the images 87AKC2 to 87AKC4. Therefore, when the effect mode of the cut-in effect is the predetermined mode by the display of the display image 87AKE3, the final display image of the active display is other than the display image 87AKC1, so that the display mode of the active display can be changed. Become.

The cut-in effect may be determined at different rates depending on whether or not the change effect is executed and the change pattern at the time of the cut-in effect, which is the second timing. For example, when the change effect is not executed at the second timing, the display image 87AKE1 of the cut-in effect may be determined at a high rate. According to such a setting of the determination ratio, when the cut-in effect using the display image 87AKE1 is executed, the ratio that the change effect is not executed at the second timing becomes high, and the display mode of the active display is hard to change. Become. As described above, the effect mode of the cut-in effect may include an effect mode in which the execution rate of the change effect is low and the display mode of the active display is unlikely to change.

10-13 to 10-15 show a determination example of the promotion effect corresponding to the feature portions 87AK to 89AK. In step 87AKS106 of the effect determination process, a random number value for determining the promotion effect is extracted, and based on the random number value, the promotion effect determination table is referred to according to the display result of the variable display and used for the promotion effect. The production image may be determined. As a determination example of the promotion effect, when the determination example 87AK51 regarding the feature portion 87AK shown in FIG. 10-13 is used, and when the determination example 88AK01 regarding the feature portion 88AK shown in FIG. 10-14 is used, the feature portion 89AK shown in FIG. Of the cases where the determination example 89AK01 is obtained, at least one of the cases may be obtained. Depending on the success or failure of a specific condition relating to the progress of the game or the production, or depending on the success or failure of the special condition not related to the progress of the game or the production, each determination example may be switched. For example, if the number of executions of the variable display is within the specific range, the promotion effect may be determined by the determination ratio of the determination example 87AK51, and if it is outside the specific range, the promotion effect may be determined by the determination ratio of the determination example 88AK01. .. Further, if the effect mode is the normal mode, the promotion effect is determined by the determination ratio of the determination example 87AK51, and if the special mode is different from the normal mode, the promotion effect may be determined by the determination ratio of the determination example 89AK01. ..

In the decision example 87AK51 of the promotion effect regarding the feature portion 87AK shown in FIG. 10-13, in addition to whether the display result of the variable display is “miss” or “big hit”, whether or not the cut-in effect is executed and the cut-in effect are performed. The determination ratio of the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect differs depending on the display image used for. For example, when the display result of the variable display is "missing" and there is no corresponding display image without executing the cut-in effect, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 80/100 (= 80%), and the display image The determination ratio of 87AKF2 is 10/100 (= 10%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 10/100 (= 10%). When the display result of the variable display is "big hit" and there is no corresponding display image without executing the cut-in effect, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 30/100 (= 30%), and the display image 87AKF2 The determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 30/100 (= 30%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 40/100 (= 40%). When the display result of the variable display is "missing" and the display image 87AKE1 of the cut-in effect, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 60/100 (= 60%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is It is 20/100 (= 20%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 20/100 (= 20%). When the display result of the variable display is "big hit" and the display image 87AKE1 of the cut-in effect, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 20/100 (= 20%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is It is 20/100 (= 20%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 60/100 (= 60%). When the display result of the variable display is "missing" and the display image 87AKE2 of the cut-in effect, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 40/100 (= 40%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is It is 30/100 (= 30%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 30/100 (= 30%). When the display result of the variable display is "big hit" and the display image 87AKE2 of the cut-in effect, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 10/100 (= 10%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is It is 10/100 (= 10%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 80/100 (= 80%). When the display result of the variable display is "missing" and the display image 87AKE3 of the cut-in effect, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 0/100 (= 0%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is It is 90/100 (= 90%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 10/100 (= 10%). When the display result of the variable display is "big hit" and the display image 87AKE2 of the cut-in effect, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 0/100 (= 0%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is It is 10/100 (= 10%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 90/100 (= 90%).

In the determination ratio of the determination example 87AK51, when the display result of the variable display is “missing”, the determination ratio other than the display image 87AKF3 is the highest regardless of whether or not the cut-in effect is executed and the effect mode. For example, when there is no display image of the cut-in effect, when the display image is 87AKE1 and when the display image is 87AKE2, the display result of the variable display corresponds to "loss" and is used for the promotion effect. The determination rate of image 87AKF1 is the highest. Further, in the case of the display image 87AKE3 of the cut-in effect, the display result of the variable display corresponds to "loss", and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKE2 used for the promotion effect is the highest. On the other hand, in the determination ratio of the determination example 87AK51, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is the highest regardless of whether or not the cut-in effect is executed and the effect mode. .. By setting the determination ratio in this way, when the promotion effect using the display image 87AKF3 is executed, the expectation that the jackpot game state is controlled is the highest. When the promotion effect using the display image 87AKF2 is executed, the expectation degree controlled by the jackpot gaming state is lower than that of the display image 87AKF3, but higher than that of the display image 87AKF1. When the promotion effect using the display image 87AKF1 is executed, the degree of expectation that the jackpot game state is controlled is the lowest. Therefore, regardless of the effect mode of the cut-in effect, the promotion effect has the highest expectation of being controlled to the jackpot game state in the case of the effect mode by displaying the display image 87AKF3. As a result, even if the player misses the cut-in effect, the degree of expectation that the jackpot game state will be controlled to some extent depends on whether or not the effect mode of the promotion effect is due to the display of the display image 87AKF3. Can be determined up to.

Due to the difference in the determination ratio in the determination example 87AK51, when there is no display image corresponding to the case where the cut-in effect is not executed, the promotion effect using the display image 87AKF1 is performed at a higher ratio than when the cut-in effect is executed. Will be executed. When the cut-in effect using the display image 87AKE3 is executed, the promotion effect using the display image 87AKF1 is not executed, and the promotion effect using any of the display images 87AKF2 and 87AKF3 is executed. As described above, the display image used for the promotion effect is determined at different ratios depending on whether or not the cut-in effect is executed and the effect mode. Further, in the cut-in effect, the ratio of the effect mode by displaying the effect image in the promotion effect is different depending on the effect mode by displaying the effect image. Therefore, it is possible to suggest the effect mode of the promotion effect at a different ratio depending on whether or not the cut-in effect is executed and the effect mode.

In the determination ratio of the determination example 87AK51, even if the display result of the variable display is the same, each of the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect is determined according to whether or not the cut-in effect is executed and the effect mode. The proportions are different. For example, among the cases where the display result of the variable display is "missing", when there is no display image in which the cut-in effect is not executed, the ratio of determining the display image 87AKF2 is 10/100 (= 10%). Among the cases where the display result of the variable display is "missing", when the display image 87AKE1 of the cut-in effect is used, the ratio of determining the display image 87AKF2 is 20/100 (= 20%). Among the cases where the display result of the variable display is "missing", when the display image 87AKE2 of the cut-in effect is used, the ratio of determining the display image 87AKF2 is 30/100 (= 30%). Among the cases where the display result of the variable display is "missing", when the display image 87AKE3 of the cut-in effect is used, the ratio of determining the display image 87AKF2 is 90/100 (= 90%). Therefore, when the display result of the variable display is "missing", the display image 87AKE1, the display image 87AKE2, and the display image 87AKE3 are displayed, and the display image 87AKF2 is displayed as the effect mode of the promotion effect. The ratio of display becomes high. Similarly, if the determination ratios when the display result of the variable display is "big hit" are compared, in this case, there is no display image of the cut-in effect, the display image 87AKE1, the display image 87AKE2, and the display image 87AKE3. As an effect mode of the promotion effect, the ratio of displaying the display image 87AKF3 increases. By setting such a determination ratio, it is possible to make the degree of expectation controlled in the jackpot game state different depending on the combination of the presence / absence of execution of the cut-in effect and the effect mode and the effect mode of the promotion effect. By grasping the combination of the cut-in effect and the promotion effect, the player can recognize in detail the degree of expectation controlled by the jackpot game state, rather than grasping only the effect mode of the promotion effect. Increased interest in various productions.

In the decision example 88AK01 of the promotion effect regarding the feature portion 88AK shown in FIG. 10-14, in addition to whether the display result of the variable display is “miss” or “big hit”, whether or not the change effect is executed, the timing, and the active display The determination ratio of the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect differs depending on the final display image. For example, when the display result of the variable display is "missing", there is no execution of the change effect, and the final display image of the active display is the display image 87AKC1, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 60/100 (= 60%). ), The determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 40/100 (= 40%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 0/100 (= 0%). When the display result of the variable display is "big hit", no change effect is executed, and the final display image of the active display is the display image 87AKC1, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 40/100 (= 40%). The determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 60/100 (= 60%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 0/100 (= 0%). Regardless of whether the display result of the variable display is "missing" or "big hit", if the change effect is not executed and the final display image of the active display is other than the display image 87AKC1, the display image 87AKF1, The determination ratio of 87AKF2 is 50/100 (= 50%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 0/100 (= 0%).

In the determination example 88AK01, when the display result of the variable display is "missing" and the change effect is executed only at the first timing, when the final display image of the active display is the display image 87AKC2, the display image The determination ratio of 87AKF1 is 70/100 (= 70%), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 30/100 (= 30%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 0/100 (= 0%). is there. When the display result of the variable display is "big hit" and the change effect is executed only at the first timing, and the final display image of the active display is the display image 87AKC2, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is It is 40/100 (= 40%), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 60/100 (= 60%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 0/100 (= 0%). If the display result of the variable display is "missing" and the change effect is executed only at the first timing, and the final display image of the active display is other than the display image 87AKC2, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 Is 80/100 (= 80%), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 20/100 (= 20%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 0/100 (= 0%). When the display result of the variable display is "big hit" and the change effect is executed only at the first timing, and the final display image of the active display is other than the display image 87AKC2, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 Is 30/100 (= 30%), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 70/100 (= 70%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 0/100 (= 0%).

In the determination example 88AK01, when the display result of the variable display is "missing" and the change effect is executed only at the second timing, when the final display image of the active display is the display image 87AKC3, the display image The determination ratio of 87AKF1 is 20/100 (= 20%), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 50/100 (= 50%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 30/100 (= 30%). is there. When the display result of the variable display is "big hit" and the change effect is executed only at the second timing, and the final display image of the active display is the display image 87AKC3, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is It is 20/100 (= 20%), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 30/100 (= 30%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 50/100 (= 50%). If the display result of the variable display is "missing" and the change effect is executed only at the second timing, and the final display image of the active display is other than the display image 87AKC3, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 Is 30/100 (= 30%), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 50/100 (= 50%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 20/100 (= 20%). When the display result of the variable display is "big hit" and the change effect is executed only at the second timing, and the final display image of the active display is other than the display image 87AKC3, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 Is 20/100 (= 20%), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 50/100 (= 50%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 30/100 (= 30%).

In the determination example 88AK01, when the display result of the variable display is "missing" and the change effect is executed at the first timing and the second timing, the final display image of the active display is the display image 87AKC4. , The determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 0/100 (= 0%), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 90/100 (= 90%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 10/100 (= 10). %). When the display result of the variable display is "big hit" and the change effect is executed at the first timing and the second timing, and the final display image of the active display is the display image 87AKC4, the display image 87AKF1 The determination ratio is 0/100 (= 0%), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 10/100 (= 10%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 90/100 (= 90%). If the display result of the variable display is "missing" and the change effect is executed at the first timing and the second timing, and the final display image of the active display is other than the display image 87AKC4, the display image 87AKF1 The determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 0/100 (= 0%), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 95/100 (= 95%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 5/100 (= 5%). .. When the display result of the variable display is "big hit" and the change effect is executed at the first timing and the second timing, and the final display image of the active display is other than the display image 87AKC4, the display image 87AKF1 The determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 0/100 (= 0%), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 40/100 (= 40%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 60/100 (= 60%). ..

In the determination example of the determination example 88AK01, when the display result of the variable display is "missing", the determination ratio other than the display image 87AKF3 is determined regardless of whether or not the change effect is executed, the timing, and the final display image in the active display. The highest. For example, when the change effect is executed only at the first timing, the display result of the variable display becomes "missing" regardless of whether the final display image of the active display is the display image 87AKC2 or other than the display image 87AKC2. Correspondingly, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 used for the promotion effect is the highest. In addition, when the change effect is executed only at the second timing or at the first timing and the second timing, the display result of the variable display becomes "missing" regardless of the final display image of the active display. Correspondingly, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 used for the promotion effect is the highest. On the other hand, in the determination ratio of the determination example 88AK01, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the display image 87AKF3 is determined regardless of whether or not the change effect is executed, the timing, and the final display image in the active display. The ratio is the highest. When the promotion effect using the display image 87AKF2 is executed, the expectation degree controlled by the jackpot gaming state is lower than that of the display image 87AKF3, but higher than that of the display image 87AKF1. When the promotion effect using the display image 87AKF1 is executed, the degree of expectation that the jackpot game state is controlled is the lowest. Therefore, regardless of the effect mode of the change effect, the promotion effect has the highest expectation of being controlled to the jackpot game state in the case of the effect mode by displaying the display image 87AKF3. As a result, even if the player cannot determine the timing of the change effect, it is expected that the effect mode of the promotion effect will be controlled to the jackpot game state depending on whether or not the display image 87AKF3 is displayed. The degree can be determined to some extent.

Due to the difference in the determination ratio in the determination example 88AK01, when the change effect is not executed or when the change effect is executed only at the first timing, the change effect is executed only at the second timing or the first timing. And the promotion effect using the display image 87AKF1 is executed at a higher rate than the case where the change effect is executed at the second timing. When the change effect is executed at the first timing and the second timing, the promotion effect using the display image 87AKF1 is not executed, and the promotion effect using any of the display images 87AKF2 and 87AKF3 is executed. As described above, the display image used for the promotion effect is determined at a different ratio depending on whether or not the change effect is executed and the timing. Further, in the change effect, the ratio of the effect mode by displaying the effect image in the promotion effect is different depending on the presence / absence of execution and the timing. Therefore, it is possible to suggest an effect mode of the promotion effect at a different ratio depending on whether or not the change effect is executed and the timing.

In the determination ratio of the determination example 88AK01, even if the display results of the variable display are the same, the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect are determined at different ratios depending on whether or not the change effect is executed and the timing. May occur. For example, when the display result of the variable display is "missing" and the change effect is not executed, the ratio of determining the display image 87AKF2 is 40/100 (= 40%) or 50/100 (= 50). %). When the display result of the variable display is "missing" and the change effect is executed only at the first timing, the ratio of determining the display image 87AKF2 is 30/100 (= 30%) or 20/100. (= 20%). Among the cases where the display result of the variable display is "missing", when the change effect is executed only at the second timing, the ratio of determining the display image 87AKF2 is 50/100 (= 50%). When the display result of the variable display is "missing" and the change effect is executed at the first timing and the second timing, the ratio of determining the display image 87AKF2 is 90/100 (= 90%) or It is 95/100 (= 95%). Even when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the ratio of determining the display image 87AKF2 differs depending on whether or not the change effect is executed and the timing. When the change effect is executed only at the first timing, the ratio of determining the display image 87AKF3 is 0/100 (= 0%), and the display image 87AKF3 is not determined. On the other hand, when the change effect is executed only at the second timing or when the change effect is executed at the first timing and the second timing, the display image 87AKF3 can be determined at a predetermined ratio. By setting such a determination ratio, it is possible to make the degree of expectation controlled by the jackpot game state different depending on the combination of the presence / absence and timing of execution of the change effect and the effect mode of the promotion effect. By grasping the combination of the change effect and the promotion effect, the player can recognize in detail the degree of expectation controlled by the jackpot game state, rather than grasping only the effect mode of the promotion effect. Increased interest in various productions. Further, the timing at which the change effect is executed differs, such as whether or not the change effect is executed at the second timing, depending on whether or not the promotion effect is executed in a special mode by displaying the display image 87AKF3. ..

In addition, in the determination ratio of the determination example 88AK01, even if the execution presence / absence and timing of the change effect are the same in addition to the display result of the variable display, the display image used for the promotion effect depends on the final display image of the active display. 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 may be determined at different ratios. For example, when the display result of the variable display is "missing" and the change effect is not executed, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 60/100 (= 60%) when the final display image of the active display is the display image 87AKC1. ), On the other hand, it is 50/100 (= 50%) in the case other than the display image 87AKC1. When the display result of the variable display is "missing" and the change effect is executed only at the first timing, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 70/100 (when the final display image of the active display is the display image 87AKC2). = 70%), whereas it is 80/100 (= 80%) in cases other than the display image 87AKC2. When the display result of the variable display is "missing" and the change effect is executed only at the second timing, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 30/100 (when the final display image of the active display is the display image 87AKC3). = 30%), whereas it is 20/100 (= 20%) in cases other than the display image 87AKC3. When the display result of the variable display is "missing" and the change effect is executed at the first timing and the second timing, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 10 when the final display image of the active display is the display image 87AKC4. While it is / 100 (= 10%), it is 5/100 (= 5%) when the display image is other than 87AKC4. Even when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the ratio of determining the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 differs depending on the final display image of the active display even if the execution presence / absence and timing of the change effect are the same. .. By setting such a determination ratio, it is possible to make the degree of expectation controlled by the jackpot game state different depending on the combination of the display mode of the active display and the effect mode of the promotion effect. By grasping the combination of the active display and the promotion effect, the player can recognize in detail the degree of expectation controlled by the jackpot game state, rather than grasping only the effect mode of the promotion effect. Increased interest in various productions.

In the decision example 89AK01 of the promotion effect regarding the feature portion 89AK shown in FIG. 10-15, in addition to whether the display result of the variable display is “miss” or “big hit”, it is used for whether or not the suggestion effect is executed and for the suggestion effect. The determination ratio of the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect differs depending on the display image to be displayed. For example, when the display result of the variable display is "missing" and there is no corresponding display image without executing the suggestion effect, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 80/100 (= 80%), and the display image 87AKF2 The determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 10/100 (= 10%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 10/100 (= 10%). When the display result of the variable display is "big hit" and there is no corresponding display image without executing the suggestion effect, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 30/100 (= 30%), and the display image 87AKF2 The determination ratio is 30/100 (= 30%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 40/100 (= 40%). When the display result of the variable display is "missing" and the display image 87AKD1 of the suggestion effect, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 60/100 (= 60%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 20. It is / 100 (= 20%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 20/100 (= 20%). When the display result of the variable display is "big hit" and the display image 87AKD1 of the suggestion effect, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 20/100 (= 20%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 20. It is / 100 (= 20%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 60/100 (= 60%). When the display result of the variable display is "missing" and the display image 87AKD2 of the suggestion effect, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 40/100 (= 40%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 30. It is / 100 (= 30%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 30/100 (= 30%). When the display result of the variable display is "big hit" and the display image 87AKD2 of the suggestion effect, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 10/100 (= 10%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 10. It is / 100 (= 10%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 80/100 (= 80%). When the display result of the variable display is "missing" and the display image 87AKD3 of the suggestion effect, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 0/100 (= 0%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 90. It is / 100 (= 90%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 10/100 (= 10%). When the display result of the variable display is "big hit" and the display image 87AKE2 of the cut-in effect, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 0/100 (= 0%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is It is 10/100 (= 10%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 90/100 (= 90%).

In the determination ratio of the determination example 89AK01, when the display result of the variable display is “missing”, the determination ratio other than the display image 87AKF3 is the highest regardless of whether or not the suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode. For example, when there is no display image of the suggestion effect, when the display image is 87AKD1, and when the display image is 87AKD2, the display result of the variable display corresponds to "loss" and is used for the promotion effect. The decision rate of 87AKF1 is the highest. Further, in the case of the display image 87AKD3 of the suggestion effect, the display result of the variable display corresponds to "loss", and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKE2 used for the promotion effect is the highest. On the other hand, in the determination ratio of the determination example 89AK01, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is the highest regardless of whether or not the suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode. By setting the determination ratio in this way, when the promotion effect using the display image 87AKF3 is executed, the expectation that the jackpot game state is controlled is the highest. When the promotion effect using the display image 87AKF2 is executed, the expectation degree controlled by the jackpot gaming state is lower than that of the display image 87AKF3, but higher than that of the display image 87AKF1. When the promotion effect using the display image 87AKF1 is executed, the degree of expectation that the jackpot game state is controlled is the lowest. Therefore, regardless of the effect mode of the suggestion effect, the promotion effect has the highest expectation of being controlled to the jackpot game state in the case of the effect mode by displaying the display image 87AKF3. As a result, even if the player misses the suggestive effect, the degree of expectation that the jackpot game state will be controlled to a certain extent is increased depending on whether or not the effect mode of the promotion effect is due to the display of the display image 87AKF3. Can be determined.

Due to the difference in the determination ratio in the determination example 89AK01, when there is no corresponding display image without executing the suggestion effect, the promotion effect using the display image 87AKF1 is executed at a higher rate than when the suggestion effect is executed. To. When the suggestion effect using the display image 87AKD3 is executed, the promotion effect using the display image 87AKF1 is not executed, and the promotion effect using any of the display images 87AKF2 and 87AKF3 is executed. As described above, the display image used for the promotion effect is determined at a different ratio depending on whether or not the suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode. Further, in the suggestion effect, the ratio of the effect mode by displaying the effect image in the promotion effect is different depending on the effect mode by displaying the effect image. Therefore, it is possible to suggest the effect mode of the promotion effect at a different ratio depending on whether or not the suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode.

In the determination ratio of the determination example 89AK01, even if the display results of the variable display are the same, each of the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect is determined according to whether or not the suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode. Is different. For example, among the cases where the display result of the variable display is "missing", when there is no display image that does not execute the suggestion effect, the ratio of determining the display image 87AKF2 is 10/100 (= 10%). Among the cases where the display result of the variable display is "missing", when the display image 87AKD1 of the suggestion effect is used, the ratio of determining the display image 87AKF2 is 20/100 (= 20%). Among the cases where the display result of the variable display is "missing", when the display image 87AKD2 of the suggestion effect is used, the ratio of determining the display image 87AKF2 is 30/100 (= 30%). Among the cases where the display result of the variable display is "missing", when the display image 87AKD3 of the suggestion effect is used, the ratio of determining the display image 87AKF2 is 90/100 (= 90%). Therefore, when the display result of the variable display is "missing", the display image 87AKF2 is displayed as the effect mode of the promotion effect as the suggestive effect is not displayed, the display image 87AKD1, the display image 87AKD2, and the display image 87AKD3. The ratio becomes high. Similarly, if the determination ratios when the display result of the variable display is "big hit" are compared, in this case, the display image is not displayed, the display image is 87AKD1, the display image is 87AKD2, and the display image is 87AKD3. As an effect mode of the effect, the ratio of displaying the display image 87AKF3 increases. By setting such a determination ratio, it is possible to make the degree of expectation controlled in the jackpot game state different depending on the combination of the presence / absence of execution of the suggestion effect and the effect mode and the effect mode of the promotion effect. By grasping the combination of the suggestion effect and the promotion effect, the player can recognize in detail the degree of expectation controlled by the jackpot game state, rather than grasping only the effect mode of the promotion effect. Increased interest in various productions.

FIG. 10-16 shows a determination example of the promotion effect as a modification. For example, in the case of the cut-in effect display image 87AKE3 in the decision example 87AK51 of the promotion effect relating to the feature portion 87AK, the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect are used at a ratio corresponding to the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. You may decide on either. In step 87AKS106 of the effect determination process, when the effect mode of the cut-in effect is the effect mode by displaying the display image 87AKE3, FIG. 10-16 shows an example of determining the promotion effect according to the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be the determination example 87AK61 shown.

In the decision example 87AK61 of the promotion effect shown in FIG. 10-16, when the display result of the variable display is “missing” among the display images 87AKE3 of the cut-in effect, the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set. Regardless, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 0/100 (= 0%), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 90/100 (= 90%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 10/100 (= 90%). = 10%). On the other hand, in the case of the display image 87AKE3 of the cut-in effect, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the display image used for the promotion effect is according to the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The determination ratios of 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 are different. In such a case, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 0/100 (= 0%), which is the same, while the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 35/100 (= 35%) if the set value is 1. ), If the set value is 2, it is 30/100 (= 30%), if the set value is 3, it is 25/100 (= 25%), and if the set value is 4, it is 20/100. (= 20%), if the set value is 5, it is 15/100 (= 15%), and if the set value is 6, it is 10/100 (= 10%). Correspondingly, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 65/100 (= 65%) when the set value is 1, and 70/100 (= 70%) when the set value is 2. If the set value is 3, it is 75/100 (= 75%), if the set value is 4, it is 80/100 (= 80%), and if the set value is 5, it is 85/100 (= 85%). ), And if the set value is 6, it is 90/100 (= 90%).

In the determination ratio of the determination example 87AK61, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the ratio of the effect mode of the promotion effect to the display image 87AKF2 or 87AKF3 is set as the pachinko game. It is made different according to the set value in the machine 1. For example, when the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the effect mode of the promotion effect tends to be the effect mode by the display of the display image 87AKF2, and as the set value increases, the effect mode of the promotion effect is the display image 87AKF3. The ratio of the display mode is increased. Therefore, when the effect mode of the cut-in effect is the display of the display image 87AKE3, the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is advantageous for the player when the effect mode is the display of the display image 87AKF3. Expectation, which is a set value, increases.

The effect mode of the promotion effect is an effect mode as a predetermined mode for notifying the message of "super heat !!" by displaying the display image 87AKF3. The ratio of the effect mode of the promotion effect to such a predetermined mode can be grasped by repeatedly executing the cut-in effect and the promotion effect with a plurality of variable displays in which the display result is a "big hit". In the variable display in which the display result is a "big hit", the player can set the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by grasping the ratio in which the promotion effect is a predetermined mode when the display image 87AKE3 of the cut-in effect is displayed. Can be recognized. If the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a set value having a high advantage, the display result of the variable display tends to be a “big hit” and is easily controlled to the big hit game state. Therefore, a player who expects to add a game value such as winning a prize ball expects that the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a set value having a high degree of advantage, and therefore the display result becomes a "big hit" a plurality of times. In the variable display of, the motivation to play is enhanced by making the set value recognizable from the ratio in which the promotion effect is a predetermined mode.

Even when there is no display image used for the cut-in effect, or when the display image is either 87AKE1 or 87AKE2, the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect are used according to the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The determination ratio of may be different. Even when the display result of the variable display is "missing", the determination ratios of the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect may be different depending on the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the display result of the variable display is "missing", the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is set to increase as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes a set value having a high advantage for the player. You may. According to such a setting, after the promotion effect of the predetermined mode (large V-con display) with high expectation is executed by the display of the display image 87AKF3, the ratio that the display result of the variable display becomes "missing" becomes high. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation that the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a set value having a high advantage. Therefore, even if the display result of the variable display is "missing", it is possible to improve the game interest by increasing the player's expectation for the set value.

Of 88AK01, which is a determination example of the promotion effect related to the feature unit 88AK, for example, when the change effect is executed at the first timing and the second timing and the final display image of the active display is 87AKC4, the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Depending on the situation, the determination ratios of the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect may be different. For example, when the change effect is executed at the first timing and the second timing, and the final display image of the active display is 87AKC4 and the display result of the variable display is "missing", the pachinko gaming machine 1 is used. Regardless of the set value, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 0/100 (= 0%), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 90/100 (= 90%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 10. / 100 (= 10%). On the other hand, when the change effect is executed at the first timing and the second timing, and the final display image of the active display is 87AKC4 and the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the display image 87AKF1 The determination ratio of is 0/100 (= 0%), which is the same, while the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 35/100 (= 35%) if the set value is 1, and the set value is 2. If there is, it is 30/100 (= 30%), if the set value is 3, it is 25/100 (= 25%), and if the set value is 4, it is 20/100 (= 20%). If the value is 5, it may be 15/100 (= 15%), and if the set value is 6, it may be 10/100 (= 10%). Correspondingly, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 65/100 (= 65%) when the set value is 1, and 70/100 (= 70%) when the set value is 2. If the set value is 3, it is 75/100 (= 75%), if the set value is 4, it is 80/100 (= 80%), and if the set value is 5, it is 85/100 (= 85%). ), And if the set value is 6, it may be 90/100 (= 90%). By setting such a determination ratio, for example, when the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the effect mode of the promotion effect tends to be the effect mode displayed by the display image 87AKF2, and as the set value increases, the promotion effect is produced. The ratio in which the effect mode is the effect mode by displaying the display image 87AKF3 becomes high. Therefore, when the final display image of the active display is the display image 87AKC4 by executing the change effect at the first timing and the second timing, the promotion effect is the effect mode by displaying the display image 87AKF3. , The expectation that the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is an advantageous set value for the player is high. In addition, if the player can grasp the ratio of the promotion effect to a predetermined mode by repeatedly executing the change effect and the promotion effect along with the variable display of the display result as a "big hit" a plurality of times, the pachinko gaming machine 1 Since the set value in the above can be recognized, the player's motivation to play is enhanced.

In addition, among the cases where the change effect is executed at the first timing and the second timing, even when the final display image of the active display is other than the display image 87AKC4, the promotion effect is performed according to the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The determination ratios of the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the above may be different. Even when the display result of the variable display is "missing", the determination ratios of the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect may be different depending on the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the display result of the variable display is "missing", the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is set to increase as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes a set value having a high advantage for the player. You may. According to such a setting, after the promotion effect of the predetermined mode (large V-con display) with high expectation is executed by the display of the display image 87AKF3, the ratio that the display result of the variable display becomes "missing" becomes high. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation that the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a set value having a high advantage. Therefore, even if the display result of the variable display is "missing", it is possible to improve the game interest by increasing the player's expectation for the set value. In addition, even when the change effect is not executed, or when it is executed only at the first timing or only at the second timing, the display images 87AKF1 to be used for the promotion effect according to the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The determination ratio of 87AKF3 may be different.

Of the 89AK01 determination examples of the promotion effect related to the feature portion 89AK, for example, in the case of the suggestion effect display image 87AKD3, the determination ratio of the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect according to the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. May be different. For example, in the case of the display image 87AKD3 of the suggestion effect, when the display result of the variable display is "missing", the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 0/100 (regardless of the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1). = 0%), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 90/100 (= 90%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 10/100 (= 10%). On the other hand, among the cases where the display image 87AKD3 of the suggestion effect is, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 0/100 (= 0%), which is the same. The determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 35/100 (= 35%) if the set value is 1, 30/100 (= 30%) if the set value is 2, and the set value is 3. If, it is 25/100 (= 25%), if the set value is 4, it is 20/100 (= 20%), and if the set value is 5, it is 15/100 (= 15%). If the set value is 6, it may be 10/100 (= 10%). Correspondingly, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 65/100 (= 65%) when the set value is 1, and 70/100 (= 70%) when the set value is 2. If the set value is 3, it is 75/100 (= 75%), if the set value is 4, it is 80/100 (= 80%), and if the set value is 5, it is 85/100 (= 85%). ), And if the set value is 6, it may be 90/100 (= 90%). By setting such a determination ratio, for example, when the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the effect mode of the promotion effect tends to be the effect mode displayed by the display image 87AKF2, and as the set value increases, the promotion effect is produced. The ratio in which the effect mode is the effect mode by displaying the display image 87AKF3 becomes high. Therefore, when the effect mode of the suggestion effect is the display of the display image 87AKD3, the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is advantageous for the player when the effect mode is the display of the display image 87AKF3. Expectation, which is a value, increases. In addition, if the player can grasp the ratio of the promotion effect to a predetermined mode by repeatedly executing the suggestion effect and the promotion effect along with the variable display of the display result as a "big hit" a plurality of times, the pachinko gaming machine 1 Since the set value in the above can be recognized, the player's motivation to play is enhanced.

Even when there is no display image used for the suggestion effect, or when the display image is either 87AKD1 or 87AKD2, the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect depend on the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The decision ratio may be different. Even when the display result of the variable display is "missing", the determination ratios of the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect may be different depending on the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the display result of the variable display is "missing", the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is set to increase as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes a set value having a high advantage for the player. You may. According to such a setting, after the promotion effect of the predetermined mode (large V-con display) with high expectation is executed by the display of the display image 87AKF3, the ratio that the display result of the variable display becomes "missing" becomes high. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation that the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a set value having a high advantage. Therefore, even if the display result of the variable display is "missing", it is possible to improve the game interest by increasing the player's expectation for the set value.

The determination ratio of the display images 87AKC1 to 87AKC3 which is the final display image of the active display, the determination ratio of the change patterns 87AKP1-1 to 87AKP1-6 corresponding to a plurality of timings, the presence / absence of the suggestion effect and the determination ratio of the display images 87AKD1 to 87AKD3, Of the presence / absence of the cut-in effect, the determination rate of the display images 87AKE1 to 87AKE3, and the determination rate of the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect, the display result of the variable display is "missing". In this case, it may be set differently according to the set value in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, when the display result of the variable display is "missing", the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is highly advantageous for the player in the ratio determined to the production mode with high expectation that the jackpot gaming state is controlled. It may be set to be higher as the set value is reached. According to such a setting, after the high expectation effect, which is the effect of the effect mode with high expectation, is executed, the rate at which the display result of the variable display becomes "missing" increases, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 has It is possible to increase the expectation that the set value is a set value having a high degree of advantage. In general, when the display result of the variable display becomes "missing" after the high expectation effect of the effect mode with high expectation is executed, the player's expectation once raised by the effect is variably displayed. Since the display result of is rapidly reduced, the player is likely to lose or lose the motivation to continue the game. On the other hand, as the rate at which the display result of the variable display becomes "missing" increases after the high expectation effect is executed, the expectation that the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a highly advantageous set value is increased. By increasing the value, it is possible to improve the interest of the game so that the player is motivated to continue the game.

It should be noted that the determination ratio of the display images 87AKC1 to 87AKC3 which is the final display image of the active display, the determination ratio of the change patterns 87AKP1-1 to 87AKP1-6 corresponding to a plurality of timings, the presence / absence of the suggestion effect, and the determination of the display images 87AKD1 to 87AKD3. Of the ratio, the presence / absence of the cut-in effect, the determination ratio of the display images 87AKE1 to 87AKE3, and the determination ratio of the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect, the display result of the variable display is "missing". In this case, the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 may be set differently depending on whether the set value is equal to or more than the specific set value or less than the specific set value. For example, when the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4 or more, it is more likely to be controlled to the jackpot game state when the display result of the variable display is "missing" than when it is less than 4. The decision rate may be increased. Alternatively, for example, when the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, it is controlled to the jackpot game state when the display result of the variable display is "missing" than when it is other than 6 (any of 1 to 5). The rate of determining the production mode with a high degree of expectation may be increased. When the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 6 (any of 1 to 5), the determination ratio is 0/100 (= 0%) when the display result of the variable display is "missing", which is a big hit. Regarding the effect mode to be finalized, when the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, if the display result of the variable display is “missing”, it may be set so as to be determinable at a predetermined ratio. According to this setting, when the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 6 (any of 1 to 5), the effect of the effect mode in which the big hit is confirmed is executed, and the display result of the variable display becomes "missing". In that case, since the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is determined to be 6, it is possible to improve the gaming interest so that the player can be motivated to continue the game.

In addition, it may be possible to execute an arbitrary setting suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, in the case of a specific setting value, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than in the case of a setting value other than the specific setting value. In this case, in the range where the set value is other than the specific set value, there is a limit as a limit that the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect is lower than the range where the set value is the specific set value. If it is a specific set value, it can be executed at a predetermined ratio, and if it is a set value other than the specific set value, a setting suggestion effect that is not executed may be provided. As described above, in the range where the set value is the specific set value, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined ratio. On the other hand, in the range where the set value is other than the specific set value, there is a limit as a limit that the setting suggestion effect is not executed.

It may be possible to execute an arbitrary setting suggestion effect at different ratios depending on whether or not it is a special period. For example, in the case of a special period, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than in the case of a period other than the special period. In this case, in the range other than the special period, there is a limit as a limit that the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect is lower than in the range of the special period. If it is a special period, it can be executed at a predetermined ratio, and if it is a period other than the special period, a setting suggestion effect that is not executed may be provided. In this way, within the range of the special period, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined ratio. On the other hand, in the range other than the special period, there is a limit as a limit that the setting suggestion effect is not executed.

It is not limited to whether or not it is a special period, and it may be possible to execute an arbitrary setting suggestion effect at a different ratio depending on whether or not an arbitrary special condition is satisfied. For example, when the special condition is satisfied, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than when the special condition is not satisfied. In this case, in the range where the special condition is not satisfied, there is a limit as a limit that the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect is lower than the range where the special condition is satisfied. If the special condition is satisfied, it can be executed at a predetermined ratio, and if the special condition is not satisfied, the setting suggestion effect may be provided. In this way, within the range where the special conditions are satisfied, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined ratio. On the other hand, in the range where the special condition is not satisfied, there is a limit as a limit that the setting suggestion effect is not executed. The special condition may be any condition that can be satisfied according to the progress or history of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 or the result of the determination or determination of the game, or the progress or history or the effect of the effect in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be an arbitrary condition that can be satisfied according to the judgment or determination of. The effect is not limited to the setting suggestion effect, and any effect may be executed at a different ratio depending on whether or not a preset condition is satisfied, and whether such a condition is satisfied. The production mode may be determined at a different rate depending on whether or not such a condition is satisfied, or the execution timing may be determined at a different rate depending on whether or not such a condition is satisfied. .. Further, the arbitrary effect may be limited as a limit that a specific effect is not executed in the range where the preset restriction condition is satisfied, or compared with the range where the restriction condition is not satisfied. There may be a limit as a limit that the execution rate is lowered and it is difficult to be executed.

FIG. 10-17 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S172 of the effect control process process as the effect process during variable display. In the variable display in-effect processing, it is determined whether or not the variable display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern has elapsed (step 87AKS041). In step 87AKS041, for example, the timer value of the effect control process timer is updated (for example, 1 is subtracted), and when the end code is read from the effect control pattern corresponding to the updated effect control process timer value, the variable display is performed. It may be determined that the time has passed. As described above, the passage of the variable display time may be determined as the passage of the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern based on the timer value of the effect control process timer or the like.

When the variable display time has not elapsed in step 87AKS041 (step 87AKS041; No), it is determined whether or not it is the suggestion effect period for executing the suggestion effect (step 87AKS042). The suggestion effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern (suggestion effect control pattern) determined in step 87AKS023 of the variable display start setting process. In the case of the suggestion effect period (step 87AKS042; Yes), control for executing the suggestion effect is performed (step 87AKS043). In step 87AKS043, for example, various commands created based on the setting of the suggestion effect control pattern are transmitted to the display control unit 123, the voice control board 13, the lamp control board 14, and the like. As a result, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, a predetermined sound effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED are turned on, blinking or extinguished. It suffices that the suggestion effect can be executed by a predetermined effect device by the above, or by combining a part or all of them.

When it is determined in step 87AKS042 that it is not the suggested effect period (step 87AKS042; No), or after the control in step 87AKS043 is executed, it is determined whether or not it is the change effect period for executing the change effect. (Step 87AKS044). The change effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern (change effect control pattern) determined in step 87AKS023 of the variable display start setting process. In the case of the change effect period (step 87AKS044; Yes), control for executing the change effect is performed (step 87AKS045). As the change effect period, for example, a period before the reach is established, which is the first timing, and a period at the time of the cut-in effect, which is the second timing, may be set in advance. At the time of the cut-in effect, which is the second timing, the display mode of the active display may be changed by changing the display of the effect image in the active display area 87AKA1 in response to the execution of the cut-in effect.

When it is determined in step 87AKS044 that it is not the change effect period (step 87AKS044; No), or after the control in step 87AKS045 is executed, it is determined whether or not it is the reach effect period for executing the reach effect. (Step 87AKS046). The reach effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern (effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates) determined in step 87AKS023 of the variable display start setting process. In the case of the reach effect period (step 87AKS046; Yes), control for executing the reach effect is performed (step 87AKS047).

Whether or not it is the cut-in effect period for executing the cut-in effect when it is determined in step 87AKS046 that it is not the reach effect period (step 87AKS046; No) or after the control in step 87AKS047 is executed. Is determined (step 87AKS048). The cut-in effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern (cut-in effect control pattern) determined in step 87AKS023 of the variable display start setting process. In the case of the cut-in effect period (step 87AKS048; Yes), control for executing the cut-in effect is performed (step 87AKS049). The cut-in effect period is before the operation effect period is determined in step 87AKS052 after the display of the effect image that becomes the active display is started by step 87AKS026 of the variable display start setting process. In addition, it may be set in advance so that the cut-in effect can be executed. With such a setting, it is sufficient that the cut-in effect can be executed after the active display is displayed and before the operation effect is executed.

The order of active display, motion effect, and cut-in effect may be arbitrarily changed. For example, the active display may be started after the cut-in effect is executed, and then the motion effect may be executed. Alternatively, the operation effect may be executed after the active display is started, and then the cut-in effect may be executed.

When it is determined in step 87AKS048 that it is not the cut-in effect period (step 87AKS048; No), or after the control in step 87AKS049 is executed, whether or not it is the promotion effect period for executing the promotion effect is determined. Determine (step 87AKS050). The promotion effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern (cut-in effect control pattern) determined in step 87AKS023 of the variable display start setting process. In the case of the promotion effect period (step 87AKS050; Yes), control for executing the promotion effect is performed (step 87AKS051). The promotion effect period may be an effective detection period for effectively detecting the movement of the player as the promotion effect is executed. In the effective detection period, for example, based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A, the movement of the player who tilts the operation stick of the stick controller 31A, such as the pulling operation for the V controller, may be detected.

When it is determined in step 87AKS050 that it is not the promotion effect period (step 87AKS050; No), or after the control in step 87AKS051 is executed, it is determined whether or not it is the operation effect period for executing the operation effect. (Step 87AKS052). The operation effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern (effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates) determined in step 87AKS023 of the variable display start setting process. In the effective detection period after the promotion effect is started, if a specific operation by the player, such as an operation of pulling the operation stick of the stick controller 31A serving as the V controller, is not detected, the operation effect period is set. It may not be started. Alternatively, even if the specific operation is not detected, the operation effect period may be started when the specific timing for the operation effect is reached. In the case of the operation effect period (step 87AKS052; Yes), control for executing the operation effect is performed (step 87AKS053).

The specific action of the player to be detected in order to execute the motion effect may be an action of tilting the operation stick of the stick controller 31A, unlike a pulling operation such as a pushing operation with respect to the V controller. Alternatively, the specific operation of the player may be an operation of pressing the push button 31B. The movement of the player is not limited to the one that can be detected, and is based on the detection result of any change or difference in the detection target, for example, the execution state of processing or control in the detection target, the shape, pattern, or color change of the detection target. Therefore, any effect corresponding to the motion effect may be executed. A detection device capable of detecting an operation, change, difference, etc. in a detection target can mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically change the state of the detection target, such as an infrared sensor, an ultrasonic sensor, a CCD sensor, or a CMOS sensor. Any configuration that can be detected may be used. Alternatively, the state of the detection target may be detected by analyzing the result of photographing the detection target using a predetermined camera (video type motion capture). As an example of detecting the state of the detection target using the camera, the screen display state of the mobile terminal may be detected and the effect may be executed based on the detection result.

When it is determined in step 87AKS052 that it is not the operation effect period (step 87AKS052; No), or after the control in step 87AKS053 is executed, for example, the setting in the effect control pattern determined corresponding to the fluctuation pattern may be performed. Based on this, control for executing other effects during variable display, including the variable display operation of the decorative symbol, is performed (step 87AKS054), and the variable display effect process ends.

When the variable display time has elapsed in step 87AKS041 (step 87AKS041; Yes), it is determined whether or not the symbol determination command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step 87AKS055). At this time, if the symbol confirmation command is not received (step 87AKS055; No), the effect processing during variable display is terminated and the device waits. If the predetermined time elapses without receiving the symbol confirmation command after the variable display time has elapsed, the predetermined error processing is executed in response to the failure to normally receive the symbol confirmation command. You may do so.

When the symbol confirmation command is received in step 87AKS055 (step 87AKS055; Yes), for example, in the variable display of the decorative symbol such as transmitting a predetermined display control command to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123. Control is performed to derive and display the final stop symbol (fixed decorative symbol) that is the display result (step 87AKS056). At this time, a predetermined fixed time is set as the waiting time for receiving the jackpot start designation command (step 87AKS057). Further, after updating the value of the effect process flag to "3" which is a value corresponding to the special figure hit waiting process (step 87AKS058), the effect process during variable display is terminated.

10-18 to 10-22 show examples of variable display of decorative patterns and execution of various effects. FIG. 10-18 shows an execution example from the start of fluctuation, which is the start of variable display, to the execution of the suggestion effect corresponding to the first timing before the reach is established. FIG. 10-19 shows a case other than the variable end or non-reach (loss), in which the variable display ends in the case of non-reach (loss) after the change effect corresponding to the first timing before the reach is established is executed. An execution example of reach establishment in which the variable display is the reach mode is shown. FIG. 10-20 corresponds to an execution example of a variable end that ends the variable display in the case of normal (loss) and a second timing at the time of the cut-in effect from the super development where the reach effect that becomes the super reach is started. An execution example until the suggestion effect is executed is shown. FIG. 10-21 shows an execution example in which the promotion effect is executed after the change effect corresponding to the second timing at the time of the cut-in effect is executed. FIG. 10-22 shows an execution example from the execution of the operation effect to the end of the variable display, which is the end of the variable display.

In the effect determination process executed in step 87AKS022 of the variable display start setting process in response to the variable start of the effect execution example 87AKM01 shown in FIG. 10-18 (A), the final display image in the active display. The change pattern of the change effect, the effect mode of the suggestion effect, the effect mode of the cut-in effect, the operation mode of the promotion effect, and the like are determined. After the start of the fluctuation in the effect execution example 87AKM01, a suggestion effect suggesting that the display mode of the active display changes can be executed in response to the establishment of the reach, which is the first timing. FIG. 10-18 (B1) shows an effect execution example 87AKM11 when the suggestion effect by displaying the display image 87AKD1 is executed corresponding to the first timing. FIG. 10-18 (B2) shows an effect execution example 87AKM12 in the case where the suggestion effect by displaying the display image 87AKD2 is executed corresponding to the first timing. FIG. 10-18 (B3) shows an effect execution example 87AKM13 in the case where the suggestion effect by displaying the display image 87AKD3 is executed corresponding to the first timing. As described above, the suggestion effect can be executed by any one of a plurality of effect modes depending on which of the displayed images 87 AKD 1 to 87 AKD 3 is used. Of the cases where the change effect is not executed in response to the first timing, if it is determined in step 87AKS103 of the effect determination process that the Gase suggestion effect is not executed, the suggestion effect is not executed. The variable display of the decorative pattern progresses. After the suggestion effect in any of the effect execution examples 87AKM11 to 87AKM13 is executed before the reach is established, which is the first timing, the change effect may or may not be executed. Of these, when the change effect is executed, the display mode of the active display can be changed according to the change pattern of the first timing determined in step 87AKS103 of the effect determination process.

FIG. 10-19 (A1) shows an effect execution example 87AKM21 in the case where the change effect is not executed corresponding to the absence of the change pattern of the first timing. Since the display image 87AKC1 is displayed in the active display area 87AKA1 of the effect execution example 87AKM21, the display mode of the active display remains white and does not change. In this case, the suggestion effect in any one of the effect execution examples 87AKM11 to 87AKM13 is a Gase suggestion effect that is executed when there is no change effect. However, in the determination example 87AKM32 shown in FIG. 10-11 (B), if the suggestion effect by displaying the display image 87AKD3 as in the effect execution example 87AKM13 is executed, the change pattern 87AKP1-1 to 87AKP1- Since it has been decided to be one of 6, it will not be a suggestion effect.

FIG. 10-19 (A2) shows an effect execution example 87AKM22 when the change effect according to the change pattern 87AKP1-1 is executed corresponding to the first timing. By displaying the display image 87AKC2 in the active display area 87AKA1 of the effect execution example 87AKM22, the display mode of the active display changes to blue display. FIG. 10-19 (A3) shows an effect execution example 87AKM23 when the change effect according to the change pattern 87AKP1-2 is executed corresponding to the first timing. By displaying the display image 87AKC3 in the active display area 87AKA1 of the effect execution example 87AKM23, the display mode of the active display changes to green display. FIG. 10-19 (A4) shows an effect execution example 87AKM24 when the change effect by the change pattern 87AKP1-3 is executed corresponding to the first timing. By displaying the display image 87AKC4 in the active display area 87AKA1 of the effect execution example 87AKM24, the display mode of the active display changes to red display.

After the variable display of the effect execution example 87AKM01 is started and before the reach is established, which is the first timing, a suggestion effect is produced by displaying one of the display images 87AKD1 to 87AKD3 as in the effect execution example 87AKM11 to 87AKM13. After the execution, in the change effect by the change pattern 87AKP1-1, the display mode of the active display changes to blue because the display image 87AKC2 such as the effect execution example 87AKM22 is displayed in the active display area 87AKA1. After the variable display of the effect execution example 87AKM01 is started and before the reach is established, which is the first timing, a suggestion effect is produced by displaying one of the display images 87AKD1 to 87AKD3 as in the effect execution example 87AKM11 to 87AKM13. After the execution, in the change effect by the change pattern 87AKP1-2, the display mode of the active display changes to green because the display image 87AKC3 such as the effect execution example 87AKM23 is displayed in the active display area 87AKA1. After the variable display of the effect execution example 87AKM01 is started and before the reach is established, which is the first timing, a suggestion effect is produced by displaying one of the display images 87AKD1 to 87AKD3 as in the effect execution example 87AKM11 to 87AKM13. After the execution, in the change effect by the change pattern 87AKP1-3, the display mode of the active display changes to red because the display image 87AKC4 such as the effect execution example 87AKM24 is displayed in the active display area 87AKA1.

In the case of the effect execution example 87AKM21, in the variable display by the non-reach fluctuation pattern, for example, the fixed decorative symbol of the non-reach combination such as the effect execution example 87AKM31 shown in FIG. The display result of the display is derived and ends. In the case of the effect execution example 87AKM21, in the variable display by the variation pattern other than the non-reach variation pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode as in the effect execution example 87AKM32 shown in FIG. 10-19 (B2), for example. , Reach is established. After the reach is established, there are cases where the reach effect that becomes the normal reach is executed and the variable display ends, and there are cases where the reach effect that becomes the super reach is executed and the super development occurs.

FIG. 10-20 (A1) shows an effect execution example 87AKM41 of a variable end in which the variable display ends when the fixed decorative symbol of the reach combination is stopped and displayed when the reach effect that becomes the normal reach is executed. .. FIG. 10-20 (A2) shows a production execution example 87AKM42 of super development in which the reach effect of normal reach develops into the reach effect of super reach. When a reach effect that becomes a super reach is executed as in the effect execution example 87AKM42, the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" may be reduced and displayed. .. Further, a small symbol display area may be arranged at a predetermined position on the screen of the image display device 5. The small symbol display area is smaller than the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right", and is provided at a predetermined position such as the lower right portion on the screen of the image display device 5. There is. In the small symbol display area, variable display of small symbols is performed in response to variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols. The effect image showing the small pattern is smaller than the identification information image which is the effect image showing the decorative pattern, and the variable display can be executed in a manner in which a part or all of the identification information image showing the decorative pattern is common. It may be a reduced identification information image. For example, when the identification information image showing the decorative symbol includes a part showing a number and a part showing a character, the effect image showing the small symbol corresponds to the same symbol number as the part showing the number included in the decorative symbol. Since it is an image showing the numbers and does not include a part showing a character, it suffices if a small symbol can be displayed in a simpler manner than an effect image showing a decorative symbol. In this way, in the small symbol display area provided on the screen of the image display device 5, the small symbol that serves as the reduced identification information is variably displayed, and the definite small symbol that is the display result is derived. The effect image showing the small design may be displayed at a position where it can be visually recognized at all times. In the small symbol display area, by displaying the small symbol in a simple manner, it is sufficient to prevent the player from misidentifying the display content and display result of the small symbol.

Following the super development in the production execution example 87AKM42, the reach production that becomes the super reach may proceed as in the production execution example 87AKM43 shown in FIG. 10-20 (B). After the reach effect in the effect execution example 87AKM43, the display mode of the active display changes with the execution of the cut-in effect or without the execution of the cut-in effect in response to the cut-in effect which is the second timing. Suggestion effects that suggest the above become feasible. FIG. 10-20 (C1) shows an effect execution example 87AKM51 in which a suggestion effect by displaying the display image 87 AKD1 is executed corresponding to the second timing when the cut-in effect is not executed. By determining without the display image used for the cut-in effect in step 87AKS105 of the effect determination process, even if the cut-in effect is not executed, the suggestion effect corresponding to the second timing is displayed in step 87AKS103 of the effect determination process. When the image is determined, the suggestion effect can be executed even if the cut-in effect is not executed at the time of the cut-in effect which is the second timing. FIG. 10-20 (C2) shows an effect execution example 87AKM52 in which a suggestion effect by displaying the display image 87AKD2 is executed corresponding to the second timing when the cut-in effect by displaying the display image 87AKE2 is executed. ing. FIG. 10-20 (C3) shows an effect execution example 87AKM53 in which a suggestion effect by displaying the display image 87AKD3 is executed corresponding to the second timing when the cut-in effect by displaying the display image 87AKE3 is executed. ing. The change effect is executed after the suggestion effect in any of the effect execution examples 87AKM51 to 87AKM53 is executed corresponding to the cut-in effect that is the second timing. At this time, the display mode of the active display can be changed according to the change pattern of the second timing determined in step 87AKS103 of the effect determination process.

FIG. 10-21 (A1) shows an effect execution example 87AKM61 when the change effect by the change pattern 87AKP1-1 is executed corresponding to the second timing. By displaying the display image 87AKC2 in the active display area 87AKA1 of the effect execution example 87AKM62, the display mode of the active display changes to blue display. FIG. 10-21 (A2) shows an effect execution example 87AKM62 when the change effect by the change pattern 87AKP1-2 is executed corresponding to the second timing. By displaying the display image 87AKC3 in the active display area 87AKA1 of the effect execution example 87AKM62, the display mode of the active display changes to green display. FIG. 10-21 (A3) shows an effect execution example 87AKM63 when the change effect by the change pattern 87AKP1-3 is executed corresponding to the second timing. By displaying the display image 87AKC4 in the active display area 87AKA1 of the effect execution example 87AKM63, the display mode of the active display changes to red display.

At the time of the cut-in effect which is the second timing after the reach effect which becomes the super reach such as the effect execution example 87AKM42 and 87AKM43 is started, any of the display images 87AKD1 to 87AKD3 like the effect execution example 87AKM51-87AKM53. After executing the suggestion effect by displaying, in the change effect by the change pattern 87AKP1-1, the display image 87AKC2 like the effect execution example 87AKM61 is displayed in the active display area 87AKA1 to display the active display. The mode changes to blue display. At the time of the cut-in effect which is the second timing after the reach effect which becomes the super reach such as the effect execution example 87AKM42 and 87AKM43 is started, any of the display images 87AKD1 to 87AKD3 like the effect execution example 87AKM51-87AKM53. In the change effect by the change pattern 87AKP1-2 after executing the suggestion effect by displaying, the display image 87AKC3 such as the effect execution example 87AKM62 is displayed in the active display area 87AKA1 to display the active display. The mode changes to green. At the time of the cut-in effect which is the second timing after the reach effect which becomes the super reach such as the effect execution example 87AKM42 and 87AKM43 is started, any of the display images 87AKD1 to 87AKD3 like the effect execution example 87AKM51-87AKM53. After executing the suggestion effect by displaying, in the change effect by the change pattern 87AKP1-3, the display image 87AKC4 such as the effect execution example 87AKM63 is displayed in the active display area 87AKA1 to display the active display. The aspect changes to red display. The player's movement is promoted after a part or all of the cut-in effect, the suggestion effect, and the change effect corresponding to the second timing are executed, or after the reach effect progresses without executing these effects. The promotion effect is executed.

FIG. 10-21 (B1) shows an effect execution example 87AKM71 in which a promotion effect by displaying the display image 87AKF1 is executed following the effect execution example 87AKM63. FIG. 10-21 (B2) shows an effect execution example 87AKM72 in which the promotion effect by displaying the display image 87AKF2 is executed following the effect execution example 87AKM63. FIG. 10-21 (B3) shows an effect execution example 87AKM73 in which the promotion effect by displaying the display image 87AKF3 is executed following the effect execution example 87AKM63. After the cut-in effect, which is the second timing, the promotion effect is executed in the effect mode of the small V-con display by the display image 87AKF1 such as the effect execution example 87AKM71, and the effect execution example 87AKM72. The promotion effect is executed in the effect mode of the medium V-con display by the display image 87AKF2, and the promotion effect is executed in the effect mode of the large V-con display by the display image 87AKF3 such as the effect execution example 87AKM73. There are cases. In step 87AKS106 of the effect determination process, the feature units 87AK to 89AK correspond to the feature unit 87AK to 89AK, such as the promotion effect determination example 87AK51 for the feature unit 87AK, the promotion effect determination example 88AK01 for the feature unit 88AK, and the promotion effect determination example 89AK01 for the feature unit 89AK. The display image 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect is determined in proportion. With the execution of the promotion effect, the effective detection period is set to effectively detect the movement of the player. During the effective detection period, it is possible to detect an operation in which the player tilts the operation stick of the stick controller 31A, such as a pulling operation on the V controller. Based on the result of detecting the movement of the player during the effective detection period, the movement effect can be executed.

FIG. 10-22 (A1) shows an effect execution example 87AKM81 when the operation effect is executed corresponding to the display result of the variable display being “missing”. In this case, for example, the fixed decorative symbol having a reach loss such as the effect execution example 87AKM91 shown in FIG. 10-22 (B1) is stopped and displayed, so that the display result of the variable display is derived and the process ends.

FIG. 10-22 (A2) shows an effect execution example 87AKM82 when the operation effect is executed corresponding to the display result of the variable display corresponding to the “big hit”. In this case, for example, the fixed decorative symbol of the jackpot combination such as the effect execution example 87AKM92 shown in FIG. 10-22 (B2) is stopped and displayed, so that the display result of the variable display is derived and ends.

In this way, the promotion effect that promotes the movement of the player includes whether or not the cut-in effect is executed and the effect mode, whether or not the change effect is executed and the timing, the final display image of the active display, whether or not the suggestion effect is executed, and the effect mode. It is possible to execute different effects in different proportions according to other effects and display states. Further, depending on the effect mode of the promotion effect, the display result of the variable display becomes a "big hit", and the degree of expectation controlled to the big hit game state can be different. Further, the suggestion effect, the change effect, and the cut-in effect can be executed without detecting the movement of the player. It is possible to execute the promotion effect at a different ratio according to the presence / absence of execution of the effect that can be executed without detecting the movement of the player, the effect mode, and the timing. As a result, by increasing the player's interest in various productions, the player's expectation can be appropriately raised by the production, and the game entertainment can be improved.

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above-described embodiment, and is a part described in the above-described embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art. It may have the structure of. For example, in a configuration such as 88AK01 for determining the promotion effect related to the feature portion 88AK and 89AK01 for determining the promotion effect for the feature portion 89AK, the effect mode of the promotion effect can be determined regardless of whether or not the cut-in effect is executed and the effect mode. , The cut-in effect does not have to be executed.

It suffices that the promotion effect can be executed with different proportions of the effect mode depending on the presence / absence of execution, the effect mode, the timing, or a combination of a part or all of them in an arbitrary effect different from the promotion effect. For example, when the variable display effect of the "pseudo-ream" is executed, the ratio of the effect mode of the promotion effect to the predetermined mode may be different depending on the presence / absence of the execution, the effect mode, and the timing. The variable display effect of the "pseudo-ream" can execute the re-variable display once or a plurality of times after temporarily stopping the variable display after the variable display is started and then executing the variable display again. When the variable display is temporarily stopped, it may be in a predetermined temporary stop mode such as a pseudo-continuous chance eye. The pseudo-ream chance eye may include a combination of a plurality of types of temporary stop symbols according to the combination of decorative symbols. In this case, for example, the ratio of the effect mode of the promotion effect may be different depending on the pseudo-continuous chances displayed as a temporary stop.

When the variable display effect of "pseudo-ream" is executed, it is possible to execute the promotion effect and the action effect a plurality of times before and after the execution of the revariable display and after each revariable display is executed. It may be. In this case, among the plurality of promotion effects, the second promotion effect executed after the first promotion effect is the presence / absence of execution in the first promotion effect, the effect mode, the timing, or a part or all of them. Depending on the combination, the ratio of the effect mode may be different and the execution may be performed.

Along with the change effect that changes the display mode of the active display, or instead of the change effect that changes the display mode of the active display, it may be possible to execute the hold change effect that changes the display mode of the hold display. In this case, the hold information related to the variable display is stored as the hold data including the random value for determining the display result, and in the first hold display area 87AKB1 and the second hold display area 87AKB2, the first hold display based on the hold information is stored. And the second hold display is executed. Then, before the start of the variable display corresponding to the hold information, the hold change effect of changing the display mode of the first hold display or the second hold display at a different rate depending on whether or not the hold information is specific information is performed. It may be feasible. In such a configuration in which the hold change effect can be executed, the promotion effect may be executed at different ratios of the effect modes depending on whether or not the hold change effect is executed, the effect mode, and the timing.

The production modes such as suggestion production, change production, cut-in production, and promotion production are not limited to those in which the production modes differ depending on the display of different display images for some or all of the production modes, and various production devices are used. Any of the production modes may be different. For example, together with the display of the display image, or instead of the display of the display image, the sound output mode from the speakers 8L and 8R, the light emission mode in the light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 and the effect LED, and the operation mode in the effect movable member. Or, depending on the combination of a part or all of them, the effect may be executed by any one of a plurality of effect modes.

The advantageous state is not limited to the big hit game state, and may include a special game state such as a time saving state or a probability change state. In addition, the maximum number of round games that can be executed in the jackpot game state is the number of first rounds (for example, "15") that is larger than the number of second rounds (for example, "7"), and it can be executed in a time-saving state. The upper limit of the variable display is the first number (for example, "100"), which is larger than the second number (for example, "50"), and the jackpot probability in the probability variation state is higher than the second probability (for example, 1/50). The number of consecutive chans, which is one probability (for example, 1/20) and the number of times that the jackpot game state is repeatedly controlled without being controlled in the normal state, is larger than the number of consecutive chans (for example, "5"). It may include a more favorable gaming situation for the player, such as part or all of the number of consecutive chans (eg, "10"). The display images 87AKC1 to 87AKC4, which are the final display images of the active display, and the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect may be determined at different ratios depending on whether or not they are controlled to these advantageous states. ..

As an advantageous state that is advantageous for the player, it may be controlled to a KT (small hit time) state in which the probability that the variable display result becomes a "small hit" is high. For example, after the jackpot game state is completed, the KT state may be controlled at a predetermined ratio (including 100%). A gaming state that is not in the KT state may be referred to as a non-KT state. Further, the period controlled by the KT state may be referred to as a KT period, and the period not controlled by the KT state may be referred to as a non-KT period.

In the non-KT state, the variable display time of the second special figure is set to a very long time (for example, about 30 minutes). On the other hand, in the KT state, the variable display time of the second special figure is set to a relatively short time (for example, 5 seconds). Therefore, in the KT state, when the second start winning is continuously generated due to the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening, the execution frequency of the variable display using the second special figure is the non-KT state. It will be much better than at. Corresponding to the variable display using the first special figure and the second special figure, the rate at which the variable display result is determined as "small hit" is higher than the rate at which the variable display result is determined as "big hit". ing. For example, the variable display result is determined to be a "small hit" at a rate of 99/100 (99%), and the variable display result is determined to be a "big hit" at a rate of 1/100 (1%). If the variable display result using the first special figure is "small hit", it is difficult for the game ball to pass (enter) through the large winning opening because the period during which the large winning opening is opened is short. Therefore, the game ball, which is a prize ball, is not paid out. In the KT state, the execution frequency of the variable display using the second special figure is improved, so that the frequency at which the variable display result using the second special figure becomes a "small hit" is also improved, and the small hit game state. It becomes easier to open the big prize opening. In the KT state, when the player shoots the game ball toward the right game area (right-handed), the frequency with which the big winning opening is opened is improved as compared with the non-KT state, which is advantageous for the player. Become. The display images 87AKC1 to 87AKC4, which are the final display images of the active display, and the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect may be determined at different ratios depending on whether or not the KT state is controlled.

The various restrictions may be any range or limitation as long as they do not deviate from the achievement purpose, the problem to be solved, or other purposes of the present invention. The range of the limitation may be a condition that makes the presence / absence, the ratio, and other quantities different for the execution of processing, control, and operation, and the limit of the limitation is the presence / absence, ratio, and other quantity for the execution of processing, control, and operation. The content may be different (for example, when stopping, reducing, reducing, etc.).

(Problem-solving means and effects of feature section 87AK)
A gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine 1 that can perform variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state such as a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player, such as a stick controller 31A and a controller sensor unit 35A. The detection means capable of detecting the operation of the above, the specific display means capable of displaying the specific display corresponding to the variable display such as the active display area 87AKA1, the first hold display area 87AKAB1, and the second hold display area 87AKB2, and the player's It is possible to execute the promotion effect that promotes the operation, for example, the promotion effect execution means such as the effect control CPU 120 that executes step 87AKS051 of the effect processing during variable display, and the operation effect can be executed based on the detection result of the detection means. For example, an operation effect executing means such as an effect control CPU 120 that executes step 87AKS053 of the variable display effect process, and an effect that can execute a predetermined effect while executing the variable display, for example, step 87AKS049 of the variable display effect process. The specific display means includes a predetermined effect executing means such as a control CPU 120, and the specific display means includes a specific mode such as a red display using the display image 87AKC4, for example, a plurality of displays such as display colors corresponding to the display images 87AKC1 to 87AKC4. The specific display can be displayed by any one of the modes, and the promotion effect executing means includes, for example, a special mode such as a large V-con display using the display image 87AKF3, for example, a V-con display according to the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3. The promotion effect can be executed by any one of a plurality of effect modes such as the size of the display image, and the predetermined effect execution means includes, for example, a predetermined mode such as a message of "super heat !!" using the display image 87AKE3. A predetermined effect can be executed by any one of a plurality of effect modes such as a message corresponding to the display images 87AKE1 to 87AKE3. For example, as in the determination example 87AK41 of the cut-in effect in FIG. 10-12, the display mode of the specific display Depending on the situation, the predetermined effect is executed at a different rate according to the predetermined mode. For example, as in the case of determining the promotion effect 87AK51 according to the cut-in effect in FIG. The promotion effect is executed according to a special mode, and is controlled to an advantageous state at different ratios depending on the effect mode of the promotion effect, for example, as in the case of determining the promotion effect 87AK51 according to the variable display result in FIG. 10-13. As a result, by increasing the player's interest in various productions, it is possible to appropriately raise the player's expectation by the production and improve the game interest.

For example, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (B3), the predetermined effect can be executed by the predetermined effect executing means after the specific display is displayed by the specific display means and before the motion effect is executed by the motion effect executing means. You may. As a result, it is possible to appropriately raise the expectation of the player by directing and improve the interest of the game.

For example, it may be possible to change the display mode of the specific display in response to the execution of the predetermined effect, such as during the cut-in effect of the second timing in FIG. 10-9 (B3). As a result, it is possible to appropriately raise the expectation of the player by directing and improve the interest of the game.

For example, in the case where the display image 87AKE1 to 87AKE3 is determined in the determination example 87AK41 of the cut-in effect, the display mode of the specific display is different depending on which of the plurality of effect modes the predetermined effect is executed. It may be possible to change. As a result, it is possible to appropriately raise the expectation of the player by directing and improve the interest of the game.

For example, in the case where the first timing is determined to be the change pattern 87AKP1-3 in the change pattern determination example 87AK22, it corresponds to the case where the display mode of the specific display is the specific mode before the execution of the predetermined effect by the predetermined effect executing means. Therefore, it is not necessary to change the display mode of the specific display. As a result, it is possible to appropriately raise the expectation of the player by directing and improve the interest of the game.

For example, the CPU 103 that executes the setting value changing process of step S6A in FIG. 9-6 is provided with a setting means that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player. Depending on the setting, the specific display may be displayed at a different ratio by any one of the plurality of display modes. As a result, it is possible to appropriately raise the expectation of the player by directing and improve the interest of the game.

For example, the CPU 103 that executes the setting value changing process of step S6A in FIG. 9-6 is provided with a setting means that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player. Depending on the setting, the predetermined effect may be executed in any one of a plurality of effect modes at different ratios. As a result, it is possible to appropriately raise the expectation of the player by directing and improve the interest of the game.

For example, a setting means capable of setting any of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, such as the CPU 103 that executes the setting value changing process of step S6A in FIG. 9-6, is provided. As in the case of determining the promotion effect in -16, 87AK61, the promotion effect may be executed in any one of a plurality of effect modes at different ratios depending on the setting of the setting means. As a result, it is possible to appropriately raise the expectation of the player by directing and improve the interest of the game.

(Problem-solving means and effects of feature 88AK)
A gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine 1 that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state such as a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player, such as a stick controller 31A and a controller sensor unit 35A. The detection means capable of detecting the operation of the player, the specific display means capable of displaying the specific display corresponding to the variable display such as the active display area 87AKA1, the first hold display area 87AKAB1, and the second hold display area 87AKB2, and the player's It is possible to execute the promotion effect that promotes the operation, for example, the promotion effect execution means such as the effect control CPU 120 that executes step 87AKS051 of the effect processing during variable display, and the operation effect can be executed based on the detection result of the detection means. For example, the operation effect executing means such as the effect control CPU 120 that executes the variable display effect process step 87AKS053 and the change effect that changes the display mode of the specific display can be executed, for example, the variable display effect process step 87AKS045 is executed. The specific display means is provided with a change effect execution means such as a CPU 120 for effect control, and the specific display means is red using, for example, the display image 87AKC4 from a period before the execution of the operation effect, such as the effect execution examples 87AKM01 to 87AKM73. The specific display can be displayed by any one of a plurality of display modes including the specific mode such as the display, for example, the display color corresponding to the display images 87AKC1 to 87AKC4, and the promotion effect executing means uses, for example, the display image 87AKF3. The promotion effect can be executed by any one of a plurality of effect modes such as the size of the V-con display according to the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3, including a special mode such as the large V-con display, and the change effect execution means is For example, the change effect can be executed at any of a plurality of timings, such as the feasible timing of the change effect in FIG. 10-9 (B3), and corresponds to the final display image in FIG. 10-14, for example. As in the case of determining the promotion effect 88AK01, the promotion effect is executed in a special mode at a different ratio according to the display mode of the specific display, and for example, as in the case of the determination example 88AK01 of the promotion effect according to the change effect in FIGS. 10-14. In addition, the selection ratio of the timing at which the change effect is executed differs depending on whether the promotion effect is executed in the special mode or not, and for example, the promotion effect according to the variable display result in FIGS. 10-14. Promotion production as in the decision example 88AK01 It is controlled to an advantageous state at different ratios according to the effect mode of. As a result, by increasing the player's interest in various productions, it is possible to appropriately raise the player's expectation by the production and improve the game interest.

For example, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (B3), the predetermined effect can be executed by the predetermined effect executing means after the specific display is displayed by the specific display means and before the motion effect is executed by the motion effect executing means. You may. As a result, it is possible to appropriately raise the expectation of the player by directing and improve the interest of the game.

For example, at the time of the cut-in effect of the second timing in FIG. 10-9 (B3), the change effect may be executed by the change effect execution means in response to the execution of the predetermined effect by the predetermined effect execution means. As a result, it is possible to appropriately raise the expectation of the player by directing and improve the interest of the game.

For example, when the display images 87AKE1 to 87AKE3 are determined in the cut-in effect determination example 87AK41, the change effect can be executed at different ratios depending on which of the plurality of effect modes the predetermined effect is executed. It may be. As a result, it is possible to appropriately raise the expectation of the player by directing and improve the interest of the game.

For example, in the case where the first timing is determined to be the change pattern 87AKP1-3 in the change pattern determination example 87AK22, it corresponds to the case where the display mode of the specific display is the specific mode before the execution of the predetermined effect by the predetermined effect executing means. Therefore, it is not necessary to execute the change effect by the change effect execution means. As a result, it is possible to appropriately raise the expectation of the player by directing and improve the interest of the game.

For example, the CPU 103 that executes the setting value changing process of step S6A in FIG. 9-6 is provided with a setting means that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player. Depending on the setting, the specific display may be displayed at a different ratio by any one of the plurality of display modes. As a result, it is possible to appropriately raise the expectation of the player by directing and improve the interest of the game.

For example, the CPU 103 that executes the setting value changing process of step S6A in FIG. 9-6 is provided with a setting means that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player. Depending on the setting, the predetermined effect may be executed in any one of a plurality of effect modes at different ratios. As a result, it is possible to appropriately raise the expectation of the player by directing and improve the interest of the game.

For example, a setting means capable of setting any of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, such as the CPU 103 that executes the setting value changing process of step S6A in FIG. 9-6, is provided. As in the case of determining the promotion effect in -16, 87AK61, the promotion effect may be executed in any one of a plurality of effect modes at different ratios depending on the setting of the setting means. As a result, it is possible to appropriately raise the expectation of the player by directing and improve the interest of the game.

(Problem-solving means and effects of feature 89AK)
A gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine 1 that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state such as a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player, such as a stick controller 31A and a controller sensor unit 35A. The detection means capable of detecting the operation of the player, the specific display means capable of displaying the specific display corresponding to the variable display such as the active display area 87AKA1, the first hold display area 87AKAB1, and the second hold display area 87AKB2, and the player's It is possible to execute the promotion effect that promotes the operation, for example, the promotion effect execution means such as the effect control CPU 120 that executes step 87AKS051 of the effect processing during variable display, and the operation effect can be executed based on the detection result of the detection means. For example, it is possible to execute an operation effect executing means such as the effect control CPU 120 that executes step 87AKS053 of the variable display effect process and a suggestion effect suggesting that the display mode of the specific display changes, for example, the variable display effect process. The specific display means includes a suggestion effect execution means such as the effect control CPU 120 for executing step 87AKS043, and the specific display means includes a specific mode such as a red display using the display image 87AKC4, for example, a display according to the display images 87AKC1 to 87AKC4. The specific display can be displayed by any one of a plurality of display modes such as colors, and the promotion effect executing means includes, for example, a special mode such as a large V-con display using the display image 87AKF3, for example, display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3. The promotion effect can be executed by any one of a plurality of effect modes such as the size of the V-con display according to the display, and the suggestion effect execution means is, for example, a plurality of effect modes such as the suggestion mode according to the displayed images 87AKD1 to 87AKD3. The suggestion effect can be executed by any of the above, and for example, as in the determination example 87AK32 of the suggestion effect in FIG. 10-11 (B), the specific display is displayed in a specific mode at a different ratio depending on the effect mode of the suggestion effect. Displayed, for example, as in the determination example 89AK01 of the promotion effect according to the suggestion effect in FIG. 10-15, which of the plurality of effect modes is displayed at different ratios depending on whether or not the promotion effect is executed by a special mode. The suggestion effect is executed, and is controlled to an advantageous state at different ratios depending on the effect mode of the promotion effect, as in the determination example 89AK01 of the promotion effect according to the variable display result in FIG. 10-15. As a result, it is possible to appropriately raise the expectation of the player by directing and improve the interest of the game.

For example, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (B3), the predetermined effect can be executed by the predetermined effect executing means after the specific display is displayed by the specific display means and before the motion effect is executed by the motion effect executing means. You may. As a result, it is possible to appropriately raise the expectation of the player by directing and improve the interest of the game.

For example, it may be possible to change the display mode of the specific display in response to the execution of the predetermined effect by the predetermined effect executing means, such as during the cut-in effect of the second timing in FIG. 10-9 (B3). As a result, it is possible to appropriately raise the expectation of the player by directing and improve the interest of the game.

For example, in the case where the display image 87AKE1 to 87AKE3 is determined in the determination example 87AK41 of the cut-in effect, the display mode of the specific display is different depending on which of the plurality of effect modes the predetermined effect is executed. It may be possible to change. As a result, it is possible to appropriately raise the expectation of the player by directing and improve the interest of the game.

For example, in the case where the first timing is determined to be the change pattern 87AKP1-3 in the change pattern determination example 87AK22, it corresponds to the case where the display mode of the specific display is the specific mode before the execution of the predetermined effect by the predetermined effect executing means. Therefore, it is not necessary to change the display mode of the specific display. As a result, it is possible to appropriately raise the expectation of the player by directing and improve the interest of the game.

For example, the CPU 103 that executes the setting value changing process of step S6A in FIG. 9-6 is provided with a setting means that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player. Depending on the setting, the specific display may be displayed at a different ratio by any one of the plurality of display modes. As a result, it is possible to appropriately raise the expectation of the player by directing and improve the interest of the game.

For example, the CPU 103 that executes the setting value changing process of step S6A in FIG. 9-6 is provided with a setting means that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player. Depending on the setting, the predetermined effect may be executed in any one of a plurality of effect modes at different ratios. As a result, it is possible to appropriately raise the expectation of the player by directing and improve the interest of the game.

For example, a setting means capable of setting any of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, such as the CPU 103 that executes the setting value changing process of step S6A in FIG. 9-6, is provided. As in the case of determining the promotion effect in -16, 87AK61, the promotion effect may be executed in any one of a plurality of effect modes at different ratios depending on the setting of the setting means. As a result, it is possible to appropriately raise the expectation of the player by directing and improve the interest of the game.

1 ... Pachinko game machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Game machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9… Game effect lamp 10… General winning opening 11… Main board 12… Production control board 13… Voice control board 14… Lamp control board 15… Relay board 20… Ordinary symbol display 21… Gate switch 22A, 22B… Starting port Switch 23 ... Count switch 30 ... Hitting ball operation handle 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 32 ... Movable body 100 ... Game control microcomputer 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... Random number circuit 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for production control
123… Display control unit

Claims (1)

It is a gaming machine that can perform variable display and control it to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Power supply means and
A first control means that receives power from the power supply means for control,
A second control means that receives power supply from the power supply means and controls based on instruction information from the first control means.
A monitoring means that monitors the power supply supplied to the second control means and notifies the second control means.
It is equipped with a storage means that can retain the stored contents even if the power supply to the game machine is stopped.
At the start of control, the second control means executes different start-up processes in response to a notification from the monitoring means, and the power supply voltage of the supplied power supply changes from less than a predetermined value to more than or equal to the predetermined value. When notified from the monitoring means, the predetermined information regarding the activation is stored in the storage means based on the instruction information from the first control means.
further,
A detection means that can detect the movement of the player,
Specific display means that can display specific display corresponding to variable display,
A promotion effect execution means that can execute a promotion effect that promotes the movement of the player,
An operation effect executing means capable of executing an operation effect based on the detection result of the detection means,
It is provided with a predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect while the variable display is being executed.
The specific display means can display the specific display by any one of a plurality of display modes including the specific mode.
The promotion effect execution means can execute the promotion effect by any one of a plurality of effect modes including a special mode.
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect by any one of a plurality of effect modes including the predetermined mode.
Depending on the display mode of the specific display, the predetermined effect is executed by the predetermined mode at different rates.
Depending on the effect mode of the predetermined effect, the promotion effect is executed by the special mode at different rates.
Depending on the production mode of the promotion effect, the advantageous state is controlled at different ratios.
A game machine characterized by that.